manualshive.com logo in svg

Siemens HiPath 3000 Series, Service Documentation

The Siemens HiPath 3000 Series offers exceptional telecommunication solutions for businesses of all sizes. Gain access to comprehensive Service Documentation and user manuals, available for download absolutely free from manualshive.com. Discover an array of features and functions, ensuring seamless communication for your organization.

Share
Download
background image

exup.fm

A31003-H3590-S100-7-7620, 06/2012
HiPath 3000/5000 V9, Service documentation

9-33

Nur für den internen Gebrauch

Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000

Upgrading HiPath 3000

9.2.2.3

Upgrading a HiPath 5000 RSM Network 

Procedure 

1.

Dissolve the network: 

a)

Remove all systems (nodes) belonging to the network from HiPath 5000 RSM. 

a)

FeatureStop the server service. 

2.

Upgrade each system that belongs to the network:

a)

Upgrade all HG 1500 boards to V9. 

b)

Convert the customer database (CDB) and reload it together with the V9 system soft-
ware. 

3.

Once all standalone systems have been upgraded, you can upgrade HiPath 5000 RSM on 
site. To do this, add all systems (nodes) belonging to the network to HiPath 5000 RSM. 

4.

Put the network into service with HiPath 3000/5000 V9 (commission the Feature server 
service).

5.

Install new licenses.

The upgrade is complete.

9.2.2.4

Upgrading a HiPath 3000 System Networked with HiPath 2000 

Procedure 

1.

Upgrade each system that belongs to the network:

●

Upgrade HiPath 3000 systems and the associated HG 1500 boards to V9. 
Convert the customer database (CDB) and reload it together with the V9 system soft-
ware.

●

Upgrade HiPath 2000 systems to V2. 
Convert the customer database (CDB) and reload it together with the V2 system soft-
ware.

2.

Install new licenses.

The upgrade is complete.

Summary of Contents for HiPath 3000 Series

Page 1: ...Siemens Enterprise Communications www siemens enterprise com Documentation HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 ...

Page 2: ... descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice OpenScape OpenStage and...

Page 3: ... Connection to the Power Circuit 1 16 1 6 2 Fire Safety Requirements 1 16 1 6 3 Shielded Cables for LAN WAN and DMZ Connections 1 17 1 6 4 Lightning Protection 1 18 1 6 5 Markings 1 18 1 7 Privacy and Data Security 1 19 1 8 Further Information 1 20 2 System Data 2 1 2 1 HiPath 3000 2 3 2 1 1 Electrical environment 2 3 2 1 2 Lightning Protection 2 3 2 1 3 Individual HiPath 3000 System Models 2 4 2 ...

Page 4: ... 4 4 MOH Channels G 711 G 723 G 729 2 50 2 4 5 IP Networking Channels PBX Networking Channels 2 50 2 4 6 Bandwidth Control for IP Networking Channels PBX Networking Channels 2 50 2 4 7 DMC Direct Media Connection Channels 2 51 2 4 8 ISDN Routing PPP Channels 2 51 2 4 9 Fax Modem Channels 2 52 2 5 Dynamic Configuration Rules 2 53 2 5 1 Dynamic performance 2 53 2 5 2 Thumb Rule for HiPath 3000 5000 ...

Page 5: ...ot for U S 2 86 2 10 2 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards for U S and Canada only 2 86 2 10 2 1 FCC Compliance 2 87 2 10 2 1 1 FCC Rules Part 15 2 87 2 10 2 1 2 FCC Rules Part 68 2 87 2 10 2 2 Industry Canada Compliance 2 90 2 10 2 2 1 REN 2 90 2 10 2 2 2 Equipment Attachment Limitations 2 90 2 10 3 SAFETY International 2 91 2 11 Environmental Conditions 2 92 2 11 1 Electrical Operating Con...

Page 6: ...1 SLU8 3 216 3 3 22 SLU8R 3 218 3 3 23 STLS2 not for U S STLS4 3 220 3 3 24 STLS4R 3 226 3 3 25 STLSX2 STLSX4 STLSX4R 3 228 3 3 26 STMD3 3 233 3 3 27 STMI2 3 239 3 3 28 TCAS 2 and TCASR 2 for selected countries only 3 244 3 3 29 TLA2 Not for U S TLA4 Not for U S TLA8 not for U S 3 257 3 3 30 TLA4R not for U S 3 260 3 3 31 TM2LP 3 262 3 3 32 TMAMF for selected countries only 3 270 3 3 33 TLANI2 TLA...

Page 7: ...6 3 4 17 V 24 Adapter 3 398 3 4 18 V 24 Cable 3 399 4 Installing HiPath 3000 4 1 4 1 Installing HiPath 3800 4 2 4 1 1 Installation Prerequisites 4 2 4 1 2 Installation Procedure 4 3 4 1 3 Installing HiPath 3800 Standalone 4 4 4 1 3 1 Selecting the Installation Site 4 4 4 1 3 1 1 For U S only Power plug 4 4 4 1 3 2 Unpacking the Components 4 6 4 1 3 3 Setting up the System Cabinets 4 7 4 1 3 3 1 Ov...

Page 8: ...pherals to Connector Panels with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors 4 64 4 1 7 Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch Panel 4 66 4 1 7 1 Using an External Main Distribution Frame MDFU E S30805 U5283 X 4 67 4 1 7 1 1 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame MDFU E 4 68 4 1 7 1 2 Laying the Line Network and Jumpers on the MDFU E 4 68 4 1 7 2 Inserting the External Patch Panel S30807K6143 X 4 72 ...

Page 9: ... 2 4 7 Installing the Boards 4 117 4 2 4 8 Connecting Cables and the Line Network 4 118 4 2 4 9 Configuration Notes 4 120 4 2 4 10 Connecting Workpoint Clients 4 123 4 2 4 11 Making Trunk Connections 4 123 4 2 4 12 Performing a Visual Inspection 4 123 4 2 4 13 Installing the EXMR on the CBRC 4 124 4 2 5 Replacing the Backplane 4 126 4 2 5 1 Replacing the Backplane for HiPath 3350 3550 Wall Cabinet...

Page 10: ...5 6 5 2 9 Adaptation of QoS Classes to Oscar 6 15 6 6 Starting HiPath 5000 6 16 6 6 1 Preparing for Installation 6 16 6 6 2 Integrating the HiPath 5000 Server in the Customer LAN 6 17 6 6 3 HiPath 5000Installing Standard Components 6 18 6 6 3 1 Overview 6 18 6 6 3 2 Licensing 6 19 6 6 3 3 Starting the Installation 6 20 6 6 4 Installing HiPath Fault Management 6 26 6 6 5 Installing the TAPI Service...

Page 11: ...artup 7 8 8 Licensing 8 1 8 1 Licensing Fundamentals 8 2 8 2 Licensing for HiPath 3000 V9 HiPath 5000 V9 8 4 8 2 1 Products and Components subject to Mandatory Licensing 8 4 8 2 2 Grace Period 8 11 8 2 3 License Failure Period 8 11 8 2 4 Performing Licensing 8 11 8 3 Licensing Scenarios 8 17 8 3 1 HiPath 3000 as a Standalone System 8 17 8 3 2 Networked HiPath 3000 Systems without HiPath 5000 RSM 8...

Page 12: ...a HiPath 3000 System Networked with HiPath 2000 9 33 9 2 2 5 Upgrading a HiPath 3000 System Networked with HiPath 4000 9 34 9 2 3 Upgrade HiPath 3000 for Signaling Payload encryption SPE 9 35 9 2 3 1 Upgrading 9 35 9 2 3 2 Additional System Load 9 36 10 Workpoint Clients 10 1 10 1 OpenStage Product Family 10 4 10 1 1 Gigabit variant of OpenStage terminals 10 5 10 1 2 OpenStage Terminals 10 6 10 1 ...

Page 13: ...S 10 60 10 2 2 2 optiPoint 420 economy plus optiPoint 420 economy plus S 10 62 10 2 2 3 optiPoint 420 standard optiPoint 420 standard S 10 64 10 2 2 4 optiPoint 420 advance optiPoint 420 advance S 10 66 10 2 3 Connection and Startup 10 68 10 2 3 1 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone 10 69 10 2 4 Key Modules for optiPoint 410 410 S and 420 420 S 10 71 10 2 4 1 optiPoint self labeling key mod...

Page 14: ...nScape Personal Edition 10 114 10 10 HiPath AP 1120 10 116 10 11 optiPoint WL2 professional optiPoint WL2 professional S 10 117 10 12 Attendant Console Versions 10 123 10 12 1 OpenStage Attendant 10 123 10 12 2 optiPoint Attendant 10 124 10 12 3 optiClient Attendant V8 10 125 10 13 Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office 10 129 10 13 1 Gigaset SL3 professional 10 129 10 13 2 Gigaset S4 profes...

Page 15: ... 6 2 Configuring the Plug PC for HiPath 3000 HG 1500 and HiPath Xpressions Compact 12 12 12 2 6 3 Monitoring success 12 12 12 2 7 Tracing 12 13 12 2 7 1 Executing the X Trace 12 13 12 2 7 2 Executing the network trace 12 13 12 2 7 3 Downloading the trace files 12 14 12 2 8 Status window 12 14 12 2 9 Information window 12 14 12 2 10 Reset SSDP Service Plugin 12 14 12 2 11 Connectivity check 12 15 1...

Page 16: ... 37 12 4 2 2 Power Supplies 12 38 12 4 2 3 Peripheral boards 12 39 12 4 3 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status 12 40 12 4 4 Recording Station Status 12 41 12 4 5 Recording the Status of the HiPath 3000 V 24 Interfaces 12 42 12 4 6 Trace Options for HiPath 3000 12 43 12 4 6 1 Tracing ISDN activities 12 43 12 4 6 2 Tracing call specific activities 12 43 12 4 7 Trace Options and Evaluations in Connecti...

Page 17: ...nnection 12 108 12 6 7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP 12 108 12 6 7 1 Remote System Administration 12 108 12 6 7 2 Remote Administration of Plus Products 12 108 12 6 7 3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP 12 109 12 7 Security Features 12 110 12 7 1 Access Security 12 110 12 7 1 1 User Specific Logon for WBM 12 110 12 7 1 2 Password Protection against Brute Force Attacks 12 113 12 7 1 3 ...

Page 18: ...ol IPCP 13 32 13 6 8 7 Compression of IP Headers 13 32 13 6 8 8 Data Compression 13 32 13 6 8 9 IP accounting 13 33 13 6 9 Virtual Private Network VPN 13 34 13 6 9 1 Secure Mode 13 35 13 6 9 2 Security Policy 13 37 13 6 9 3 Security Associations 13 37 13 6 9 4 Tunnel 13 38 13 6 9 5 Data Security 13 39 13 6 10 System Client 13 39 13 6 11 Displaying Adding and Configuring PKI Servers 13 39 13 6 12 R...

Page 19: ... Functions 13 66 13 10 2 3 Using SNMP 13 68 13 10 3 Administering HiPath 3000 5000 via the LAN Interface 13 73 A System Programming Codes Expert Mode Codes A 1 A 1 Introduction A 1 A 2 Accessing system administration A 1 B Codes for Activating Deactivating Features B 1 C IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000 5000 V7 and Higher C 1 D Identifying System Power Requirements D 1 D 1 HiPat...

Page 20: ...Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 0 18 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation hp3hp5shTOC fm F 2 Countries with Country Code IM F 3 Abbreviations Y 1 Index Z 1 ...

Page 21: ... the two HiPath 3000 en ables any combination of IP analog and digital telephones as well as PC clients and cordless telephones The Introduction provides an overview of the structure of this documentation The Introduction is intended to help you find information on specific topics more quickly It is absolutely essential that you read and understand the safety information and warnings be fore you s...

Page 22: ...e assembly and commissioning of a communication system and is intended for administrators HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Manager C Administrator documentation This documentation describes administration procedures using HiPath 3000 Manager C and is directed at customers HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Manager E Administrator documentation This documentation describes administration procedures using HiPath 3000 Manager E...

Page 23: ...Inventory Manager and is intended for service technicians HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Software Manager Operating Instructions This documentation describes the operation of the Software Manager and is intended for service technicians HiPath 3000 DLI Administrator Documentation This documentation describes the central administration of IP workpoints via the system and is intended for service technicians Oth...

Page 24: ... board Chapter 4 Installing HiPath 3000 The actions necessary for the standard installation part of a standard system of the different HiPath 3000 systems are described in this chapter Chapter 5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 The procedures for the startup of the individual HiPath 3000 5000 systems and components are described in these chap ters Chapter 6 Startup and Admin istration HiPath 5000 Chapter 7...

Page 25: ...h HiPath 3000 5000 V7 and Higher Appendix D Identifying System Power Requirements This supplement provides information on the power require ment of the boards and components of the HiPath 3000 sys tems Appendix E Notes for Editing the File snmpd cnf This appendix is aimed at users with sufficient SNMP knowl edge to modify trap destinations and community names in HiPath Fault Management Desktop App...

Page 26: ...be entered or selected in input selec tion fields Courier and bold Word1 Word2 Word3 Placeholder In angle brack ets and italic InstDir Files and directories containing files Courier InstDir config services glo bal cfg Operations and sub operations in the guideline text Numbered nested list 1 Activate the SIP Registrar checkbox The input fields are now activated 2 Enter the following settings 1 Act...

Page 27: ... warnings before starting installation and implementation work on the communication sys tem or device You should also carefully read and observe all safety information and warn ings on the communication systems and devices themselves Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers Always consult a supervisor before starting work in conditions where the necessary safety precautions do not appear to be ...

Page 28: ...manual They explain symbols that may be depicted on the communication systems and equipment electrostatically sensitive devices 1 2 1 Warning Sign DANGER 1 5 3 0 6 4 2 Electricity Weight Heat Fire Chemicals ESD Laser 7 DANGER Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires Note Voltages above 30 Vac alternating current or 60 V DC direct current are dangerous Only personnel with proper quali...

Page 29: ...circuits Only use systems tools and equipment which are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with visible damage Replace any damaged safety equipment covers labels and ground wires im mediately Replace the power cable immediately if you notice any damage Only place systems or devices in protection class I into operation using a ground contact socket Connect the communication system and if nec...

Page 30: ...sign reading DO NOT OPERATE to the disconnect de vice Ensure that the communication system or device is not powered from an addi tional power source for example an uninterruptible power supply or that it is protected by an additional fuse or an additional main switch If you are performing work on circuits with hazardous voltages always work to gether with a partner who is familiar with the locatio...

Page 31: ...acturer 7 CAUTION Risk of fire Only telecommunications cables with a cable diameter of at least 0 4 mm AWG 26 may be used The system cabinets must not be fitted with any third party devices that have not been approved Do not store any documents or similar flammable items in the system 7 CAUTION General risk of injury accidents in the workplace When maintenance work has been completed always re ins...

Page 32: ...must always be programmed to allow the dialing of emergency numbers for example 000 1 2 5 Safety Information for Brazil for Brazil only The use of the outlet strip with overvoltage protection with part number C39334 Z7052 C33 is absolutely mandatory The AC power of the HiPath 3000 systems must be conducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection It is absolutely necessary to use a shi...

Page 33: ...nd EMC regulations Before starting wall mounting check that the wall has sufficient bearing strength Always use suitable installation and mounting materials to mount the communication systems and devices securely Condensation damage A sudden temperature change may cause condensation to form If the communication sys tem or device is for example moved from a cold environment to a warmer space conden...

Page 34: ...beat restoration and burn treatment are essential in emer gencies of this kind Administer resuscitation immediately if the person is not breathing mouth to mouth or mouth to nose If you are trained and certified administer cardiac compression if the heart is not beating Calling for help 1 Immediately call an ambulance or the emergency doctor Give details of the accident in the following order Wher...

Page 35: ...s a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and elec tronic equipment For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance please contact your city office waste disposal service the shop where you pur chased the product or your sales representative The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is in stalled and sold in the countries of the Europ...

Page 36: ...nts must be ob served e g in the USA Canada 1 6 2 Fire Safety Requirements Fire safety requirements are defined on a country specific basis in the building regulations Please follow the valid regulations for your country To ensure the legal fire protection and EMC requirements operate the HiPath systems only when closed You may open the system only briefly for assembly and maintenance work HiPath ...

Page 37: ...ng potential equalization Shielding properties on the cable components must fulfil the requirements of the European EN 50173 1 Generic cabling systems norm and the links contained therein at the least The European EN 50173 1 norm is derived from the global ISO IEC 11801 norm Building installations equipped with consistently shielded symmetrical copper cables ac cording to the requirements laid out...

Page 38: ... 3000 has been grounded check the low impedance ground con nection of the system using the ground conductor of the power supply circuit as well as the low impedance connection of the additional permanently connected protec tive ground conductor to the building s potential equalization bus NOTE External lightning protection In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the bu...

Page 39: ... labor protec tion laws Employees of Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG are bound to safeguard trade secrets and personal data under the terms of the company s work rules It is imperative to observe the following rules to ensure that the statutory provisions relating to service on site or remote are strictly followed This safeguards the interests of the customer and offers added personal...

Page 40: ...tion Sales documentation German English French Italian Dutch Portuguese Spanish http apps g dms com 8081 techdoc search_de htm Expert Wiki Information about communication systems telephones and Unified Communications German English http wiki siemens enterprise com OpenScape Interactive Request and Information System OSIRIS Knowledge base with questions and answers on products and solutions German ...

Page 41: ...stem Environment page 2 11 HiPath 3550 System Environment page 2 12 HiPath 3350 System Environment page 2 13 HiPath 3500 System Environment page 2 14 HiPath 3300 System Environment page 2 15 Central components of the HiPath 3000 system page 2 16 Central components HiPath 3800 page 2 16 Central components HiPath 3550 page 2 17 Central components HiPath 3350 page 2 18 Central components HiPath 3500 ...

Page 42: ...mic performance page 2 53 Thumb Rule for HiPath 3000 5000 V9 page 2 53 Thumb Rule for HG 1500 V3 0 page 2 62 Example for Using the Thumb Rule page 2 67 Maximum Number of Devices for Special Cases page 2 79 Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000 page 2 80 Interface to Interface Ranges page 2 81 Country Specific Ring Frequencies for Analog Subscriber Line Modules page 2 82 Numbering plan page 2 84...

Page 43: ...er this protection is only effective if the system is properly grounded in accor dance with the installation instructions Grounding Once the HiPath 3000 has been grounded check the low impedance ground con nection of the system using the ground conductor of the power supply circuit as well as the low impedance connection of the additional permanently connected protec tive ground conductor to the b...

Page 44: ...HiPath 3000 systems Information on marketing individual models in different countries can be obtained at the responsible locations System for standalone installation and for installation in 19 inch cabinets HiPath 3800 Systems for wall mounting HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 Systems for installation in 19 inch cabinets HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 Information on the capacity limits of the different HiPath 300...

Page 45: ...s are available on the backplane for connecting the external main dis tribution frame MDFU E using CABLUs prefabricated cabling units or to connect external patch panels Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for connecting the peripheral device directly The con nector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane For U S only connector panels with CHAMP jack for connecting the periphe...

Page 46: ...ür den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 2 6 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation sysdat fm HiPath 3000 Dimensions Figure 2 1 HiPath 3800 Dimensions BC approx 440 mm approx 980 mm EC approx 430 mm ...

Page 47: ...58 numbered in ascending order from the at tachment side have the following assignments Slot levels 1 3 peripheral boards two slots per level Slot level 4 CBCC control board only Slot level 5 SIPAC slot Slot level 6 optional boards up to 5 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The connection cables to the peripherals telephones trunk connections etc can be connect ed directl...

Page 48: ...ing assignments Slot level 1 peripheral boards two slots Slot level 2 CBCC control board only Slot level 3 optional boards up to 5 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack The HiPath 3350 does not need an external main distribution frame The connection cables to the peripherals telephones trunk connections etc are directly connected to the boards Dimensions Except for the CBCC ...

Page 49: ...n Figure 4 66 Slot levels 1 3 slide in shelves for peripheral boards 2 boards can be plugged in on each level Slot level 4 slide in shelf for CBRC control board Slot level 5 optional boards up to 3 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack Connection to the peripherals telephones trunk connections etc is set up via RJ45 jacks on the board s front panel Dimensions Figure 2 4 HiPa...

Page 50: ...ents represented in Figure 4 67 Slot level 1 slide in shelves for two peripheral boards Slot level 2 slide in shelf for CBRC control board Slot level 3 optional boards up to 3 modules The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack Connection to the peripherals telephones trunk connections etc is set up via RJ45 jacks on the board s front panel Dimensions Figure 2 5 HiPath 3300 Dimensions 440...

Page 51: ...em Environment Table 2 1 Boards for HiPath 3800 HiPath 3800 Subscriber Line Modules Central Board Options Trunk Boards ROW USA ROW USA ROW USA IVMN8 CBSAP DIU2U IVMNL CMS DIUN2 DIUT2 SLCN DBSAP STMD3 SLMA IMODN STMI2 SLMA21 LIMS TMANI8 SLMA8 LUNA2 TMC161 1 for selected countries only SLMAV8 MMC TMCAS 21 SLMAV24 MPPI or MUSIC subboards TMDID SLMO2 TMEW2 SLMO8 PFT1 PFT4 TMDID2 STMD3 REALS TM2LP STMI...

Page 52: ...ules Central Board Options Trunk Boards ROW USA ROW USA ROW USA HXGS3 CBCC HXGS3 IVMS8 CMA STLS2 SLA8N CMS STLS4 SLA16N CUC STLSX2 SLA24N IMODN STLSX4 SLC16N LIM TCAS 21 SLMO24 MMC TLA2 SLU8 UPSC D TLA4 STLS2 TLA8 STLS4 ALUM4 TMQ4 STLSX2 ANI41 TMCAS1 1 for selected countries only STLSX4 EVM TLANI2 4SLA EXM TLANI4 8SLA EXMNA TLANI8 16SLA GEE12 TS2N SLAD4 GEE16 TST1 SLAD8 GEE50 SLAD16 UAM MPPI or MU...

Page 53: ...3350 Subscriber Line Modules Central Board Options Trunk Boards ROW USA ROW USA ROW USA HXGS3 CBCC HXGS3 IVMP8 CMA STLS2 IVMS8 CMS STLS4 SLU8 CUP STLSX2 STLS2 IMODN STLSX4 STLS4 LIM TLA2 STLSX2 MMC TLA4 STLSX4 PSUP TLA8 4SLA UPSC D TLANI2 8SLA ALUM4 TLANI4 16SLA ANI41 1 for selected countries only TLANI8 SLAD4 EVM TMQ4 SLAD8 EXM SLAD16 EXMNA GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 UAM MPPI or MUSIC OPAL PDM1 STBG42 2 f...

Page 54: ...m Environment Table 2 4 Boards for HiPath 3500 HiPath 3500 Subscriber Line Modules Central Board Options Trunk Boards ROW USA ROW USA ROW USA HXGR3 CBRC HXGR3 IVMS8R CMA STLS4R SLU8R CMS STLSX4R STLS4R CUCR TCASR 21 STLSX4R IMODN TMGL4R 8SLAR LIM TST1 SLAD8R MMC TS2R UPSC DR TLA4R TLANI4R ANI4R1 1 for selected countries only EVM EXMR MPPI or MUSIC OPALR PDM1 STRBR UAMR ...

Page 55: ... System Environment Table 2 5 Boards for HiPath 3300 HiPath 3300 Subscriber Line Modules Central Board Options Trunk Boards ROW USA ROW USA ROW USA HXGR3 CBRC HXGR3 IVMP8R CMA STLS4R IVMS8R CMS STLSX4R SLU8R CUPR TLA4R STLS4R IMODN TMGL4R STLSX4R LIM TLANI4R 8SLAR MMC SLAD8R UPSC DR ANI4R1 1 for selected countries only EVM EXMR MPPI or MUSIC OPALR PDM1 STRBR UAMR ...

Page 56: ...ptional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH LUNA2 LUNA2 is used as the central power supply in HiPath 3800 Depending on the system config uration up to three LUNA2 modules can be used in the basic cabinet and up to four LUNA2 modules can be used in the expansion cabinet LUNA2 supports power supply and battery management functions No other components are required if it...

Page 57: ...ional Clock Module ADPCM CMA optional MMC multimedia card IMODN Integrated Modem Card New optional Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH Entry Voice Mail EVM optional LIM LAN interface module option only for CBCC S30810 Q2935 A301 UPSC D The UPSC D board supports power supply and battery management functions No other com ponents are required if op...

Page 58: ...nal MMC multimedia card IMODN Integrated Modem Card New optional Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH Entry Voice Mail EVM optional LIM LAN interface module option only for CBCC S30810 Q2935 A301 PSUP The power supply point PSUP is intended for use in HiPath 3350 UPSC D The UPSC D board supports power supply and battery management functions No ot...

Page 59: ...al Clock Module ADPCM CMA optional MMC multimedia card IMODN Integrated Modem Card New optional Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH Entry Voice Mail EVM optional LIM LAN interface module option only for CBRC S30810 Q2935 Z301 UPSC DR The UPSC DR board supports power supply and battery management functions No other components are required if oper...

Page 60: ...al Clock Module ADPCM CMA optional MMC multimedia card IMODN Integrated Modem Card New optional Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH Entry Voice Mail EVM optional LIM LAN interface module option only for CBRC S30810 Q2935 Z301 UPSC DR The UPSC DR board supports power supply and battery management functions No other components are required if oper...

Page 61: ... 64 4 4 x SLCN board for connecting base stations to the sys tem SLMA 24 x x Board with 24 analog a b interfaces For Australia only The T R interfaces supply a ring voltage of 35 Veff Depending on the terminals con nected we cannot exclude the possibility of errors oc curring during ringing state SLMA2 24 x1 Board with 24 analog a b interfaces SLMA8 8 x x Board 8 analog interfaces For Australia on...

Page 62: ... board S0 interfaces without power supply S0 interfaces with power supply STMI2 2 32 4 8 x x HG 1500 board for the direct connection of IP work point clients 1 SLMA2 For selected countries only Table 2 7 Trunk Boards for HiPath 3800 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description Ports per board B channels per board Boards per cabinet Max number of boards per system ROW USA TMCAS 2 2 60 3 x1 Boards ...

Page 63: ...n only for USA and T1 analog trunk connection only for USA The B channels associated with the DIUT2 board re quire a license STMD3 8 16 x ISDN basic rate interface BRI board for configuring ISDN trunks tie trunks and subscribers on the same board There are two versions of this board S0 interfaces without power supply S0 interfaces with power supply TMANI8 8 x x Analog trunk board that supports the...

Page 64: ...nection 3 TMDID2 For selected countries only Table 2 8 Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for HiPath 3800 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description Ports per board B channels per board Boards per cabinet Max number of boards per system ROW USA DIUN2 60 60 3 x Board for primary rate access In HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 V5 0 and later the B chan nels in the DIUN2 board must be licensed DIUT2 60 60 3 x x Boar...

Page 65: ...wo versions of this board S0 interfaces without power supply S0 interfaces with power supply STMI2 2 32 4 8 x x HG 1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3800 system directly to a local IP network Ethernet Table 2 9 Optional Boards for HiPath 3800 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description ROW USA TMEW2 Ports per board 4 x x In addition to its tie trunk circuit function this board can also be use...

Page 66: ...necting relays door opener and trunk switching ALUM Trunk fail ure trans fers 1 PFT1 Trunk fail ure trans fers 1 x PFT1 and PFT4 can be connected to the main distribution frame unit MDFU E They transfer calls from analog trunks to a telephone in a power failure note the signaling method used PFT4 Trunk fail ure trans fers 4 x LIMS x x Ethernet 10BaseT interface Table 2 9 Optional Boards for HiPath...

Page 67: ... b T R 16SLA 16 1 x Board for connecting analog stations a b T R HXGS3 2 8 3 x x HG 1500 board for the direct connection of IP workpoint cli ents IVMS8 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voice mail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact IVMS8N 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMP4 4 4 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in ...

Page 68: ...k board for analog lines TLANI2 2 3 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TLANI4 4 3 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TLANI8 8 3 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TLA8 8 3 x Trunk board for analog lines TS2N 30 30 1 x Board for primary rate access can be used for tie trunk traf fic In HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and later the B channels in the TS2N board are subjec...

Page 69: ...0 system di rectly to a local data network Ethernet STLS2 2 4 1 1 The maximum number is calculated on the basis of the system specific capacity limits See Section 2 3 System Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 x Board for ISDN basic rate access Configuration of ISDN trunks tie trunks and stations no feeding on the same board is possible STLS4 4 8 1 x x TS2N 30 30 1 x Board for pri...

Page 70: ...cific call charge pulses 12 kHz from the trunk GEE16 Number of call charge receiv ers 4 x This optional board records the country specific call charge pulses 16 kHz from the trunk GEE50 Number of call charge receiv ers 4 x This optional board records the country specific call charge pulses 50 Hz from the trunk V24 1 1 x x One serial V 24 interface for connecting a PC print er or Plus Products STBG...

Page 71: ...0 board for the direct connection of IP workpoint cli ents IVMP4 4 4 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 4 ports IVMP8 8 8 1 x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMS8 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMS8N 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voicema...

Page 72: ...LA2 2 2 x Trunk board for analog lines TLA4 4 2 x Trunk board for analog lines TLA8 8 2 x Trunk board for analog lines TLANI2 2 2 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TLANI4 4 2 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TLANI8 8 2 x x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM STLS2 2 4 2 x Board for ISDN basic rate access Configuration of ISDN trunks tie trunks and stations no f...

Page 73: ...e access Configuration of ISDN trunks tie trunks and stations no feeding on the same board is possible STLS4 4 8 1 x x Table 2 17 Optional Boards for HiPath 3350 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description ROW USA ALUM4 Trunk failure transfers 4 x x Trunk failure transfer this board transfers loop start trunks directly to internal analog stations in the event of a power failure note the signalin...

Page 74: ...ter or Plus Products STBG4 x Current limiting module for LS interface France only EXM x External music on hold EXMNA x External music on hold A LAW MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH or MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH x Music on hold MOH UAM x Announcement before answering music on hold relay sensor STRB Sensors 4 x x Control relay module provides 4 relays and 4 sensors for controlling external dev...

Page 75: ...or HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 x x Board for connecting analog stations a b T R HXGR3 2 8 3 x x HG 1500 board for the direct connection of IP workpoint cli ents IVMS8NR 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMS8R 8 8 1 x x Board for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMP4R 4 4 1 x x Board for the integrated vo...

Page 76: ... The maximum number is calculated on the basis of the system specific capacity limits See Section 2 3 System Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 x x Board for ISDN basic access Permits configuration of ISDN trunks tie trunks and subscribers no feeding on the same board TLA4R 4 3 x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM and call me tering receiving equipment board TLANI4R 4 3 ...

Page 77: ...00 5000 V5 0 and later the B channels in the TS2R board are subject to license Consequently the TS2R board S30810 K2913 Z300 has been assigned a new hard ware identification code The new code prevents the board from being used in earlier versions Functionality and layout of the board have not been changed Table 2 21 Optional Boards for HiPath 3500 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description ROW ...

Page 78: ...analog stations a b T R HXGR3 2 8 1 21 x x HG 1500 board for the direct connection of IP workpoint cli ents IVMP4R 4 4 1 x x These boards are for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 4 ports IVMP8R 8 8 1 x x These boards are for the integrated voicemail functions in HiPath Xpressions Compact 8 ports IVMS8NR 8 8 1 x x These boards are for the integrated voicemail function...

Page 79: ...apacity Coun try Type Description Ports per board B channels per board Max number of boards per system ROW USA TLA4R 4 2 x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM and call meter ing receiving equipment board TLANI4R 4 2 x Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM TMGL4R 4 2 x Trunk board for analog lines STLS4R 4 8 2 x x Board for ISDN basic rate access Configuration of ISDN trunks tie trunk...

Page 80: ...used x x HG 1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3300 system di rectly to a local data network Ethernet Table 2 25 Optional Boards for HiPath 3300 Board Name Capacity Coun try Type Description ROW USA ANI4R Analog trunks 4 x This board allows calling line identification caller ID in conjunction with TMGL4R EXMR x x External music on hold MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH or MUSIC Product of Sound Pla...

Page 81: ...D signaling of call processing station statuses and net work wide DSS keys HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E MS Windows based tool for the administration of all service and customer specific data by Service HiPath 3000 5000 Manager C MS Windows based tool for the administration of customer specific data by the customer HiPath Software Manager web based tool for performing upgrades Upgrade Manager for HG ...

Page 82: ...3000 PSTN IP Network HiPath 3500 Central resourcing of applications possibly installed on a separate PC such as OpenScape Xpressions OpenScape Contact Center HiPath Fault Management HiPath Cordless Office optiPoint 500 OpenStage TDM HiPath 5000 RSM RSM Real Time Services Manager Central administration unit with Feature Server Presence Manager Software Update Manager HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Inve...

Page 83: ...adapters Refer to the section Capacities in the system description for a more detailed data table Table 2 26 HiPath 3000 5000 System Specific Capacity Limits Maximum Configuration System HiPath 38001 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 HiPath Com Scendo Service Stations Workpoint Clients Total Number of TDM and IP Stations2 500 963 964 965 966 IP stations system clients 500 967 967 967...

Page 84: ...dministrative capacity limits 8 Due to the power consumption of HG 1500 a UPSC D must be used 9 Due to the power consumption of HG 1500 a UPSC DR must be used 10 If the total number of UP0 E stations analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 72 an external power supply unit Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 must be used 11 4xa b 1xUP0 E 7xBS 32xHiPath Cordless Off...

Page 85: ...HG 1500 Boards Defined as Me dia Gateways Resource HXGS3 HXGR3 STMI2 with out PDM1 with 1 x PDM1 Routing channels A routing channel is required for example for making con nections between two IP networks via ISDN ISDN routing 16 16 Gateway channels DSP channels A gateway channel is required e g for the connection be tween an IP telephone client and a TDM telephone 8 16 32 Fax modem channels G 711 ...

Page 86: ...s that can be used as DSL con nections 2 1 2 1 1 The number of gateway channels available DSP channels is reduced as soon as the DMC interworking feature is acti vated with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Table 2 28 HG 1500 Board Specific Capacity Limits Maximum Configuration Function HXGS3 HXGR3 STMI2 with out PDM1 with 1 x PDM1 PPP Routing Partner 70 70 MOH data streams 10 10 Table 2 27 Technical Spe...

Page 87: ...ween two IP workpoint clients An IP workpoint client seizes a trunk Connections between TDM workpoint clients lines Connections between TDM workpoint clients lines do not require DSP channels The commu nication system automatically detects that no DSP channels are required Conferences In the case of conferences the number of gateway channels seized corresponds to the number of stations and IP work...

Page 88: ...ed by the digital signal processors of the system Instead the calls i e payload data are directed from the telephone over the LAN and via routers to the Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP and back again As a result no gateway channels DSP channels are needed for ITSP connections The maximum num ber of simultaneous calls depends on the selected codec and the available bandwidth of the Interne...

Page 89: ...aximum number of simultaneous connections to the ITSP depends on the number of HG 1500 boards and PDM modules set and the system used Number of gateway channels needed B channels DSP channels of the HG 1500 are required for connecting HiPath 3000 5000 to an ITSP The following table shows their number depending on the call type used Table 2 30 Maximum number of simultaneous connections to the ITSP ...

Page 90: ...king Channels IP networking channels are used for connections between communication systems In this case a distinction must be made between connections that use a gateway channel and direct payload connections Depending on the connection the following resources are required for successful connection setup A connection request is rejected if a required resource is unavailable HiPath 3000 5000 Manag...

Page 91: ...0 5000 Manager E In this case a Digital Signal Processor DSP can only provide up to 80 of all possible channels for example 6 instead of 8 DSP channels 12 instead of 16 DSP channels etc 2 4 8 ISDN Routing PPP Channels HG 1500 boards can also be used as ISDN routers The ISDN router can connect two physi cally separate IP networks together via an ISDN line Channel bundling can be used to adjust the ...

Page 92: ...gateway channels can be used for fax transmis sions not for Internet telephony Technical restrictions in Internet telephony mean that modem transmissions are not possible Note The number of G 711 gateway channels available is reduced as soon as the DMC inter working feature is activated with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Internet based fax transmissions that use G 711 frequently fail or incur errors ...

Page 93: ...ace telephones and trunks in light of its incoming and outgoing seizure intensity In the case of an external seizure for example the CPU load is split between the telephone and the trunk The thumb rule for determining the manageable load takes multiple factors into account This includes not only several parameters whose values can be determined from the current con figuration of the switch being e...

Page 94: ...es Project Planning Tools for HiPath Systems An electronic version of the thumb rule in which all the following calculations are implemented will also be made available under the following link https enterprise businessarea siemens enterprise com productinfo document 9fTFkWdA76U_ Hi Path 203000 20V8 20Planungsanleitung 20Performance 20Calculation 20Tool xls ...

Page 95: ...tions during operations a so called planning load is defined the systems This planning load consists of 70 of the capacity available for call pro cessing switching transactions see Figure below Figure 2 7 Planning Load for HiPath 3000 5000 Systems The planning load values described here are taken into account in the following table as the maximum permissible points Basic load e g polling Reserve f...

Page 96: ... Configuration Rules 2 5 2 3 Maximum Permissible Values for HiPath 3000 5000V9 For version V9 the following maximum permissible point totals are used as a basis for the thumb rule Norm BHCA Table 2 34 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Expansion Levels and their Maximum Points HiPath 3000 Maximum Points HiPath 3300 3350 3500 3550 2 880 HiPath 3800 22 600 ...

Page 97: ...12 5 incoming seizures per B channel during busy traffic hours The factor F Ltg is used to achieve some flexibility in the underlying traffic values and seizures A factor of less than 1 for example PLtg 0 5 Erl gives FLtg 0 63 may be appropriate in some cases especially for systems that were over dimensioned to create a virtually blockage free system In gen eral the following applies Factor FVPL A...

Page 98: ...iber resides outside the cordless area of his home system In branch networks where subscribers rarely reside in other nodes G is relatively small e g G 0 1 A homogeneous allocation can be assumed if a location is overlapped from several cordless areas of different nodes In this case the factor G can be calculated from the number of CMI nodes 2 5 2 5 Current Thumb Rule Values The following tables l...

Page 99: ... 7 6 FTln SIP phones Number of terminal devices e g optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 S connected via SIP Note HG 1500 performance must be considered sepa rately 3 6 FTln Data Number of devices for data services for example data ter minals 4 7 FTln ISDN port Number of ISDN connections the B channels are used for voice and data traffic characterized by relatively short call durations e g S0 bus with se...

Page 100: ...5 C ACD group Number of ACD groups 4 8 AC Number of active attendant consoles 252 FVPL Automatic AC IVM Number of analog trunks or digital B channels which are routed from CO to the automatic attendant at IVM 21 9 FLtg Table 2 38 Points for Trunks System Interface Meaning Weight Trunk Number of analog trunks or digital B channels to CO 24 6 FLtg ITSP trunks Possible number of simultaneous voice ch...

Page 101: ...le 2 35 Table 2 39 Additional Overhead for Controlling Process Flows at Devices via CTI Applica tions System Interface Meaning Weight CTI control via CSTA Number of devices operated by means of CTI controlled connection procedures via CSTA commands 1 7 FTln Table 2 40 Points for Groups System Interface Meaning Weight Call pickup group Overhead per call pickup group with N mem bers where Opt refers...

Page 102: ...mb rule 2 5 3 3 Current Thumb Rule Values The following table lists the interfaces taken into account in the thumb rule PDM Modules Signaling Table 2 41 HG 1500 V3 0 Boards and Corresponding Maximum Points HG 1500 Board Corresponding Systems Maximum Points HXGS3 HXGR3 HiPath 3300 3350 3500 3550 780 STMI2 HiPath 3800 980 Table 2 42 Points for the PDM Modules to Increase the DSP Number System System...

Page 103: ...o the ITSPs 3 2 FLtg ITSP lines with H 235 Possible number of simultaneous voice channels to the ITSPs 4 0 FLtg Table 2 44 Points for Gateway Channels When Using G 711 or G 729 System System Meaning Weight Gateway channels with enhanced B channel Number of gateway channels DSP LAN if the feature Enhanced B Channels is activated in the WBM that is firewall and VPN functionality may not be used 11 G...

Page 104: ...ce codec G 723 VPN and 3DES are used 70 Table 2 45 Points for Voice Channels When Using G 711 or G 729 System System Meaning Weight Voice channels without VPN Number of voice channels LAN1 LAN2 if encryption is not used 73 Voice channels with VPN and AES Number of voice channels LAN1 LAN2 if VPN and AES encryption are used 89 Voice channels with VPN and 3DES Number of voice channels LAN1 LAN2 if V...

Page 105: ...0 93 Data without VPN 500 bytes Number of packets per second if the average packet size is 500 bytes and encryption is not used 0 79 Data with AES 500 bytes Number of packets per second if the average packet size is 500 bytes and VPN with AES encryption is used 1 19 Data with 3DES 500 bytes Number of packets per second if the average packet size is 500 bytes and VPN with 3DES encryption is used 1 ...

Page 106: ...723 1 Number of voice channels with G 723 and a packet assembly of 1 20ms that are routed with PPP via ISDN 100 Voice channels G 723 2 Number of voice channels with G 723 and a packet assembly of 2 60ms that are routed with PPP via ISDN 57 PPP data chan nels Number of channels via which data is routed with PPP 55 Table 2 47 Points for PPP Channels System System Meaning Weight ...

Page 107: ...ices 100 Digital terminal devices 20 Digital terminal devices with CTI controlled functions 20 IP phones 1 Call pickup group consisting of two analog telephones and eight digital telephones 5 ACD agents of digital telephones with 32 calls per hour and display update every 5 seconds 2 Attendant consoles 60 Digital trunks to CO of which 5 are for ACD application 30 Digital trunks to other systems vi...

Page 108: ...he signaling load must also be taken into account With a permissible maximum points total of 980 this scenario is feasible However this sample calculation does not apply for HXGS R3 This is because the static configuration rules only al low a maximum of 16 channels per board card 2 5 4 2 2 IP Trunking and HFA Clients A HiPath 3800 system with 96 HFA clients and additional TDM subscribers is networ...

Page 109: ...d encryption are not possible in this example The signaling load 16 PBX networking channels and 96 HFA clients must also be taken into account With a permissible maximum points total of 980 this scenario is feasible However this sample calculation does not apply for HXGS R3 This is because the static configuration rules only al low a maximum of 16 channels per board card Table 2 49 Calculation for...

Page 110: ...he PBX networking connection to the third system branch office 2 Codec G 729 with a sample rate of 20 ms without encryption is used for this connec tion At head office 6 8 14 PBX networking channels must be configured while 6 PBX networking channels must be configured at branch office 1 and 8 PBX networking channels configured at branch office 2 One STMI2 2 DSPs on board supporting up to 32 voice ...

Page 111: ...nnels via LAN2 are avail able for the connection to the branch offices Each branch office HiPath 3500 3550 system is equipped with 30 HFA telephones and 8 gateway channels for the connection with the ISDN CO 4 voice channels are also available for the connection to head office The codec G 711 with a sample rate of 20ms is used for the VPN networking The connection between the head office and the b...

Page 112: ...nario is feasible for head office Table 2 51 Calculation for Head Office HiPath 3800 Function Formula Points Signaling PBX networking channels without H 235 8 3 2 26 Gateway channels G 711 with VPN and AES 8 89 712 Total 738 HiPath 3800 LAN 2 LAN 1 Head Office HiPath 35x0 LAN 1 LAN 2 Branch Office 1 Intranet Intranet HiPath 35x0 LAN 1 LAN 2 ISDN Branch Office 2 4 Voice PBX Networking Channels AES ...

Page 113: ...e average packet length is 500 bytes VPN should be used with AES en cryption This configuration requires 1 STMI2 2 DSPs on board for 32 channels Figure 2 12 VPN Voice and Data Home Office Connection Performance calculation G 723 is generally configured for home offices As VPN is required for the DSL connection the option Enhanced B Channels must be deactivated The HFA terminal point signaling load...

Page 114: ... A 1Mbit s connection is sufficient for the customer Table 2 53 Performance Calculation Function Formula Points Signaling IP phones without H 235 8 0 68 5 Voice channels G 723 with VPN and AES 8 60 480 Data LAN VPN and AES with 500 bytes upstream 128 1 19 152 Data LAN VPN and AES with 500 bytes downstream 128 1 19 152 Total 789 Table 2 54 Bandwidth Calculation Function Formula Points Voice channel...

Page 115: ...ore first be calculated from the average packet length With a permissible maximum points total of 980 this leaves 980 596 384 points for IP trunking channels For each IP trunking channel one PBX networking channel and one gateway chan nel with VPN and AES is required In other words 3 2 89 92 2 points are required per trunking channel If the remaining points are divided by the number of points per ...

Page 116: ...on is sufficient for the customer Table 2 56 Performance Calculation 2 Function Formula Points Signaling IP phones without H 235 4 3 2 13 Gateway channels G 729 with VPN and AES 4 89 356 Data LAN VPN and AES with 500 bytes upstream 250 1 19 298 Data LAN VPN and AES with 500 bytes downstream 250 1 19 298 Total 965 Table 2 57 Bandwidth Calculation Function Formula Points Voice channels G 729 with VP...

Page 117: ...ns as the firewall Therefore the feature Enhanced B channels in the WBM of HG 1500 should be activated 1 STMI2 board is to be used Configuration Notes The IP telephones clients as well as the calls to the ITSP must be taken into account for sig naling 8 gateway channels to the ISDN trunk are required for the 8 simultaneous calls No gateway channels are required for the 8 simultaneous calls to the ...

Page 118: ... of 980 points that the STMI2 board can provide The configuration is feasible Table 2 58 Resource requirement for ISDN and ITSP connection for HiPath 3800 Function Formula Points Signaling without H 235 security inde pendent of the setting Enhanced B Channels 100 x IP telephones clients 8 calls per hour 100 x 0 68 68 Payload setting Enhanced B Chan nels activated Gateway channel via LAN 1 without ...

Page 119: ...dicates the maximum number of devices of that type If all terminal devices have a specific feature e g CTI control then the points for CTI con trolled devices must be added to the points for the terminal device The formula for CTI con trolled terminal devices would thus be It is also possible to conceive of further tables e g for a system with attendant consoles and ACD agents In this case the poi...

Page 120: ...cy 50 60 Hz Power consumption2 2 The levels specified are worst case values that should not be used to estimate operating costs energy costs The real consumption values are expansion and traffic dependant and generally lie far below the worst case values BB 490 W EB 720 W Development of heat without workpoints 2 BC 1500 kJ h EC 2200 kJ h Dimensions height x width x depth in mm 490 x 440 x 430 450 ...

Page 121: ...T 2x2x0 6 0 6 mm di ameter Telephone Interfaces Range in m Loop resistance in ohms ISDN S0 point to point 600 156 ISDN S0 extended bus connection 400 104 ISDN S0 bus connection1 1 Board specific 60 for the HiPath 3800 board STMD3 Q2217 120 for all other S0 boards 21 ISDN S0 wall outlet to terminal 10 Analog users 2000 520 UP0 E exchange to host master 1000 230 UP0 E host to client master slave 100...

Page 122: ...les in the various countries listed Table 2 62 Country Specific Ring Frequencies for Analog Subscriber Line Modules Country Abbreviation Ring frequency Hz Algeria ALG 25 Argentina ARG 25 Ethiopia ETH 25 Australia AUS 25 Belgium BEL 25 Brazil BRA 25 Federal Republic of Germany BRD 25 Burundi BUD 25 China CHN 25 Denmark DAN 25 Europe EU 25 Finland FIN 25 France FKR 50 Greece GRI 25 Great Britain GBR...

Page 123: ...NDL 25 Nigeria NIA 25 Oman OMA 25 Austria OES 25 Pakistan PAK 25 The Philippines PHI 20 Poland POL 25 Portugal POR 25 Republic of South Africa RSA 25 Sweden SWD 25 Switzerland SWZ 25 Singapore SIN 25 Slovenia SLO 25 Spain SPA 25 South Korea KOR 20 Thailand THA 25 Czech Republic CRE 25 Turkey TRK 25 Hungary UNG 25 U S Canada USA 20 Vietnam VIT 25 Zimbabwe SIM 25 Table 2 62 Country Specific Ring Fre...

Page 124: ...numbers 100 749 100 287 500 687 11 30 51 70 Trunk station number 7801 7920 7801 7920 801 816 Seizure codes external codes 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 0 ROW 9 U S 80 84 850 859 80 84 850 859 82 88 USBS station number internal direct inward dialing 891 891 891 IMOD station number internal direct inward dialing 890 890 890 Digital modem internal direct inward dialing 879 879 879 Group station numbers int...

Page 125: ...e configured in the system The system is configured for connection to an ITSP via Web Based Management WBM and Manager E 2 9 3 Numbering in Networked Systems In private networks station phone numbers seizure codes and service codes are assigned according to a numbering plan provided by the customer HiPath 3000 supports the following numbering schemes Closed numbering Requires that all station numb...

Page 126: ...ive 99 5 EEC EN 60950 1 2001 Safety EN61000 6 2 EMC Immunity Industrial EN55024 EMC Immunity Residential ETS 300 329 DECT Emission Immunity TBR 06 ETS 301489 1 6 DECT Air Interface Table 2 64 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards for U S and Canada only Category HiPath 3800 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 Product security UL 60950 1 First Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 03 UL 60950 1 First Edition CA...

Page 127: ...equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If installation and handling are incorrect this can lead to disruptions in radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the us...

Page 128: ...bH Co KG and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations in Subpart C of the FCC Rules Part 68 REN The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that can be connected to a telephone line so that all the devices ring when that telephone number is called In most areas but not all the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to a line should not exceed five ...

Page 129: ...on desired Direct Inward Dialing Answer Supervision Customers operating any Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG system dis cussed in this section without providing proper answer supervision are in violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules Each Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision to the public switched telephone networ...

Page 130: ...lt your sales part ner to determine the surge protector requirements for your system 2 10 2 2 Industry Canada Compliance The following paragraphs describe requirements for and present information based on the In dustry Canada standards 2 10 2 2 1 REN The Ringer Equivalence Number REN defines how many devices can be connected to a tele phone line at the same time The termination of an interface may...

Page 131: ...he telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the pow er utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected to gether This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas 2 10 3 SAFETY International IEC 60950 1 first edition 2001...

Page 132: ...2 25 g H2O m3 Relative humidity 5 80 System ventilation is by convection only Automatic ventilation is required when using the HG 1500 in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 2 11 2 Mechanical Operating Conditions The systems are intended for stationary use 7 Caution Avoid exposing the system to direct sunlight and heaters excessive heat may dam age the system Systems covered with condensation must be drie...

Page 133: ...re removing or inserting the central boards in HiPath 3800 NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage Lines exiting buildings of the boards listed below must be protected with an additional primary protection against overvoltage caused by lightening strikes see also Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion CBCC CBRC CBSAP STLSX2 STLSX4 STLSX4R TMDID TMDID2 SLA8N SLA16N and SLA24N STMD3 STMI...

Page 134: ...anger of damage to property due to surge voltage For protection against overvolt age due to lightning the use of the lightning protection strip with part number C39334 Z7052 C33 is absolutely mandatory The power supply cable of the HiPath 3000 must be plugged into the lightning protection strip The lightning protection strip should be connected to the line voltage ...

Page 135: ...2314 X HiPath 3800 CMA S30807 Q6931 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 CMS S30807 Q6928 X HiPath 3000 CUC S30777 Q750 X HiPath 3550 CUCR S30777 Q750 Z HiPath 3500 CUP S30777 Q751 X HiPath 3350 CUPR S30777 Q751 Z HiPath 3300 DBSAP S30807 Q6722 X HiPath 3800 IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 HiPath 3000 LIM S30807 Q6930 X HiPath 3000 LIMS S30807 Q6721 X HiPath 3800 LUNA2 S30122 K7686 A1 S30122 ...

Page 136: ... Q2943 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X1 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HXGS3 S30810 K2943 Z1 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 IVMN8 S30122 H7688 X100 HiPath 3800 IVMNL S30122 H7688 X HiPath 3800 IVMP8 S30122 Q7379 X100 HiPath 3350 not for U S IVMP8R S30122 K7379 Z100 HiPath 3300 not for U S IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 IVMS8R S30122 K7379 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 SLA16N S30810 Q292...

Page 137: ...0 HiPath 3350 STLSX4 S30810 Q2944 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 STLSX4R S30810 K2944 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 STMD3 S30810 Q2217 X10 HiPath 3800 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 HiPath 3800 TCAS 2 S30810 Q2945 X HiPath 3550 for selected countries only TCASR 2 S30810 K2945 X HiPath 3500 for selected countries only TLA2 S30817 Q923 Bxxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S TLA4 S30817 Q923 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPat...

Page 138: ...ntries only TMDID S30810 Q2452 X HiPath 3800 for U S only TMDID2 S30810 Q2197 T HiPath 3800 for selected countries only TMEW2 S30810 Q2292 X100 HiPath 3800 TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 for U S only TMGL4R S30810 K2918 Z HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 for U S only TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 for U S only TS2N old TS2 S30810 Q2913 X300 HiPath 3550 not for U S TS2R S30810 K29...

Page 139: ... HiPath 3350 not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 for U S only MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH S30122 K5380 X200 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH S30122 K7275 B HiPath 3000 OPAL C39195 A7001 B130 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 PFT1 P...

Page 140: ...0 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 8 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Functional and model overview of the boards V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 not for U S Table 3 1 HiPath 3000 Functional Overview of All Boards Used Board Part number Model ...

Page 141: ... S30122 H7688 X100 Peripheral board IVMNL S30122 H7688 X Peripheral board LIMS S30807 Q6721 X Central board LUNA2 S30122 K7686 A1 S30122 K7686 M1 Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH S30122 K7275 B Option PFT1 PFT4 S30777 Q539 X S30777 Q540 X Option not for U S REALS S30807 Q6629 X Option RGMOD S30124 X5109 X Central board for selected countries only SLCN...

Page 142: ...oard TMC16 S30810 Q2485 X Peripheral board for selected countries only T MCAS 2 S30810 Q2946 X Peripheral board for selected countries only TMDID S30810 Q2452 X Peripheral board for U S only TMDID2 S30810 Q2197 T Peripheral board for selected countries only TMEW2 S30810 Q2292 X100 Peripheral board TMANI S30810 Q2327 X Peripheral board TMANI IM S30810 Q2327 X1 Peripheral board TMANI BRA S30810 Q232...

Page 143: ...tion not for U S GEE16 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X Option for U S only HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Peripheral board HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X1 Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI Product of BEYERTO...

Page 144: ...30817 Q926 Axxx Peripheral board not for U S TLANI2 S30810 H2953 X1xx Peripheral board TLANI4 S30810 H2953 Xxx Peripheral board TLANI8 S30810 H2954 X1xx Peripheral board TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A400 Peripheral board for selected countries only TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Peripheral board for selected countries only TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X Peripheral board for U S only TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X Peripheral board for U S...

Page 145: ...Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE16 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S GEE50 S30817 Q951 Axxx Option not for U S HOPE S30122 Q7078 X S30122 Q7079 X Option for U S only HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Peripheral board HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X1 Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMP8 S30122 Q7379 X100 Peripheral board not for U S IVMS8 S30122 Q7379 X Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central...

Page 146: ...pheral board not for U S TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx Peripheral board not for U S TLANI2 S30810 H2953 X1xx Peripheral board TLANI4 S30810 H2953 Xxx Peripheral board TLANI8 S30810 H2954 X1xx Peripheral board TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X Peripheral board for U S only TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X Peripheral board for U S only UAM S30122 X7217 X Option not for U S UPSC D S30122 K5660 A300 S30122 K5660 M300 Central board V24...

Page 147: ...ipheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH S30122 K7275 B Option OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 Cable PDM1 S30807 Q5692 X100 Option SLAD8R S30810 K2956 X300 Peripheral board SLU8R S30817 K922 Z301 Peripheral board STLS4R S30817 K924 Z313 Peripheral board STLSX4R S30810 K2944 Z Peripheral board STRBR S30817 Q932 Z Option TCASR 2 S30810 ...

Page 148: ... S30810 K2943 Z Peripheral board IMODN S30807 Q6932 X100 Central board IVMP8R S30122 K7379 Z100 Peripheral board not for U S IVMS8R S30122 K7379 Z Peripheral board LIM S30807 Q6930 X Central board MMC S30122 X8002 X10 Central board MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH S30122 K7275 B Option OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 Cable PDM1 S30807 Q5692 X100 Option SLAD8R S30810 K2956 X300 Peripheral board SLU8R S30817 ...

Page 149: ...later and V5 0 Rel 15 or later Essential new functions Integration of the functionality of the LIM subboard Increase of the ring voltage of analog station interfaces T R to approx 65 Veff Discontinuation of the second V 24 interface Option V24 1 CBCC S30810 Q2935 A301 implemented in V5 0 or later Essential new function CLIP Differences between both CBCC versions are indicated at the appropriate po...

Page 150: ...I 120 170 connection via the CSTA interface Bear in mind however that the number of BHCAs Busy Hour Call Attempts number of connection attempts dur ing busy traffic hours is restricted to 400 at a maximum of six CSTA links for the TAPI 120 170 connection The use of power dialers is not approved For the output of call data The ETHERNET LAN interface is deactivated by the system software deactivated...

Page 151: ...t indicates that a reload is in progress Run LED LED status meaning is explained in the following table Please note that only one Music on Hold subboard may be connected In other words you can connect a subboard either via X4 or via X19 X20 Table 3 3 CBCC LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extin ...

Page 152: ...gging the X27 jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X20 X19 X12 EVM X32 8 x UP0 E 1 X1 MMC X18 2 2 1 X2 1 X3 2 X4 4 x T R MPPI MUSIC or EXM Reset Reload keys RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 inter...

Page 153: ...he X27 jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X7 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X20 X19 X12 LIM EVM X32 8 x UP0 E 1 X1 MMC X18 2 2 2 V24 1 1 X2 1 X3 2 X4 4 x T R MPPI MUSIC or EXM Reset Reload keys RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V ...

Page 154: ... used 3 UP0 E port 2b UP0 E port 6b T R port 2a Not used 4 UP0 E port 2a UP0 E port 6a T R port 2b EXMCLK 512 kHz data cycle 5 UP0 E port 3b UP0 E port 7b T R port 3a EXMDIR 8 kHz frame cycle 6 UP0 E port 3a UP0 E port 7a T R port 3b EXMRES high active reset 7 UP0 E port 4b UP0 E port 8b T R port 4a EXMD data line 8 UP0 E port 4a UP0 E port 8a T R port 4b EXMDET detect signal 9 5 V 10 Not used Tab...

Page 155: ...ed by the optional LIM sub board Table 3 6 CBCC V 24 Interface Assignment SUB D Plug X18 Pin Signal Description 1 Not used 2 RxD A Receive data channel A 3 TxD A Transmit data channel A 4 Not used 5 0 V Ground 6 Not used 7 RTS A Request to send channel A 8 CTS A Clear to send channel A 9 Not used Table 3 7 CBCC LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3...

Page 156: ...n Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 100 100 UP0 E 1 101 101 UP0 E 2 102 102 UP0 E 3 103 103 UP0 E 4 104 104 UP0 E 5 105 105 UP0 E 6 106 106 UP0 E 7 107 107 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 500 500 UP0 E 1 501 501 UP0 E 2 502 502 UP0 E 3 503 503 UP0 E 4 504 504 UP0 E 5 505 505 UP0 E 6 506 506 UP0 E 7 507 507 UP0 E 8 T R 108 108 T R 1 109 109 T R 2 110 110 T R 3 111 111 T R 3 EVM 112 112 EVM 1 113...

Page 157: ...CC in HiPath 3350 Station Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 11 11 UP0 E 1 12 12 UP0 E 2 13 13 UP0 E 3 14 14 UP0 E 4 15 15 UP0 E 5 16 16 UP0 E 6 17 17 UP0 E 7 18 18 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 51 51 UP0 E 1 52 52 UP0 E 2 53 53 UP0 E 3 54 54 UP0 E 4 55 55 UP0 E 5 56 56 UP0 E 6 57 57 UP0 E 7 58 58 UP0 E 8 T R 19 19 T R 1 20 20 T R 2 21 21 T R 3 22 22 T R 3 EVM 23 23 EVM 1 24 24 EVM 2 Line Code...

Page 158: ...01 implemented in V5 0 or later Essential new function CLIP Differences between both CBRC versions are indicated at the appropriate point in the following description Subboards The following subboards can be used depending on the application Clock module CMA or CMS optional MMC multimedia card IMODN integrated modem card new optional Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Prod...

Page 159: ...ut of call data The ETHERNET LAN interface is deactivated by the system software deactivated as soon as an HG 1500 board is inserted Eight digital UP0 E subscriber lines For example UP0 E workpoint clients or BS3 1 base stations for HiPath Cordless Office can be connected here Four analog T R subscriber lines For U S only These interfaces do not support the connection of external extensions via OP...

Page 160: ...eaning is explained in the following table Table 3 10 CBRC LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extin guished to acknowledge that a reload has begun at System boot Off for 0 1 s Load operation APS in SDRAM loadware and card data Flashing 0 5 s on 0 5 s off Normal operating state zero load 1 1 The f...

Page 161: ...uffer by unplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X12 EVM X32 X18 2 X3 X20 X19 MMC 4 x T R Reset Reload keys RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 interface 9 pin SUB D plug 2 x S0 RJ45...

Page 162: ...fer by unplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for testing module test at the factory Disconnection does not necessarily delete the customer database CDB To delete the CDB use the reset switch 2 X27 X5 2 X11 X6 X8 O bus X14 CMA X13 CMS X17 IMODN X15 X16 X12 LIM EVM X32 X18 2 X3 X20 X19 MMC 4 x T R Reset Reload keys RUN LED LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack V 24 interface 9 pin SUB D plug 2 x S0 RJ...

Page 163: ...a T R port 2a 25 UP0 E port 2b T R port 2b 34 UP0 E port 3a T R port 3a 35 UP0 E port 3b T R port 3b 44 UP0 E port 4a T R port 4a 45 UP0 E port 4b T R port 4b 54 UP0 E port 5a 55 UP0 E port 5b 64 UP0 E port 6a 65 UP0 E port 6b 74 UP0 E port 7a 75 UP0 E port 7b 84 UP0 E port 8a 85 UP0 E port 8b Table 3 12 CBRC S0 Interface Assignment RJ45 Jacks X9 Pin S0 port 1 X9 Pin S0 port 2 11 21 12 22 13 S0 po...

Page 164: ... the optional LIM sub board Table 3 13 CBRC V 24 Interface Assignment SUB D Plug X18 Pin Signal Description 1 Not used 2 RxD A Receive data channel A 3 TxD A Transmit data channel A 4 Not used 5 0 V Ground 6 Not used 7 RTS A Request to send channel A 8 CTS A Clear to send channel A 9 Not used Table 3 14 CBRC LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack via LIM Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Trans...

Page 165: ...on Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 100 100 UP0 E 1 101 101 UP0 E 2 102 102 UP0 E 3 103 103 UP0 E 4 104 104 UP0 E 5 105 105 UP0 E 6 106 106 UP0 E 7 107 107 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 500 500 UP0 E 1 501 501 UP0 E 2 502 502 UP0 E 3 503 503 UP0 E 4 504 504 UP0 E 5 505 505 UP0 E 6 506 506 UP0 E 7 507 507 UP0 E 8 T R 108 108 T R 1 109 109 T R 2 110 110 T R 3 111 111 T R 3 EVM 112 112 EVM 1 11...

Page 166: ...BRC in HiPath 3300 Station Int call no DID no Port UP0 E host master 11 11 UP0 E 1 12 12 UP0 E 2 13 13 UP0 E 3 14 14 UP0 E 4 15 15 UP0 E 5 16 16 UP0 E 6 17 17 UP0 E 7 18 18 UP0 E 8 UP0 E client slave 51 51 UP0 E 1 52 52 UP0 E 2 53 53 UP0 E 3 54 54 UP0 E 4 55 55 UP0 E 5 56 56 UP0 E 6 57 57 UP0 E 7 58 58 UP0 E 8 T R 19 19 T R 1 20 20 T R 2 21 21 T R 3 22 22 T R 3 EVM 23 23 EVM 1 24 24 EVM 2 Line Cod...

Page 167: ...e application CMS clock module optional MMC multimedia card IMODN integrated modem card new optional LIMS LAN interface module optional Contains two Ethernet 10BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks LAN1 administration via HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E and CTI functions LAN2 not assigned Music on hold optional MPPI Product of BEYERTONE GmbH MUSIC Product of Sound Player GmbH V 24 interfaces 9 pin SUB ...

Page 168: ... Reset activated Switch pressed 5 s Reload activated Fail LED red goes out to indicate that a reload is in progress Two LEDs indicating the board status Run green signals the current status of the CBSAP board see Table 12 2 Fail red error encountered Two LEDs for displaying the LAN interface status LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex...

Page 169: ... 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 37 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board Diagram of CBSAP board Figure 3 5 CBSAP Board S30810 Q2314 X IMODN LIMS CMS MMC MPPI or MUSIC Subboard ...

Page 170: ... error encountered Reset reload switch Slide in shelf for MMC Two Ethernet 10BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks via LIMS LAN2 not assigned LAN1 administration via HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E and CTI functions The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex FDX Off half duplex V 24 interfaces 9 ...

Page 171: ... Assignment SUB D Plug X50 X51 Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Data carrier detect not used 2 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Transmit data 4 DTR Data terminal ready not used 5 0 V Ground 6 DSR Data send ready not used 7 RTS Request to send 8 CTS Clear to send 9 RI Ring indicator not used Table 3 18 CBSAP LAN Connector Assignment RJ45 Jack Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not ...

Page 172: ...needed for special HiPath Cordless Office configurations All clock module small CMS functions are available when you insert a CMA module Please refer to Page 3 41 for recommendations on CMA module implementation 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMA subboard The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard so you should alway...

Page 173: ...k connection available no trunk analog trunk ISDN S0 or ISDN S2M and conse quently the possible provision of a digital reference clock HiPath Cordless Office 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMS subboard The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard so you should always mount them see Figure 3 7 Otherwise you may damage t...

Page 174: ...DN S0 not al ways ac tive Via ISDN S0 net working line CMA2 ISDN S0 always active Via ISDN S0 trunk connection CMS1 CMA2 ISDN S0 always active Via ISDN S0 trunk connection CMA2 ISDN S2M Via ISDN S2M trunk connection CMS1 CMA2 ISDN S2M Via ISDN S2M trunk connection CMA2 Networking via ISDN S2M lines Master system SLAVE system s No trunk or analog trunk CMS or CMA see Table 11 1 No trunk or analog t...

Page 175: ...N S2M trunk connection CMA2 1 CMS is not necessary if the reference clock supplied by the CO is always available via the networking lines not a trans parent clock 2 CMA is not necessary if ADPCM conversion is not needed for HiPath Cordless Office see Table 11 1 3 CMS is not necessary but is recommended for the following reasons Although an Ethernet link is an asynchronous con nection buffer overfl...

Page 176: ...nector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q750 X CUCR connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q750 Z Figure 3 9 CUC Backplane S30777 Q750 X Figure 3 10 CUCR Backplane S30777 Q750 Z Slot 6 X40 Slot 8 X60 Slot 4 X20 Slot 7 X50 Slot 9 X70 Slot 5 X30 PSU UPS X1 Slot 2 8 x UP0 E Slot 1 2 x S0 Slot 3 4 x T R CUC Peripheral board CBCC Peripheral board Peripheral board Slot 10 For SLMO24 ...

Page 177: ...ssage B16 12 RESTART Power down and performs a restart Please note however that the backplane should only be replaced if the errors still occur even after the following points have been checked and the mentioned problems eliminated Have the necessary grounding regulations been followed Do the cables have contact problems or visible damage Do the system components have any visible damage The follow...

Page 178: ...onnection Unit Point Rack S30777 Q751 Z Figure 3 12 for use in HiPath 3300 19 inch housing CUP connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q751 X CUPR connector designations and slot assignments S30777 Q751 Z Figure 3 11 CUP Backplane S30777 Q751 X Figure 3 12 CUPR Backplane S30777 Q751 Z Slot 4 X20 Slot 5 X30 PSU UPS X1 CUP Slot 2 8 x UP0 E Slot 1 2 x S0 Slot 3 4 x T R Peripheral board CBC...

Page 179: ...sage B16 12 RESTART Power down and performs a restart Please note however that the backplane should only be replaced if the errors still occur even after the following points have been checked and the mentioned problems eliminated Have the necessary grounding regulations been followed Do the cables have contact problems or visible damage Do the system components have any visible damage The followi...

Page 180: ...n cabinet receives HDLC PCM and clock signals from the basic cabinet In addition an ID signal is created which indicates the availability of an expan sion cabinet to the CBSAP Figure 3 13 DBSAP S30807 Q6722 X The cable C39195 Z7611 A10 is used as the connection cable between basic cab inet X201 jack and expansion cabinet DBSAP board To ensure smooth opera tion use only shielded cables with a maxim...

Page 181: ...A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 49 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board Figure 3 14 DBSAP on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet DBSAP ...

Page 182: ...d exchanging the IMODN subboard during a software upgrade IMODN loadware is au tomatically updated in V4 0 SMR 08 and later Updating the IMODN loadware takes approx 10 minutes beginning with the idle system status The red LED on the IMODN lights up repeatedly during the loading procedure IMODN is ready as soon as the green LED starts to flash If the IMODN loadware is not updated when the system is...

Page 183: ...00 Manager E For the TAPI 120 170 connection via the CSTA interface Bear in mind however that the number of BHCAs Busy Hour Call Attempts number of connection attempts dur ing busy traffic hours is restricted to 400 at a maximum of six CSTA links for the TAPI 120 170 connection The use of power dialers is not approved For the output of call data In V6 0 or later the system software deactivates an ...

Page 184: ...S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 52 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Central Board RJ45 jack assignment Table 3 20 LIM RJ45 Jack Assignment Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 185: ...xample be used for the following applications For administration using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E For the TAPI 120 170 connection via the CSTA interface Bear in mind however that the number of BHCAs Busy Hour Call Attempts number of connection attempts dur ing busy traffic hours is restricted to 400 at a maximum of six CSTA links for the TAPI 120 170 connection The use of power dialers is not appr...

Page 186: ... HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Central Board RJ45 jack assignment Figure 3 15 CBSAP with LIMS Module Plugged In Table 3 21 LIMS RJ45 Jack Assignment Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 187: ...werBox PB3000 with 4 batteries 12 V 7 Ah LUNA2 supports power supply and battery management functions No other components are required if it is operated as a power supply The following options are available for emergency battery operation in the event of a power cut i e the function UPS Connection of battery packs 4 x 12 V 7 Ah S30122 K5950 Y200 per system cabinet The batteries are charged via the...

Page 188: ...quency 50 Hz 60 Hz Output voltage battery charging voltage if a LUNA2 is used as a battery charger 54 7 VDC 53 5 VDC for gel cell batteries currently not released Output current battery charge current if a LUNA2 is used as a battery charger max 2 A Bridging times Table 3 22 lists the maximum possible bridging times emergency battery operation in case of power failure with 48 V 7 Ah battery pack S3...

Page 189: ...med at a room temperature of approximately 22 C 71 6 F The batteries were new and fully charged when measurement started Figure 3 16 LUNA2 Front Panel Table 3 22 LUNA2 Bridging Times with 48 V 7 Ah Battery Pack and Powerbox PB3000 System Power supply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time Switches for setting the operating mode ON OFF switch for secondary operating voltag es system supply voltage...

Page 190: ...lashing with a charging voltage of 53 5 VDC 7 Caution The switches for deactivating the secondary operating voltage system supply voltage must be set to DC OFF on all LUNA2s during maintenance work that requires the system to be de energized forexample central board replace ment The system is only in de energized state if the switches on ALL LUNA2s are set to DC OFF position The system is only res...

Page 191: ...he LUNA2 power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system cab inet shelf until you hear a click see Figure 4 18 The power supply unit slots must be covered with the outer panel shown in Figure 3 17 basic cabinet and in Figure 3 18 expansion cabinet before the system is started up Figure 3 17 LUNA2 slots in the basic cabinet outer panel mounted ...

Page 192: ...ath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 60 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Central Board Figure 3 18 LUNA2 Slots in the Expansion Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted ...

Page 193: ...nd up to four peripheral boards A second LUNA2 is required for five or more peripheral boards A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundant LUNA2 b Basic cabinet with CBSAP and peripheral boards with STMI2 SLMA and or SLCN Two LUNA2s are always required to supply a CBSAP peripheral boards and STMI2 SLMA and or SLCN A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundant...

Page 194: ...y be replaced by an MMC approved by Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG Cards that have not been approved may have a different internal structure which can affect temporal access and certain features for example CDB backup and APS transfer Variants Table 3 24 Multimedia Card Models and Applications MMC Part number Application in HiPath 3000 HiPath 3800 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3350 ...

Page 195: ...modular power cord A monitoring LED indicates the presence of the 5 V output voltage Technical Specifications Nominal voltage range 100 VAC 240 VAC Nominal frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Ring voltage generator 75 Vac 20 25 50 Hz Partial voltages 5 VDC 48 V Power consumption 70 W PSUP interfaces S30122 K5658 M 7 Caution System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug Figur...

Page 196: ...er RGMOD must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized In normal mode the ring voltage generator operates with voltages ranging from 75 V to 170 V The prescribed measures for protection against high voltage must be taken when working on or close to the board When the ring voltage generator is removed no ring tone is generated for the analog telephones connected to the SLMA2 A system c...

Page 197: ...ternen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board 65 Veff 25 Hz Switzerland 75 Veff 50 Hz France 85 V eff 20 Hz USA Ring voltage Ring frequency Setting Standard Table 3 25 RGMOD Selected Countries Only Setting the Ring Voltages and Ring Fre quencies 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 198: ...tral Board Installing RGMOD The RGMOD ring voltage generator is plugged in at the rear of the backplane Basic cabinet When using one or more SLMA2 boards in the basic cabinet RGMOD must be plugged into the 10 pin port X214 of the basic cabinet see Figure 3 20 Figure 3 20 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Basic Cabi net X214 ...

Page 199: ...nen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board Expansion cabinet When using one or more SLMA2 boards in the expansion cabinet RGMOD must be plugged into the 10 pin port X214 of the expansion cabinet see Figure 3 21 Figure 3 21 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet X214 ...

Page 200: ... external power supply i e a Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 can be installed to provide additional power To do this connect the DC output on the PB3000 to the special 48 Vdc input on the UPSC D The UPSC D s internal 48 V output is deactivated when the external power supply is connected Emergency battery operation In order to be able to switch over to emergency battery operation if there is a failure o...

Page 201: ...aph Bridging times The maximum possible bridging times of the HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3550 systems in emer gency battery mode can be found here i e if the power supply has failed A distinction is made between a 48 V 1 2 Ah battery pack and the Power Box with 48 V 7 Ah without LUNA2 The bridging times are determined under the following conditions All measurements were performed at a room temperature...

Page 202: ...h battery pack Normal output load 100 5 V und 3 A 48 V und 0 5 A ringing approx 2 VA 19 min UPSC D Powerbox PB3000 with 48 V 7 Ah 4 x 12 V 7 Ah battery pack Normal output load 100 5 V und 3 A 48 V und 0 5 A ringing approx 2 VA 3 h Table 3 27 HiPath 3550 Maximum bridging times Power supply unit Load levels Maximum bridging time UPSC D 48 V 1 2 Ah battery pack Normal output load 100 5 V and 8 A 48 V...

Page 203: ...2 K5660 M300 Figure 3 23 UPSC D S30122 K5660 A300 M300 LED yellow X1 to CUC CUP 1 50 Slide switch for setting the ring frequen cy Slide switch for activating deactivating the battery voltage battery pack up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 25 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz B a t t e r y p a c k P B 3 0 0 0 P o w e r p l u g LED yellow LED green...

Page 204: ...onal market 20 Hz U S 50 Hz France Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage battery pack up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on NOTE System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug If the UPSC D has been set up for emergency battery operation the battery voltage must also b...

Page 205: ... 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 73 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board Connectors Figure 3 25 UPSC D Connectors Power plug Port for external power supply unit in PB3000 Port for battery pack or batteries in PB3000 ...

Page 206: ...e installed in the Powerbox PB3000 Licensed batteries for UPSC DR 4 x V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah batteries These are the only batteries released for connection to UPSC DR and installation in Powerbox PB3000 7 Warning The UPSC DR power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply Permanent operation at a direct current system is not allowed A DC power supply unit is only connecte...

Page 207: ...s an explosive gas hydrogen oxygen escapes when the battery is overloaded Table 3 28 UPSC DR Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah Batteries and Powerbox PB3000 System Power supply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time HiPath 3300 UPSC DR 4 x 12 V 7 Ah batter ies Normal output load 5 V 3 A 48 V 0 5 A ringing approx 2 VA 3 h HiPath 3300 UPSC DR Powerbox PB3000 with 1 ...

Page 208: ...nditions All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 23 C 73 4 F The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started Figure 3 26 UPSC DR S30122 K7373 M900 Table 3 28 UPSC DR Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113 W5123 E891 4 x 12 V 7 Ah Batteries and Powerbox PB3000 System Power supply unit Load levels Maximum bridg ing time LED green LED yellow ...

Page 209: ...n for Power Box PB3000 Slide switch for setting the ring frequen cy Slide switch for activating and deacti vating the battery voltage batteries up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 25 Hz 20 Hz 50 HzLED yellow Battery connector assi gnment 48 VBatt 48 VBatt 48 V of PB3000 48 V of PB3000 Caution The screw marked performs the ground...

Page 210: ...ional market 20 Hz U S 50 Hz FKR Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage batteries up off battery voltage deactivated battery backup off down on battery voltage activated battery backup on 7 Caution System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug If using an uninterruptible power supply switch off the battery voltage first Figure 3 28 UPS...

Page 211: ...7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 79 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Central Board Connectors Figure 3 29 UPSC DR Connectors Power plug Connector socket for PB3000 with batteries and LUNA2 ...

Page 212: ...ents The abbreviations used are as follows 7 Caution The system must be powered down and de energized before removing or inserting any boards in HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 and before removing or inserting the central boards in HiPath 3800 The HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must be firmly inserted into their slots otherwise contact pro...

Page 213: ...able is only connected via the front panel The opto electronic converter AMOM must be used to connect a fiber optic cable to the 15 pin Sub D jacks on the front panel Copper cable The copper cable is connected to T1 CSU Customer Service Unit or DSU Data Service Unit via the adapter cable C39195 A7269 B625 shown in Figure 3 30 Adapter cable C39195 A7269 B625 Figure 3 30 DIU2U for U S only Adapter C...

Page 214: ...t side of this board because the EMC shield is already provided by the front panel 15 41 a wire T receive wht ora 8 16 b wire R receive ora wht Figure 3 31 DIU2U for U S only Front Panel S30810 Q2216 X Table 3 29 DIU2U for U S only adapter cable assignment C39195 A7269 B625 15 pin Sub D connector Pin 50 pin Amphenol con nector Pin Function Color code Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green ...

Page 215: ...eiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Man ager E Check whether the board was deactivated usi...

Page 216: ...DN provides 2 x 30 B channels voice channels for HiPath 3800 These are used for the S2M trunk connection via NT for S2M networking via S2M lines Front panel In HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and later the B channels in the DIUN2 board are subject to license Information on licensing can be found in Chapter 8 Figure 3 32 DIUN2 Front Panel S30810 Q2196 X Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED red ...

Page 217: ... is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath ...

Page 218: ...ype DIUN2 mod with an AMOM adapter plugged in and an existing fiber optic connection The fiber optic path goes into operation imme diately if configured correctly Switch over to the connection type DIUN2 mod with an AMOM adapter plugged in and without an existing fiber optic connection The fiber optic path goes into operation once the fiber optic cable is plugged in if configured correctly This ca...

Page 219: ...urn path for the 5 V power supply Input output 6 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Input 7 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Input 8 RTIP0 a wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Input 9 TRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Output 10 5 V 5 V power supply Output 11 LWLI0_FRONT Fibre optic data input Input 12 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 14 5 V 5 V power supply Output 15 RRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Input No ot...

Page 220: ...U2U S30810 Q2216 X for U S only DIUN2 S30810 Q2196 X The board features two ports for the following S2M trunk connection over NT S2M networking via S2M lines T1 PRI Primary Rate Interface trunk connection for U S only T1 analog trunk connection for U S only A total of up to three DIUT2 and or DIUN2 boards can be installed in a system When used as a T1 trunk connection PRI or analog a system can ac...

Page 221: ...hielding panel is not required on the front side of this board because the EMC shield is already provided by the front panel Backplane System interfaces X1 to X9 are located on the backplane They are designed as SIPAC con nectors Figure 3 33 DIUT2 Front Panel S30810 Q2226 X100 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED red 15 pin Sub D interface 2 X11 15 pin Sub D interface 1 X10 ...

Page 222: ... power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Man ager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi ...

Page 223: ...iPath 3000 5000 Manager E System status Sys tem wide SW expansion Card data The following options are available DIUT2 T1 S2 mod DIUT2 T1 mod DIUT2 T1 analog mod for connection via fiber optic cable The fiber optic cable is only connected via the front panel The opto electronic convert er AMOM must be used to connect a fiber optic cable to the 15 pin Sub D jacks on the front panel DIUT2 T1 S2 DIUT2...

Page 224: ...e 120 ohms 75 ohms Input 9 TRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Output 10 5 V 5 V power supply Output 11 LWLI0_FRONT Fibre optic data input Input 12 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 14 5 V 5 V power supply Output 15 RRING0 b wire 120 ohms 75 ohms Input No other pins used Signal Name Connector contact Signal description Direction 5V X1 22 X4 30 X5 30 X9 28 Power supply unit 5 ...

Page 225: ...I X9 06 HDLC lines Input HDO X8 04 HDLC lines Output PRS X7 26 System reset Input BA0 BA6 X7 06 X7 28 X8 26 X8 28 X9 04 X8 06 X8 2 Frame address recognition Input FMB X9 22 Clock synchronization signal Input CKA X8 08 System clock 2 048 MHz Input CLS X8 10 Clock selection CLS GND CKA 2 048 MHz The CLS pin should be earthed on the backplane Input RCLK X7 02 Reference clock Output RAC X7 04 Referenc...

Page 226: ...3 3 V is created by onboard controllers TMS X7 46 Boundary scan check mode selection Not connected TDI X7 48 Boundary scan Check data input Not connected TDO X7 50 Boundary scan Check data output Not connected Table 3 37 DIUT2 Assignment of System Cable S30267 Z167 Axxx Pin Function Color code 8 a wire T transmit ora wht 15 b wire R transmit wht ora 1 a wire T receive blu wht 9 b wire R receive wh...

Page 227: ...orted networks LAN intranet Internet and circuit switched networks ISDN PSTN Bidirectional video signal transmission on the SIP interface OpenScape Personal Edition Configuration is performed via Web Based Management WBM which enables the administra tion of HG 1500 without any special software requirements For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500 see Section 2 ...

Page 228: ...P Digital Signal Processor If the HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3550 systems have the old housing covers and should be upgraded with a HXGS3 then the old housing covers must be replaced by C39165 A7021 B53 or C39165 A7021 B52 housing covers Table 3 38 HXGS3 HXGR3 Board Versions Board Part number Services DSPs B channels DSP chan nels HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X Voice and Data 1 8 HXGS3 with new software for HiP...

Page 229: ...ards each have two HGA HiPath Gateway Accelerator slots which can be used to connect extension modules Table 3 39 HXGS3 HXGR3 Extension Modules Extension module Part number Function Notes PDM1 PMC DSP mod ules S30807 Q5692 X100 Used for expansion for an addition al eight DSP channels Maximum of one PDM1 module pos sible Figure 3 34 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X S30810 Q2943 X1 Figure 3 35 HXGR3 S30810 K294...

Page 230: ...for LAN interface 1 X3 8 pin RJ45 jack for LAN interface 2 Both LAN interfaces allow access to the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration Manual configuration is also possible X4 9 pin Sub D plug for V 24 interface 7 Caution It is absolutely necessary to use a shielded Ethernet cable for LAN interfaces ports of the HXGS3 board Figure 3 36 HXGS3 HXGR3 Int...

Page 231: ... X2 and X3 Pin of RJ45 con nector Signal 1 1 TDP Transmit Data 3 2 TDN Transmit Data 4 3 RDP Receive Data 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 6 6 RDN Receive Data 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 Signals TT1 2 and RT1 2 are not needed for transmitting data They represent a signal termi nation of 100 ohms so called Bob Smith termination for the two unuse...

Page 232: ...r PC connected to the V 24 interface Transmission rate 19 200 Data bits 8 Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Data flow control None It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC Table 3 41 HXGS3 HXGR3 Assignment of V 24 Interface X10 Pin Signal I O Remark 1 2 RXD I Internal pull up resistor in level switch MAX211E 3 TXD O 4 DTR O 5 0 V Ground 6 DSR I Internal pull u...

Page 233: ...Path 3000 5000 network All stations can use the central voice mail server HiPath Xpressions Compact may be used as a central announcement device in a network system with V6 0 SMR 06 or later 7 Caution For thermal reasons the IVMNL board may only be installed in the basic cabinet in a HiPath 3800 19 inch cabinet installation Only one IVMNL or IVMN8 may be installed per HiPath 3800 system In order t...

Page 234: ...Peripheral boards Front panel An additional shielding panel is not required on the front side of this board because the EMC shield is already provided by the front panel Figure 3 37 IVMNL IVMN8 Front Panel S30122 H7688 X X100 Lockout switch Two LEDs indicating the board status LED green LED yellow Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface 8 pin RJ45 jack ...

Page 235: ...cels the LED test and both LEDs flash for approximately five seconds in confirmation LED statuses and their meanings Table 3 42 IVMNL IVMN8 LED Statuses LED yellow LED green Meaning Action During Startup and Initialization Off Off 1 Boot procedure lasts approx 60 s On On 2 LED test lasts approx 10 s On Off 3 Lockout switch state signaling by yellow LED lasts approx 5 s blocked On free Off Possibly...

Page 236: ... Lockout switch activated during a call On Off Board locked or board error occurred Check whether board was deac tivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch Change board if faulty Flashing 100 100 ms Off Upgrade process active Table 3 43 IVMNL IVMN8 RJ45 Jack Assignment Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 No...

Page 237: ...he boards can also be used for Music on Hold and announcements Optional administration of HiPath Xpressions Compact is also possible via the board s Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPath 3000 5000 network All stat...

Page 238: ...ns are locked The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 38 IVMP4 IVMP4R 2 50 X1 con nection to CUC CU...

Page 239: ...Path 3000 Peripheral boards Assignment of the RJ45 jack X3 The Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used Table 3 44 IVMP4 IVMP4R Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Connector ...

Page 240: ... Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test application startup depending on hard disk status lasts approx 2 9 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was deac tivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch Change board if faulty During Operation Off On Idle no call Flashing 500 500 ms Off At least one activ...

Page 241: ...ible Music on Hold can be used in V4 0 SMR 7 or later and announcements in V5 0 or later In addition the boards have an Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface which can be used for HiPath Xpressions Compact administration fast APS transfer backup and restore activities For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product Only one IVMP8 or IVMP8R m...

Page 242: ...Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 39 IVMP8 and IVMP8R not for U S Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 243: ...llow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 40 IVMP8 IVMP8R S30122 Q7379 X100 K7379 Z100 not for U S 2 50 X1 ...

Page 244: ...ernet 10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 The signals are output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2 Table 3 46 IVMP8 and IVMP8R not for U S Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Connector RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description Printed Circuit Con nector X2 Pin 1 Tx Transmit 1 2 Tx Transmit 3 3 Rx Receive 7 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 9 7 Not used 8 Not use...

Page 245: ...ssibly check if board was de activated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch Off Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test application startup depending on hard disk status lasts approx 3 8 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was de activated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch During Op...

Page 246: ...In addition the boards have an Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface which can be used for HiPath Xpressions Compact administration fast APS transfer backup and restore activities For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product Only one IVMS8 or IVMS8R may be installed per system For thermal reasons the IVMS8 board may only be used in slots ...

Page 247: ... boards Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block shown in the following picture before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach the packing protection covering Figure 3 41 IVMS8 IVMS8R Packing Protection Covering ...

Page 248: ...e yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 42 IVMS8 IVMS8R S30122 Q7379 X K7379 Z 2 50 X1 con nection to...

Page 249: ...th 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 117 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards Front view of IVMS8R Figure 3 43 IVMS8R Front View S30122 K7379 Z X3 LAN connector 8 pin RJ45 jack LED yellow LED green Lockout switch ...

Page 250: ... The Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 The signals are output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2 Table 3 48 IVMS8 IVMS8R Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Connector RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description Printed Circuit Con nector X2 Pin 1 Tx Transmit 1 2 Tx Transmit 3 3 Rx Receive 7 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 9 7 Not used 8 Not used ...

Page 251: ...heck if board was de activated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch Off Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test application startup depending on hard disk status lasts approx 3 8 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was deac tivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch During Operation ...

Page 252: ...sible via the board s Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product Packing protection covering You must remove the red packing protection covering cardboard block before starting up the board If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time for example for servicing you must reattach th...

Page 253: ...s are locked The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively locked The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered via lockout switch or soft ware but at least one call is still active To reset the board to the default state activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of board startup Figure 3 44 IVMS8N IVMS8NR 2 50 X1 con nection to CUC C...

Page 254: ...oards fm Peripheral boards Assignment of the RJ45 jack X3 The Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface is accessed via the 8 pin RJ45 jack X3 RJ45 Jack X3 Pin Signal Description 1 Tx Transmit 2 Tx Transmit 3 Rx Receive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Rx Receive 7 Not used 8 Not used Table 3 50 IVMS8N IVMS8NR Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 LAN Connector ...

Page 255: ...Flashing 500 500 ms Off 4 Hard disk test application startup depending on hard disk status lasts approx 2 9 minutes Off On 5a Standby mode after successful boot On Off 5b Board locked or board error oc curred Check whether board was deac tivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or lockout switch Change board if faulty During Operation Off On Idle no call Flashing 500 500 ms Off At least one active...

Page 256: ...nterfaces SLA24N 24 analog interfaces Switches and LEDs The operating mode short or long line with the appropriate flash times can be set up for each subscriber line interface with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E the menu settings Set up station Station Param Flags NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section...

Page 257: ... is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Man ager E Check whether the board was deactiva...

Page 258: ...2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 not used in SLA8N brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10...

Page 259: ... Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 not used in SLA8N 16N brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora blk 2...

Page 260: ...n 16 4a Port 4 4 4a brn wht 46 4b 29 4b 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5a gry wht 45 5b 30 5b 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6 6a blu red 44 6b 31 6b 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7 7a ora red 43 7b 32 7b 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8 8a grn red 42 8b 33 8b 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9 9a brn red 31 9b 34 9b 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10 10a gry red 22 10b 35 10b 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11 11a blu blk 33 11b 36 11b 12 blk ora...

Page 261: ...tered country code for country initialization see Chapter 5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 17 red brn 11 17a Port 17 9 9a not used in SLA16N brn red 31 17b 34 9b 18 red gry 02 18a Port 18 10 10a gry red 22 18b 35 10b 19 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 11 11a blu blk 33 19b 36 11b 20 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 12 12a ora blk 24 20b 37 12b 21 blk grn 15 21a Port 21 13 13a grn blk 35 21b 38 13b 22 blk brn 06 22a Port 22...

Page 262: ...or the following boards 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 8SLAR S30810 K2925 Z These are being phased out and can no longer be ordered Main features A DTMF code receiver is available for each analog interface permits DTMF dialing at analog telephones This guarantees that all analog terminals connected are fully accessible These boards support calling name identification presentation CL...

Page 263: ... 5 2 b 1 2 b 5 3 a 2 3 a 6 4 b 2 4 b 6 5 a 3 5 a 7 6 b 3 6 b 7 7 a 4 7 a 8 8 b 4 8 b 8 For U S only For SLAD4 and SLAD8 external extensions to the a b ports can be connected through OPS signaling hereinafter called OPS ports The number of OPS ports is limited The following maximum values must not be exceeded in HiPath 33x0 max 4 OPS ports in HiPath 35x0 max 8 OPS ports and max 4 OPS ports per boar...

Page 264: ...heral boards SLAD8R interfaces Figure 3 47 SLAD8R interfaces Table 3 57 SLAD8R assigning the ports MW8 jack X2 Pin T R ports 1 4 MW8 jack X2 Pin T R ports 5 8 1 14 a 1 5 54 a 5 15 b 1 55 b 5 2 24 a 2 6 64 a 6 25 b 2 65 b 6 3 34 a 3 7 74 a 7 35 b 3 75 b 7 4 44 a 4 8 84 a 8 45 b 4 85 b 8 T R ports 1 8 4 pin MW8 jacks X1 50 2 to CUPR CUCR Port 1 Port 8 ...

Page 265: ...lling name identification presentation CLIP It is prohibited to connect external extensions to SLAD16 using OPS signaling off premises station Ring voltage is generated by the UPSC D power supply unit and may require connection to an external power supply unit depending on configuration Please refer to Section 2 8 Country Specific Ring Frequencies for Analog Subscriber Line Modules for information...

Page 266: ...is responsible for the correct configuration The calculation of the required power is described in section D 2 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement The sequence of using the slots by SLAD16 boards i e 6 8 4 and 7 which is provided in the table has to be implicitly observed Slots which are not occupied by SLAD16 boards can be used by other boards The ambient temperature has to amount between 5 C 41 ...

Page 267: ...E The fan kit C39165 A7021 B46 1 is not permitted in the U S and Canada there fore only configurations without fan kit can be used in these countries Tabelle 3 58 Decision array for HiPath 3550 Assembly of fan kit and Power Box CBCC 4 a b ports 8 UP0E ports Slot Loop current Fan kit Power Box Number of analog ports Number of SLAD16 6 8 4 7 20 5 mA 23 2 mA 28 2 mA 33 2 mA 36 5 mA required Yes No ...

Page 268: ...D16 Port Assignment X2 Pin T R ports 1 4 X3 Pin T R ports 5 8 X4 Pin T R ports 9 12 X5 pin T R ports 13 16 1 a 1 1 a 5 1 a 9 1 a 13 2 b 1 2 b 5 2 b 9 2 b 13 3 a 2 3 a 6 3 a 10 3 a 14 4 b 2 4 b 6 4 b 10 4 b 14 5 a 3 5 a 7 5 a 11 5 a 15 6 b 3 6 b 7 6 b 11 6 b 15 7 a 4 7 a 8 7 a 12 7 a 16 8 b 4 8 b 8 8 b 12 8 b 16 to CUP CUC 1 X2 8 T R ports 1 4 50 X1 2 1 X3 8 T R ports 5 8 1 X4 8 T R ports 9 12 1 X5...

Page 269: ...om the outside see Section 4 2 3 4 Removing the System Housing Cover 3 Place the fan kit A on the system s shelf B see Figure 3 49 4 NOTE Arrange all fan kits on the board frame so that cool air reaches all expansion slots i e the distance C to the wall must be approx 45 mm see Figure 3 49 Danger of overheating from incorrect positioning of the fan kit The fan kit should not be mounted directly ab...

Page 270: ...7 Close the system CAUTION Cuts caused by sharp edges on the shielding plate When opening the system ensure that you only touch the housing cover from the outside 10 Start the system by plugging in the power plug If using a UPS the battery voltage must also be switched on Figure 3 49 SLAD16 Installation of the Fan Kit in HiPath 3550 Step Activity B D A approx 45 C ...

Page 271: ... 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 139 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards Figure 3 50 SLAD16 Fan Kit Connection Cable Figure 3 51 SLAD16 Connection of the Fan Kit E F G ...

Page 272: ...be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion For initial installation of HiPath Cordless Office the HiPath cordless system number DECT ID must be ordered together with the SLC16N board Replacement boards are always delivered without a HiPath cordless system num ber Installing the first SLC16N and entering the HiPath cordless system number releas es 16 mobile telephones for use P...

Page 273: ...r U S When you activate the lockout switch press the switch all idle mobile telephones are locked Active mobile telephones are not locked until their release keys are pressed Before unplugging the SLC16N board always activate the lockout switch and wait until the green LED stops flashing This precaution ensures that none of the mobile telephones are active Lockout switch not pressed free factory d...

Page 274: ...is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Man ager E Check whether the board was deactivated using Hi Path 3000 5000 Manager E If not replace boa...

Page 275: ...UP0 E port x brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Access 5 5a 4 BS x UP0 E port x gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Access 6 6a 4 BS x UP0 E port x blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Access 7 7a 4 BS x UP0 E port x ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Access 8 8a 4 BS x UP0 E port x grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Access 9 9a 4 BS x UP0 E port x brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Access 10 10a...

Page 276: ...SLC16N and base station The following specifications are based on line lengths of up to 1000 m and a line type 2x0 6 mm per UP0 E Number and type of corded telephones connected to the system Table 3 62 through Table 3 63 show which telephone configurations work without ad ditional power supply Table 3 62 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 1 Base Stations...

Page 277: ...0 E to SLC16N Maximum number of corded telephones Analog telephones 0 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 41 50 optiPoint 500 digital telephones 1 64 60 56 51 47 42 2 60 56 52 47 43 39 3 57 52 48 43 39 35 4 53 48 44 40 35 31 5 49 44 40 36 31 27 6 45 40 36 32 27 23 7 41 37 32 28 23 19 8 37 33 28 24 20 15 Table 3 62 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 1 Base Stations Co...

Page 278: ... options are available for supplying power to the base stations Power supply via one UP0 E interface Page 3 147 Power supply via two UP0 E interfaces Page 3 148 Power supply via three UP0 E interfaces Page 3 149 for BS3 3 only If the power supplied by the UPSC D HiPath 3550 is insufficient additional power can be sup plied by installing the external power supply Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 Page 3 1...

Page 279: ...Station Power Supply via One UP0 E Interface Connect the base station to a free interface on SLC16N as shown in Figure 3 53 Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths 1000 m for 2 x 0 6 mm Figure 3 53 Base Station Power Supply via One UP0 E Interface not for U S a b 1 CABLU MDFU MDFU E 1 2 UP0 E BS3 1 for in doors Splitting strip HiPath 3550 SLC16N ...

Page 280: ...nect the base station to two free interfaces on SLC16N as shown in Figure 3 54 Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths 1000 m for 2 x 0 6 mm Using two UP0 E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in BS3 3 base stations Figure 3 54 Base Station Power Supply via Two UP0 E Interfaces not for U S a b 1 CABLU MDFU MDFU E 2 3 4 5 UP0 E1 UP0 E2 BS3 3 for in doors Splitting strip ...

Page 281: ...r can be sup plied by installing the external power supply Powerbox PB3000 To do this connect the DC port on the PB3000 to the special DC input on the UPSC D As described on the preceding pages the base stations must be connected to free UP0 E inter faces BS3 1 needs one BS3 2 needs two and BS3 3 needs three free UP0 E interfaces Powerbox PB3000 is also used if an external power supply unit is req...

Page 282: ...e options available for operating HiPath Cordless Office Base stations must be clocked with a high degree of accuracy for HiPath Cordless Office For this the subboard CMS must be plugged into the CBSAP board see Table 11 1 Front panel An additional shielding panel is not required on the front side of this board because the EMC shield is already provided by the front panel NOTE Danger of damage to ...

Page 283: ...receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by ...

Page 284: ...b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 1...

Page 285: ... 3000 Peripheral boards Table 3 66 SLCN not for U S Assignment of Connector Panels with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLCN Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 286: ...6 2012 3 154 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards 17 4 Free 5 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 66 SLCN not for U S Assignment of Connector Panels with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLCN Notes No Pin ...

Page 287: ... 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3 11 bl...

Page 288: ... four SLCN boards Supplying power to base stations Power is supplied to the base stations primarily via the internal PSU in the system in question If the correct number of LUNA2 modules was calculated the system s internal power supply unit provides sufficient power to supply the HiPath Cordless Office system configuration spec ified in Table 11 1 To guarantee uninterrupted operation of the HiPath...

Page 289: ...0810 Q2225 X200 24 analog T R interfaces These boards support calling name identification presentation CLIP For U S only The connection of external analog extensions via OPS signaling OPS Off Pre mises Station is not supported Ring voltage SLMAE8 and SLMAE boards generate their own ring voltage at 65 Veff An external ring voltage generator is therefore not required NOTE Danger of damage to propert...

Page 290: ...oards Touch guard Front panel 7 CAUTION Risk of electric shock through contact with live components The boards are fitted with a touch guard because the onboard heat sinks are ener gized Do not remove this touch guard Figure 3 57 SLMAE8 SLMAE Touch Guard Figure 3 58 SLMAE8 SLMAE LEDs on the Front Panel Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 291: ...tors Table 3 78 and Table 3 79 Table 3 68 SLMAE8 SLMAE LED Statuses Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pl...

Page 292: ...6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a Not used for SLMAE8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a P...

Page 293: ...rn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 69 SLMAE8 SLMAE SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on...

Page 294: ...ipheral boards Table 3 70 SLMAE8 SLMAE Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA8 SLMAE Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a Not used for SLMAE8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 295: ...n internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 17 4 17a Not used for SLMAE8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 70 SLMAE8 SLMAE Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA8 SLMAE Notes No Pin ...

Page 296: ... Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 Not used for SLMAE8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13...

Page 297: ... for SLMAE8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 71 SLMAE8 SLMAE Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack SLMAE8 SLMAE Notes ...

Page 298: ...wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used for SLMAE8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b ...

Page 299: ...wht blu Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 Not used for SLMAE8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora ...

Page 300: ... at 35 Veff An external ring voltage generator is therefore not required If the generated ring voltage is too low for the connected telephones malfunctions may occur for example the MWI signal is not detected To generate higher ring voltage the SLMA2 board can be used in connection with the ring voltage generator RGMOD Front panel NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required...

Page 301: ...ctors Table 3 78 and Table 3 79 Table 3 74 SLMA SLMA8 LED Statuses Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com ple...

Page 302: ... 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a Not used for SLMA8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Por...

Page 303: ...brn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 75 SLMA SLMA8 SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on ...

Page 304: ...eripheral boards Table 3 76 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a Not used for SLMA8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 305: ...den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 17 4 17a Not used for SLMA8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 76 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes No Pin ...

Page 306: ...Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 Not used for SLMA8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 T...

Page 307: ...sed for SLMA8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 77 SLMA SLMA8 Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack SLMA SLMA8 Notes ...

Page 308: ...ht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used for SLMA8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 ...

Page 309: ...ht blu Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 Not used for SLMA8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora bl...

Page 310: ...is plugged in on the reverse of the backplane of the basic and or expansion cabinet The ring voltage and ring frequency are set using jumpers Front panel NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion A system cabinet can be fitted with a mix of SLMA SLMA8 and SLMA2 boards RG MO...

Page 311: ...3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 179 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 1 5 3 ...

Page 312: ...tuses Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Boa...

Page 313: ... 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b...

Page 314: ... 19 yel brn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 81 SLMA2 Selected Countries Only SIVAP...

Page 315: ... Peripheral boards Table 3 82 SLMA2 Selected Countries Only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA2 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 316: ...th 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards 17 4 17a 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 82 SLMA2 Selected Countries Only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMA2 Notes No Pin ...

Page 317: ...IP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 1...

Page 318: ...2 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 83 SLMA2 Selected Countries Only Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jacks U S only CHAMP jack SLMA2 Notes ...

Page 319: ...wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 3...

Page 320: ...W8 pin Notes 1 1 wht blu Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora blk...

Page 321: ...AV8 and SLMAV24 is not possible The slot in HiPath 3800 must be released via HiPath 3000 Manager E Main features Code Receiver A code receiver is available for each T R interface permits DTMF dialing at analog telephones This guarantees that all analog terminals connected are fully accessible CLIP These boards support calling name identification presentation CLIP External analog extensions Externa...

Page 322: ... fm Peripheral boards Product image Front panel Cover To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For information on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 1 5 3 Figure 3 61 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Figure 3 62 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 LEDs in the front panel SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 323: ...9 For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors Table 3 90 and Table 3 91 Table 3 86 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 LED statuses Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Flashing Board performs a self test Slow flashing Off Board is faulty Replace board Fast flashing Off Loadware is being...

Page 324: ...ht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a not used in SLMAV8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a...

Page 325: ...47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 87 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on ...

Page 326: ...heral boards Table 3 88 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a not used in SLMAV8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 327: ...internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 17 4 17a not used in SLMAV8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 88 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Notes No Pin ...

Page 328: ...ing Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 not used in SLMAV8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b ...

Page 329: ...in SLMAV8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 89 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack SLMAV8 SLMAV24 Notes ...

Page 330: ... 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 not used in SLMAV8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10...

Page 331: ... 1 wht blu Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 not used in SLMAV8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 or...

Page 332: ...Path 3800 SLMO2 S30810 Q2168 X10 24 UP0 E interfaces SLMO8 S30810 Q2168 X100 eight UP0 E interfaces Front panel NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 63 SLMO2 SLMO8 LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel ...

Page 333: ... LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is dea...

Page 334: ...6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a Not used for SLMO8 brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Po...

Page 335: ...rn 47 19a Port 19 19a brn yel 48 19b 19b 20 yel gry 49 20a Port 20 20a gry yel 50 20b 20b 21 vio blu 51 21a Port 21 21a blu vio 52 21b 21b 22 vio ora 53 22a Port 22 22a ora vio 54 22b 22b 23 vio grn 55 23a Port 23 23a grn vio 56 23b 23b 24 vio brn 57 24a Port 24 24a brn vio 58 24b 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 93 SLMO2 SLMO8 SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on ...

Page 336: ...ripheral boards Table 3 94 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 9a Not used for SLMO8 5 9b 10 4 10a 5 10b 11 4 11a 5 11b 12 4 12a 5 12b 13 4 13a 5 13b 14 4 14a 5 14b 15 4 15a 5 15b 16 4 16a 5 16b ...

Page 337: ...en internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 17 4 17a Not used for SLMO8 5 17b 18 4 18a 5 18b 19 4 19a 5 19b 20 4 20a 5 20b 21 4 21a 5 21b 22 4 22a 5 22b 23 4 23a 5 23b 24 4 24a 5 24b Table 3 94 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes No Pin ...

Page 338: ... Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 Not used for SLMO8 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 ...

Page 339: ...ed for SLMO8 42 17b 17 TIP 18 18a 18 Ring Port 18 43 18b 18 TIP 19 19a 19 Ring Port 19 44 19b 19 TIP 20 20a 20 Ring Port 20 45 20b 20 TIP 21 21a 21 Ring Port 21 46 21b 21 TIP 22 22a 22 Ring Port 22 47 22b 22 TIP 23 23a 23 Ring Port 23 48 23b 23 TIP 24 24a 24 Ring Port 24 49 24b 24 TIP Table 3 95 SLMO2 SLMO8 Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack SLMO2 SLMO8 Notes ...

Page 340: ...wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 Not used for SLMO8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5...

Page 341: ...ht blu Free blu wht 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Port 17 17a 4 Not used for SLMO8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Port 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Port 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 20a 4 ora bl...

Page 342: ... Line Module Cost Optimized UP0 E provide 8 and 24 UP0 E interfaces for optiPoint and OpenStage telephones on HiPath 3550 Switches and LEDs NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 64 SLMO8 not for U S SLMO24 S30810 Q2901 X100 S30810 Q2901 X H1 green H2 red LEDs L...

Page 343: ...ing power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors detected by test loops or board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 5000 Man ager E Check whether the board was deactivated using ...

Page 344: ...b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Access 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Access 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Access 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Access 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Access 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Access 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Access 9 9a 4 Not used for SLMO8 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Access 10 1...

Page 345: ... 2 wht ora Free ora wht 3 wht grn Free grn wht 4 wht brn Free brn wht 5 wht gry Free gry wht 2 6 red blu Free blu red 7 red ora Free ora red 8 red grn Free grn red 9 red brn 11 17a Access 17 17a 4 Not used for SLMO8 brn red 31 17b 17b 5 10 red gry 02 18a Access 18 18a 4 gry red 22 18b 18b 5 3 11 blk blu 13 19a Access 19 19a 4 blu blk 33 19b 19b 5 12 blk ora 04 20a Access 20 20a 4 ora blk 24 20b 20...

Page 346: ...a Port 4 4 4a brn wht 46 4b 29 4b 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5 5a gry wht 45 5b 30 5b 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6 6a blu red 44 6b 31 6b 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7 7a ora red 43 7b 32 7b 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8 8a grn red 42 8b 33 8b 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9 9a brn red 31 9b 34 9b 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10 10a gry red 22 10b 35 10b 11 blk blu 13 11a Port 11 11 11a blu blk 33 11b 36 11b 12 blk ora 04 12...

Page 347: ...1 11a blu blk 33 19b 36 11b 20 blk ora 04 20a Port 20 12 12a ora blk 24 20b 37 12b 21 blk grn 15 21a Port 21 13 13a grn blk 35 21b 38 13b 22 blk brn 06 22a Port 22 14 14a brn blk 26 22b 39 14b 23 blk gry 17 23a Port 23 15 15a gry blk 37 23b 40 15b 24 yel blu 08 24a Port 24 16 16a blu yel 28 24b 41 16b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 Table 3 101 SLMO24 Assignment SU Xx8 X...

Page 348: ... NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 65 SLU8 Interfaces S30817 Q922 A301 7 Caution After deactivating the power supply you must wait a short while before plugging the SLU8 in or out If you do not wait before doing so the CBCC CBCP may be dam aged Table 3 102 ...

Page 349: ...620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 217 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 7 a 4 a 8 8 b 4 b 8 Table 3 102 SLU8 Contact Assignments Contact X2 UPo E ports 1 4 X3 UP0 E ports 5 8 ...

Page 350: ...3300 19 inch housing Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 66 SLU8R Interfaces S30817 K922 Z301 Table 3 103 SLU8R Contact Assignments MW8 jack X2 Pin UP0 E ports 1 4 MW8 jack X2 Pin UP0 E ports 5 8 1 14 a 1 5 54 a 5 15 b 1 55 b 5 2 24 a 2 6 64 a 6 25...

Page 351: ...th 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 219 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 4 44 a 4 8 84 a 8 45 b 4 85 b 8 Table 3 103 SLU8R Contact Assignments MW8 jack X2 Pin UP0 E ports 1 4 MW8 jack X2 Pin UP0 E ports 5 8 ...

Page 352: ... underequipped variant with two S0 ports Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion The board does not supply terminals with power Power must be supplied locally us ing a local plug in power supply or a bus power supply unit for example Figure 3 67 STLS2 not for U...

Page 353: ...device on the S0 bus The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply The system assigns the MSN only after the S0 port is configured on the Euro bus not for U S and can be read out via the administration Assistant T Code 20 4 3 S0 Bus MSN Table 3 104 STLS4 Module Interface Assignments for U S only Pin Port Assignment Pin Port Assignment 2 1 Transmit 2 3 Transmit 3 Receive 3 Receive 4 Rec...

Page 354: ...d lines Use the S0 interface S01 for connection to the public telecommunications network ISDN trunk You can also connect S0 interfaces S02 to S04 to the ISDN trunk or to ISDN terminals ISDN telephone group 0 fax device PC dialing aid via an S4 bus The connection networking to HiPath 3000 and HiPath 4000 CorNet NQ can also be set up via S0 interfaces S01 to S04 S0 connection options Point to point ...

Page 355: ...st free station number in the system The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN without an outgoing sei zure Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini Western jack not for U S S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLS board s Mini Western jack via the cable supplied You must first install a jack with cross connected cables see Figure 3 69 If no MSN is entered in the terminal a defa...

Page 356: ...0 operation you must first cross the SR and SX wires be fore the first jack UAE Connec Additional power sup ply 230 V Mini Western through jack MW8 8 pin SR 1 Receive 5 SX 1 Transmit 3 SX 2 Transmit 6 SR 2 Receive 4 1st Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 2nd to 8th Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 100 Ω 0 25 W Terminating resistor in last jack System S01 to S04 Twisted pair 8 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 SX SX SR SR Not cro...

Page 357: ... wires Contact is always established using the center pins of MW jacks Figure 3 70 shows the pin assignments for jacks of different sizes The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply Plug the ISDN terminal connecting cord into the MW jack Connecting an ISDN S0 telephone requires a local power supply e g manufactured by Sedlbauer Pin Assignment of MW Jacks Figure 3 70 MWxx Jack Pin Ass...

Page 358: ...rnal S0 buses PMP bus in NT net work terminator mode with cross connected RX TX lines Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion The board does not supply terminals with power In this case power must be sup plied locally using a local plug in power supply or a bus...

Page 359: ... 1 4 1 13 S0 port 1 transmit 14 S0 port 1 receive 15 S0 port 1 receive 16 S0 port 1 transmit 2 23 S0 port 2 transmit 24 S0 port 2 receive 25 S0 port 2 receive 26 S0 port 2 transmit 3 33 S0 port 3 transmit 34 S0 port 3 receive 35 S0 port 3 receive 36 S0 port 3 transmit 4 43 S0 port 4 transmit 44 S0 port 4 receive 45 S0 port 4 receive 46 S0 port 4 transmit Refer to Page 3 222 for information on conn...

Page 360: ... 3550 and HiPath 3350 STLSX4R Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX Rack S30810 K2944 Z four S0 ba sic rate accesses for use in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 These are operated either as external trunk interfaces in TE terminal equipment mode or as internal S0 buses PMP bus in NT network terminator mode with cross connected RX TX lines Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltag...

Page 361: ...port 2 X2 Pin S0 port 31 1 Not for STLSX2 X2 Pin S0 port 41 11 21 31 41 12 22 32 42 13 Transmit 23 Transmit 33 Transmit 43 Transmit 14 Receive 24 Receive 34 Receive 44 Receive 15 Receive 25 Receive 35 Receive 45 Receive 16 Transmit 26 Transmit 36 Transmit 46 Transmit 17 27 37 47 18 28 38 48 CUP CUC for STLSX2 STLSX4 CUPR CUCR for STLSX4R X2 X1 50 2 4 S0 ports MW8 RJ45 jacks 11 48 S0 port 1 S0 port...

Page 362: ...cted in connection with HiPath ProCenter Office HP CO H300 Optimized for interconnection with HiPath 4000 Direct or fixed connection defines the type of connection for a network and controls the supply of clock pulses Direct Communication systems are connected to one another by means of a direct cable connection The master system supplies the reference clock pulse for the net worked system Fixed c...

Page 363: ...s the first free station number in the system The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN without an outgoing sei zure Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini Western jack S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLSX board s Mini Western jack via the ca ble supplied You must first install a jack with cross connected cables see Figure 3 74 If no MSN is entered in the terminal a defau...

Page 364: ...ation you must first cross the SR and SX wires be fore the first jack UAE Connec Additional power sup ply 230 V Mini Western through jack MW8 8 pin SR 1 Receive 5 SX 1 Transmit 3 SX 2 Transmit 6 SR 2 Receive 4 1st Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 2nd to 8th Mini Western jack MW8 8 pin 100 Ω 0 25 W Terminating resistor in last jack System S01 to S04 Twisted pair 8 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 SX SX SR SR Not crossed i...

Page 365: ... this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion The range of the short S0 bus up to eight Terminal Equipment Identifiers TEI is limited to approximately 60 m If longer cables are required the S0 bus type must be set to Long in HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E developer mode This provides a range of approximately 160 m This setting can be made in V5 0 SMR 05 5 CV or later Figure 3 75 STMD3 S30810 Q22...

Page 366: ...ED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deact...

Page 367: ...ic rate access 2 3a grn wht 6 2Eb 3b 4 wht brn 7 2Sa 4a brn wht 8 2Sb 4b 5 wht gry 9 3Ea Basic rate access 3 5a gry wht 10 3Eb 5b 6 red blu 11 3Sa 6a blu red 12 3Sb 6b 7 red ora 13 4Ea Basic rate access 4 7a ora red 14 4Eb 7b 8 red grn 15 4Sa 8a grn red 16 4Sb 8b 9 red brn 17 5Ea Basic rate access 5 9a brn red 18 5Eb 9b 10 red gry 19 5Sa 10a gry red 20 5Sb 10b 11 blk blu 24 6Ea Basic rate access 6...

Page 368: ...line Pin Trunk connection Pin 1 3 4 1Ea Basic rate access 1 6 5 1Eb 4 3 1Sa 5 6 1Sb 2 3 4 2Ea Basic rate access 2 6 5 2Eb 4 3 2Sa 5 6 2Sb 3 3 4 3Ea Basic rate access 3 6 5 3Eb 4 3 3Sa 5 6 3Sb 4 3 4 4Ea Basic rate access 4 6 5 4Eb 4 3 4Sa 5 6 4Sb 5 3 4 5Ea Basic rate access 5 6 5 5Eb 4 3 5Sa 5 6 5Sb 6 3 4 6Ea Basic rate access 6 6 5 6Eb 4 3 6Sa 5 6 6Sb 7 3 4 7Ea Basic rate access 7 6 5 7Eb 4 3 7Sa ...

Page 369: ... S0 Receive Basic rate access 2 28 S0 Receive 4 S0 Transmit 29 S0 Transmit 5 S0 Receive Basic rate access 3 30 S0 Receive 6 S0 Transmit 31 S0 Transmit 7 S0 Receive Basic rate access 4 32 S0 Receive 8 S0 Transmit 33 S0 Transmit 9 S0 Receive Basic rate access 5 34 S0 Receive 10 S0 Transmit 35 S0 Transmit 11 S0 Receive Basic rate access 6 36 S0 Receive 12 S0 Transmit 37 S0 Transmit 13 S0 Receive Basi...

Page 370: ...ate access 2 3a 3 4 grn wht 47 2Eb 3b 6 5 4 wht brn 16 2Sa 4a 4 3 brn wht 46 2Sb 4b 5 6 5 wht gry 05 3Ea Basic rate access 3 5a 3 4 gry wht 45 3Eb 5b 6 5 2 6 red blu 14 3Sa 6a 4 3 blu red 44 3Sb 6b 5 6 7 red ora 23 4Ea Basic rate access 4 7a 3 4 ora red 43 4Eb 7b 6 5 8 red grn 32 4Sa 8a 4 3 grn red 42 4Sb 8b 5 6 9 red brn 11 5Ea Basic rate access 5 9a 3 4 brn red 31 5Eb 9b 6 5 10 red gry 02 5Sa 10...

Page 371: ...tional video signal transmission on the SIP interface OpenScape Personal Edition Configuration is performed via Web Based Management WBM which enables the administra tion of HG 1500 without any special software requirements For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500 see Section 2 5 Board versions Sixteen simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP...

Page 372: ...ator slots which can be used to con nect the extension modules Connections The STMI2 board features the following connections on the front panel Two RJ45 jacks for LAN interfaces These provide access to the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration Manual configuration is also possible 9 pin Sub D plug for V 24 interface Figure 3 76 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 ...

Page 373: ...cating the board status Run green on at least 1 B channel busy off normal operation Fail red error encountered V 24 interface 9 pin Sub D plug Two Ethernet 10 100BaseT LAN connectors 8 pin RJ45 jacks LAN2 only released for service applications LAN1 The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs LED1 Green 100 Mbps online link Yellow 10 Mbps online link Flashing active LED2 green On full duplex ...

Page 374: ...e PC The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V 24 interface Transmission rate 38 400 default Data bits 8 Parity bit None Stop bits 1 Data flow control None It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC Table 3 113 STMI2 V 24 Interface Assignment Pin Signal I O Remark 1 DCD Not used 2 RXD I Internal pull up resistor in level...

Page 375: ...nt RJ45 Jacks Pin Signal 1 TDP Transmit Data 2 TDN Transmit Data 3 RDP Receive Data 4 TT1 Transmit Termination 1 5 TT2 Transmit Termination 2 6 RDN Receive Data 7 RT1 Receive Termination 1 8 RT2 Receive Termination 2 Signals TT1 2 and RT1 2 are not needed for transmitting data They represent a signal termi nation of 100 ohms so called Bob Smith termination for the two unused wire pairs in a 4 pair...

Page 376: ...ach support a maximum of 30 B channels a total of up to 30 B channels can be used per card Direct connection to the MINI BNC connectors on each card is only possible for coaxial trunks 75 ohms An external impedance converter F31505 E1 A146 must be used for symmetrical trunks 120 ohms TCAS 2 and TCASR 2 function as converters which convert the Euro ISDN protocol on an S2M link to the Channel Associ...

Page 377: ... Interfaces and Jumpers Figure 3 78 TCAS 2 S30810 Q2945 X for selected countries only Figure Figure 3 79 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Interfaces and Jumpers 1 X13 X21 X12 3 2 1 X14 X20 Modem optional X805 Analog modem X910 X909 X803 V 24 interface X804 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface X11 X16 3 2 1 X17 CAS interface 1 X911 X912 CAS interface 2 3 2 1 ...

Page 378: ...he flash mem ory Flash memory is deleted all sectors apart from U boot firmware Flash memory is not de leted default setting X16 Resetting the card Reset performed Reset not performed default setting X17 Hardware watchdog Watchdog active default setting Watchdog not active Table 3 116 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Jumper for Setting the V 24 Baud Rate V 24 baud rate Kbps Jumper X11 X1...

Page 379: ...ctions X805 RJ45 jack Analog modem optional X803 9 pin MINI DIN jack V 24 interface X910 MINI BNC connector 75 ohms Receive RX X804 RJ45 jack Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface Two LEDs indicate the current interface status Yellow LED transmitting data Green LED receiving data CAS interface 1 X909 MINI BNC connector 75 ohms Transmit TX X911 MINI BNC connector 75 ohms Receive RX CAS interface 2 X912 MI...

Page 380: ...n the following boot phases Figure 3 81 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Front Panel Line 1 Line 2 RX TX RX TX V 24 MODEM ETHERNET U boot Firmware Power supply unit switched on Linux operating system Initializing U boot Firmware CAS application software The decimal point is flashing to indicate that the U boot firmware is operational The decimal point is activated not flashing to indi cate init...

Page 381: ...wnloading FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array firmware Accessing flash EPROM Save and Delete Activating built in self test BIST BIST1 or BIST2 Administration Service PC connected Copying software from SDRAM to FEPROM Downloading image file Linux and CAS application Initializing the Linux operating system Error Resetting the card U boot firmware operational decimal point flashing Table 3 118 TCAS 2 ...

Page 382: ...ash flashing display Configuring network interface Loading real time kernel modules Loading board specific modules Core files available Figure 3 82 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only CAS Application Soft ware States Table 3 118 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Linux Operating System States Display Meaning Interface 1 ISDN active Interface 1 CAS active Interface 2 CAS active CAS a...

Page 383: ...ards Modem optional The analog modem modem kit F31505 E1 A147 is an optional submodule for the TCAS 2 and TCASR 2 cards which is plugged into the X20 and X21 ports This facilitates remote ad ministration of the CAS protocol converter on the TCAS 2 and TCASR 2 cards see Page 3 252 Figure 3 83 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Optional Modem X21 Pin1 ...

Page 384: ...face 9 pin MINI DIN jack X803 and the connection cable C39195 A9700 B532 Via the Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface RJ45 jack X804 Via the optional analog modem modem kit F31505 E1 A147 In this case you will need to establish a connection from the analog modem RJ45 jack X805 to a free port in an an alog subscriber line module via the RJ45 cable C39195 Z7208 A10 supplied with the mo dem kit see Figure ...

Page 385: ... TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only RJ45 Cable C39195 Z7208 A10 RJ45 Cable C39195 Z7208 A10 included in modem kit F31505 E1 A147 Plug the RJ45 connector into the free jack on an analog sub scriber line module HiPath 3500 TCASR 2 X805 HiPath 3550 TCAS 2 X805 Disconnect the RJ45 cable and connect the T R wires to the free terminals on an analog subscriber line module ...

Page 386: ...ial trunk 75 ohms length 10 m symmetrical line 120 ohms The impedance converter F31505 E1 A146 must be used for connecting to a symmetrical trunk Table 3 119 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countries only Assignment of the CAS Cable C39195 A7700 B13 Wire Function MINI BNC connec tor BNC connector 1 Receive Tip Conductor Conductor Receive Ring Shield Shield 2 Transmit Tip Conductor Conductor Transmit R...

Page 387: ...ding to EN 55022 both shielded CAS cables must be contacted at the appropriate points on the HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 Procedure Fix the cable shielding B for both CAS cables A via cable binder C to the T tongue D of the housing so a continuously conductive contact is created between the conductive tape on the cable shielding and the housing see figure Figure 3 87 TCAS 2 TCASR 2 for selected countri...

Page 388: ...rds for HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 256 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards Figure 3 88 CAS cable shield contacts B A D C ...

Page 389: ... to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 89 TLA2 TLA4 not for U S Interfaces S30817 Q923 Bxxx Axxx Table 3 120 TLA2 TLA4 not for U S Contact Assignments Contact Connector X2 Connector X4 1 a trunk 1 GND for GEE50 FKR otherwise free 2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1 3 a trunk 2 a trunk 1 4 b trunk 2 b trunk 2 5 a...

Page 390: ...h A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 258 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards 10 Call charging module assignment GMZ 1 Not for TLA2 Table 3 120 TLA2 TLA4 not for U S Contact Assignments Contact Connector X2 Connector X4 ...

Page 391: ...r X2 Connector X4 Connector X5 1 GND a trunk 1 a trunk 5 GND 2 b trunk 1 b trunk 1 b trunk 5 b trunk 5 3 a trunk 1 a trunk 2 a trunk 6 a trunk 5 4 b trunk 2 b trunk 2 b trunk 6 b trunk 6 5 a trunk 2 a trunk 3 a trunk 7 a trunk 6 6 b trunk 3 b trunk 3 b trunk 7 b trunk 7 7 a trunk 3 a trunk 4 a trunk 8 a trunk 7 8 b trunk 4 b trunk 4 b trunk 8 b trunk 8 9 a trunk 4 a trunk 8 10 GMZ 1 GMZ 2 GMZ Call...

Page 392: ...nsmission and function oriented characteristics of the TLA4R are completely identical to those of the TLA boards that are used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 The only differences are the two ALUMs which are only available on the TLA4R the call metering receiving equipment interface which is only on the TLA boards Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightn...

Page 393: ...for U S Contact Assignments MW8 jack X5 pin Trunk connections 1 4 1 14 a trunk 1 15 b trunk 1 2 24 a trunk 2 25 b trunk 2 3 34 a trunk 3 35 b trunk 3 4 44 a trunk 4 45 b trunk 4 MW8 jack X5 pin ALUM 1 2 5 54 TB1 ALUM1 Stn card connection 55 TA1 6 64 TB2 ALUM2 Stn card connection 65 TA2 7 74 BE1 ALUM1 Analog telephone connection 75 AE1 8 84 BE2 ALUM2 Analog telephone connection 85 AE2 ...

Page 394: ...to Hi Path 3800 using the loop start protocol Front panel NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 92 TM2LP Front Panel S30810 Q2159 Xxxx To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see S...

Page 395: ... LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated n...

Page 396: ...1b 2 wht ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk blu 24 Free blu blk 25 12 blk ora 26 ...

Page 397: ... A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 265 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 ...

Page 398: ...documentation boards fm Peripheral boards Table 3 125 TM2LP Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TM2LP Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 Free 5 10 4 Free 5 11 4 Free 5 12 4 Free 5 13 4 Free 5 14 4 Free 5 15 4 Free 5 16 4 Free 5 ...

Page 399: ...cumentation 3 267 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 17 4 Free 5 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 125 TM2LP Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TM2LP Notes No Pin ...

Page 400: ...Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack TM2LP Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free 40 16 Free 41 ...

Page 401: ...ht blu 19 1a Port 1 1a 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn red...

Page 402: ...ling default set ting MFC R2 with caller ID tone dialing and dial pulsing It is not possible to use DTMF and MFC R2 with or without caller ID simultaneously The board is implemented in HiPath 3550 and has the part number S30810 Q2587 A400 Switches and LEDs NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1...

Page 403: ...nalysis The subminiature D connector provides information about MFC R2 signaling To activate the trace function you must connect a PC with a terminal emulation program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal Terminal configuration Bits per second 19 200 Data bits 8 Stop bit 1 Parity none Flow control none Pin assignments of the diagnostic cable Figure 3 94 Pin Assignments of the TMAMF Diagnostic Cable PC ...

Page 404: ...d Initialization Off Flashing 250 250 ms The DSP digital signal processor is waiting for DID digits On The DSP is being reset During Operation Off The DSP is idle Flashing 250 250 ms Error the DSP has not yet received the DID digits Replace board On The MFC R2 filter is on Table 3 129 TMAMF LED Statuses H0 to H7 LED status on off Meaning Action During Operation Off The trunk is idle no seizure On ...

Page 405: ... Xx8 1 1 wht blu 19 1a Port 1 1a 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Fr...

Page 406: ... an outgoing call in different countries is also supported It can be activated with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Settings menu Lines networking Trunks double click Parameters MSI flags Flags Si lent Reversal The Austrian direct inward dialing system ÜFS is not supported TLANI8 occupation The TLANI8 can be occupied in the following variants based on a common PCB TLANI8 CE S30810 Q2954 X100 Fully occu...

Page 407: ...ce is via X105 and X106 jumpers TLANI2 TLANI4 Loop start setting pins 1 2 closed default Ground start setting Pins 2 3 closed TLANI8 Figure 3 95 TLANI2 TLANI4 Interfaces S30810 H2953 X1xx Xxx Figure 3 96 TLANI8 Interfaces S30810 H2954 X1xx X1 50 2 X4 X2 1 1 8 to CUP CUC T R ports MSI 1 4 LS 3 4 not for TLANI2 ALUM 1 2 X3 free Jumper TLANI2 TLANI4 8 X106 1 2 3 X105 1 2 3 X1 50 2 X4 X2 1 1 8 to CUP ...

Page 408: ... Contact Connector X2 Connector X3 Connector X4 ALUM 1 a trunk 1 Not used b ALUM1 Subsc line module con nection 2 b trunk 1 a 3 a trunk 2 b ALUM2 Subsc line module con nection 4 b trunk 2 a 5 a trunk 3 b ALUM1 Analog telephone connec tion 6 b trunk 3 a 7 a trunk 4 b ALUM2 Analog telephone connec tion 8 b trunk 4 a Table 3 132 TLANI8 contact assignments Contact Connector X2 Connector X4 1 a trunk 1...

Page 409: ...ted and deactivated Set tings menu Lines networking Trunks double click Parameters MSI flags Flags Charge module activated Silent Reversal which is used to register the beginning and end of an outgoing call in different countries is also supported It can be activated with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Settings menu Lines networking Trunks double click Parameters MSI flags Flags Si lent Reversal The A...

Page 410: ...aces Contact assignments Figure 3 97 TLANI4R Interfaces S30810 K2953 X2xx Table 3 133 TLANI4R Contact Assignments MW8 jack X5 pin Trunk connections 1 4 1 14 a trunk 1 15 b trunk 1 2 24 a trunk 2 25 b trunk 2 3 34 a trunk 3 35 b trunk 3 4 44 a trunk 4 45 b trunk 4 8 MW8 jacks X1 50 2 to CUPR CUCR X5 88 MSI 1 MSI 4 ALUM 1 2 21 18 11 Jumper TLANI4R X106 1 2 3 X105 1 2 3 ...

Page 411: ...terfaces Process settings for the analog trunk interface is via X105 and X106 jumpers Loop start setting pins 1 2 closed default Ground start setting Pins 2 3 closed MW8 jack X5 pin ALUM 1 2 5 54 b ALUM1 Subsc line module connection 55 a 6 64 b ALUM2 Subsc line module connection 65 a 7 74 b ALUM1 Analog telephone connection 75 a 8 84 b ALUM2 Analog telephone connection 85 a Table 3 133 TLANI4R Con...

Page 412: ...ound Start not with IM and BRA or Loop Start for HiPath 3800 The ground start function is only used in the U S and Canada The interfaces for the analog trunk connection support the CLIP feature Pulse dialing and multi frequency dialing Call detail recording with TMANI The interfaces for the analog trunk connection support call detail recording with 12 kHz and 16 kHz pulses Call detail recording is...

Page 413: ...s Silent Reversal ÜFS direct inward dialing The Austrian direct inward dialing system ÜFS is not supported Installation instructions in the U S and Canada According to U S and Canadian installation instructions analog trunks must be connected over fuse elements in compliance with UL 497A or CSA C22 2 No 226 Front panel LEDs An additional shielding panel is not required on the front side of this bo...

Page 414: ... connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors Table 3 138 Table 3 134 TMANI8 LED States Red LED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Lo...

Page 415: ...u 1 1a Port 1 1a blu wht 23 1b 1b 2 wht ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk blu 24...

Page 416: ...tation boards fm Peripheral boards Table 3 136 TMANI8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TMANI8 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 Free 5 10 4 Free 5 11 4 Free 5 12 4 Free 5 13 4 Free 5 14 4 Free 5 15 4 Free 5 16 4 Free 5 17 4 Free 5 ...

Page 417: ...ce documentation 3 285 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 136 TMANI8 Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TMANI8 Notes No Pin ...

Page 418: ...Assignment with CHAMP Jack for U S only CHAMP jack TMANI8 Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free 40 16 Free 41 ...

Page 419: ...wht blu 19 1a Port 1 1a 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free brn re...

Page 420: ...d start or loop start trunks with the HiPath 3800 Front panel NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 99 TMC16 for selected countries only S30810 Q2485 X Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mount...

Page 421: ...Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er rors de...

Page 422: ...Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 9a Port 9 9a brn red 18 9b 9b 10 red gry 19 10a Port 10 10a gry red 20 10b 10b 11 blk blu 24 11a Port 11 11a blu blk 25 11b 11b 12 blk ora 26 12a Por...

Page 423: ... A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 291 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 ...

Page 424: ...2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 9a 9 Ring Port 9 34 9b 9 TIP 10 10a 10 Ring Port 10 35 10b 10 TIP 11 11a 11 Ring Port 11 36 11b 11 TIP 12 12a 12 Ring Port 12 37 12b 12 TIP 13 13a 13 Ring Port 13 38 13b 13 TIP 14 1...

Page 425: ... wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 9a Port 9 9a 4 brn red 31 9b 9b 5 10 red gry 02 10a Port 10 10a 4 gry red 22 10b 10b 5 ...

Page 426: ...pport the country specific CAS protocol The board converts the Euro ISDN protocol on an S2M link into the Channel Associated Sig naling CAS protocol The board functions only in connection with a TS2N HiPath 3550 There is no direct connection between the TMCAS board and the system s central control unit The TMS2 TS2N handles all signaling and data traffic NOTE Danger of damage to property due to su...

Page 427: ...e the C39195 Z7267 C13 cable for the connection between jack X10 and the ser vice PC Switches S4 1 to S4 4 for setting the impedance To ensure that the TMCAS works properly the same impedance must be selected both on the S2M side of the TMCAS and on the TS2N HiPath 3550 board Figure 3 100 TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Impedance on the CAS Side Switch settings S4 1 S4 2 120 ohms default Off Off Off default ...

Page 428: ...n On On Impedance on the S2M Side Switches S4 3 S4 4 120 ohms default Off Off 100 ohms On Off 75 ohms Off On No function On On Switches Function S4 5 Reserved S4 6 Flash memory only for laboratory purposes the flash memory is erased when switch is set to On S4 7 Reserved S4 8 Battery Select the On switch position to make the connection to the processor s real time clock only after the protocol con...

Page 429: ...endations for the GND connection symmetrical line 120 ohms Ground the cable s shield on the side of the connected device NT MUX modem coaxial line 75 ohms Do not ground the shield on both ends of the cable Tx Ground the cable s shield on the TMCAS side Rx Ground the cable s shield on the side of the connected device NT MUX modem GND connection Jumper setting no signal ground default S2 1 2 S3 1 2 ...

Page 430: ...120 ohms Table 3 143 TMCAS Seven Segment Display H1 Display Meaning Waiting for the TMCAS software download TMCAS software download start TMCAS software download Writing the TMCAS software extender software into the flash memory Loading the TMCAS software extender software from the flash memory Waiting for ECGM command 10 s Calculating the checksum No TMCAS software in the flash memory waiting for...

Page 431: ... T transmit red 26 b wire R transmit blk Table 3 145 Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195 A9700 B514 SU connector Xx8 pin Function Wire 2 a wire T receive BNC shield cable 1 22 b wire R receive BNC signal cable 1 6 a wire T transmit BNC shield cable 2 26 b wire R transmit BNC signal cable 2 Table 3 144 Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195 A9700 B512 SU connector Xx8 pin Function Color code ...

Page 432: ...ary configure with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Possible problems TMCAS not entered in HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E The TMCAS is displayed automatically after the generation regeneration of the database in a system with a correctly inserted and connected TMCAS TMS2 TS2N combination Missing electrical connection between TMS2 TS2N and TMCAS No TMCAS entry in the database If a correctly configured databa...

Page 433: ...ownload server for information on this contact your local ITSC and copy the following files into the directory c ecginst e1v0xx exe for example e140ah exe Ee1v0yy exe for example Ee140am exe Ecgm_vzz exe for example Ecgm_4aa exe Explanation of the variables v software version xx country version of a file yy file version for channels zz file version for maintenance 3 Run exe files This will extract...

Page 434: ...ool and then restart ecgm exe 9 Enter the COM interface under COMM and the customer name in the Set tings ECG Name menu All other windows are updated automatically 10 Channel configuration Define the channel parameters in the View Database menu reserve unused channels with Out of Service Protocol Signaling method incoming and outgoing Clock master always central office Operator number corresponds ...

Page 435: ...hms and symmetrical trunks 120 ohms can be connected to the 15 pin sub D jacks on the card TMCAS 2 functions as a converter which converts the Euro ISDN protocol on an S2M link to the Channel Associated Signaling CAS protocol In contrast to the predecessor PBXXX card TMCAS 2 communicates directly with the central control in the system All signaling and data traffic goes through TMCAS 2 Unlike PBXX...

Page 436: ...th 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 304 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards Figure 3 101 TMCAS 2 S30810 Q2946 X for selected countries only Figure ...

Page 437: ...rds for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards Interfaces and Jumpers Figure 3 102 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Interfaces and Jumpers 1 X11 X21 X13 3 2 1 X12 X20 Modem optional X909 CAS inter face 1 X910 CAS inter face 2 X803 V 24 inter face X804 Ethernet 10 100BaseT inter face X14 X999 3 2 1 X16 3 2 1 X17 X24 1 2 3 1 2 3 X25 ...

Page 438: ...erformed default setting X17 Hardware watchdog Watchdog active default setting Watchdog not active X24 Sets trunk impedance for CAS interface 1 75 ohms default setting 120 ohms X25 Sets trunk impedance for CAS interface 2 75 ohms default setting 120 ohms X999 Grounding card CAS cable Grounding for the card is connected to the ground ing for the CAS cable Grounding for the card is not connected to ...

Page 439: ...nt side of this board because the EMC shield is already provided by the front panel Figure 3 103 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Front Panel X803 9 pin MINI DIN jack V 24 interface Seven segment display X909 15 pin Sub D jack CAS interface 1 X910 15 pin Sub D jack CAS interface 2 X804 RJ45 jack Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface Two LEDs indicate the current interface status Yellow LED transmittin...

Page 440: ...re Downloading DSP Digital Signal Processor firmware Downloading FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array firmware Accessing flash EPROM Save and Delete Activating built in self test BIST BIST1 or BIST2 Administration Service PC connected Copying software from SDRAM to FEPROM U boot Firmware Power supply unit switched on Linux operating system Initializing U boot Firmware CAS application software The de...

Page 441: ...oot firmware operational decimal point flashing Table 3 149 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Linux Operating System States Display Meaning Linux kernel boot User space boot Check and mount flash Error found mounted file system rebuild reboot Mounting flash file system Error mounting flash flashing display Configuring network interface Loading real time kernel modules Loading board specific modu...

Page 442: ...rd for the TMCAS 2 card which is plugged into the X20 and X21 ports This facilitates remote administration of the CAS proto col converter on the TMCAS 2 card see Page 3 311 Figure 3 104 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only CAS Application Software States Figure 3 105 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Optional Modem Interface 1 ISDN active Interface 2 ISDN active Interface 1 CAS active Interface 2...

Page 443: ...ace RJ45 jack X804 Via the optional analog modem S30122 X8004 X22 In this case you will need to estab lish a connection from the analog modem to a free port on an analog subscriber line mod ule Use a connection cable open end cable 24 DA for the connection Backplane TM CAS 2 Main distribution frame Patch panel Use S30267 Z196 A150 15 m in length S30267 Z196 A250 25 m in length blue in Figure 3 106...

Page 444: ...0 m Table 3 150 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Assignment of the CAS Cable S30267 Z167 A100 15 pin Sub D connector Pin Function Color code 9 a wire T transmit wht blu 1 b wire R transmit blu wht 15 a wire T receive wht ora 8 b wire R receive ora wht Table 3 151 TMCAS 2 for selected countries only Assignment of the CAS Cable C39195 A7700 B14 Wire Function 15 pin Sub D con nector Pin BNC connec...

Page 445: ...lly block the selected trunk circuit LED statuses and their meanings NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion The peripheral board slots on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connec tors Since the TMDID board has SIVAPAC connector strips you will have to install a ...

Page 446: ... panels with CHAMP jack Table 3 154 For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors Table 3 155 Figure 3 108 TMDID for U S only S30810 Q2452 X Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 1 5 3 LEDs green for displaying the trunk status Trunk circuit 0 Trunk circuit 1 Trunk circ...

Page 447: ...ht blu 1 1a Port 1 1a blu wht 23 1b 1b 2 wht ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk b...

Page 448: ...nector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack CHAMP jack TMDID Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free 40 16 Free 41 ...

Page 449: ... 1 1 wht blu 19 1a Port 1 1a 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn 11 Free b...

Page 450: ...ovides direct inward dialing from the central office CO to HiPath 3800 V6 0 SMR 10 or later The board has eight trunk circuits that connect to analog trunks The board supports the proto cols Wink Start Delay Dial and Immediate Start NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion...

Page 451: ... Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards Front panel Figure 3 110 TMDID2 for selected countries only LEDs on the Front Panel To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 1 5 3 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 452: ...ED Green LED Status Action Off Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deact...

Page 453: ... blu wht 23 1b 1b 2 wht ora 3 2a Port 2 2a ora wht 4 2b 2b 3 wht grn 5 3a Port 3 3a grn wht 6 3b 3b 4 wht brn 7 4a Port 4 4a brn wht 8 4b 4b 5 wht gry 9 5a Port 5 5a gry wht 10 5b 5b 6 red blu 11 6a Port 6 6a blu red 12 6b 6b 7 red ora 13 7a Port 7 7a ora red 14 7b 7b 8 red grn 15 8a Port 8 8a grn red 16 8b 8b 9 red brn 17 Free brn red 18 10 red gry 19 Free gry red 20 11 blk blu 24 Free blu blk 25...

Page 454: ...r HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 322 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 3 ...

Page 455: ...ath 3000 Peripheral boards Table 3 158 TMDID2 for selected countries only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TMDID2 Notes No Pin 1 4 1a 5 1b 2 4 2a 5 2b 3 4 3a 5 3b 4 4 4a 5 4b 5 4 5a 5 5b 6 4 6a 5 6b 7 4 7a 5 7b 8 4 8a 5 8b 9 4 Free 5 10 4 Free 5 11 4 Free 5 12 4 Free 5 13 4 Free 5 14 4 Free 5 15 4 Free 5 16 4 Free 5 ...

Page 456: ...324 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards 17 4 Free 5 18 4 Free 5 19 4 Free 5 20 4 Free 5 21 4 Free 5 22 4 Free 5 23 4 Free 5 24 4 Free 5 Table 3 158 TMDID2 for selected countries only Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks RJ45 jack TMDID2 Notes No Pin ...

Page 457: ...nnector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jacks for U S only CHAMP jack TMDID2 Notes 1 1a 1 Ring Port 1 26 1b 1 TIP 2 2a 2 Ring Port 2 27 2b 2 TIP 3 3a 3 Ring Port 3 28 3b 3 TIP 4 4a 4 Ring Port 4 29 4b 4 TIP 5 5a 5 Ring Port 5 30 5b 5 TIP 6 6a 6 Ring Port 6 31 6b 6 TIP 7 7a 7 Ring Port 7 32 7b 7 TIP 8 8a 8 Ring Port 8 33 8b 8 TIP 9 Free 34 10 Free 35 11 Free 36 12 Free 37 13 Free 38 14 Free 39 15 Free ...

Page 458: ... pin Notes 1 1 wht blu 19 1a Port 1 1a 4 blu wht 39 1b 1b 5 2 wht ora 38 2a Port 2 2a 4 ora wht 48 2b 2b 5 3 wht grn 27 3a Port 3 3a 4 grn wht 47 3b 3b 5 4 wht brn 16 4a Port 4 4a 4 brn wht 46 4b 4b 5 5 wht gry 05 5a Port 5 5a 4 gry wht 45 5b 5b 5 2 6 red blu 14 6a Port 6 6a 4 blu red 44 6b 6b 5 7 red ora 23 7a Port 7 7a 4 ora red 43 7b 7b 5 8 red grn 32 8a Port 8 8a 4 grn red 42 8b 8b 5 9 red brn...

Page 459: ...lacing a HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 system with a HiPath 3800 system 1 Switch customer specific E M networking to interface type 1A or 5 on the TMEW2 board Immediate Start Wink Start or Delay Dial protocols 2 If option 1 is not possible for technical reasons HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 remains active as the E M gateway Create a TDM network with the CorNet protocol between the HiPath 3750 or HiPath ...

Page 460: ...Protocol settings TMEW2 supports interface types 1A and 5 Interface types 1A and 5 are identical Before starting up the tie trunk you must ensure that the two participating systems support the specified interface types The following signaling protocols are supported Delay Dial protocol Wink Start protocol This is the most widely used protocol internationally Immediate Start protocol Figure 3 111 E...

Page 461: ...ng Immediate Start protocol Interface type 1A or 5 is used in all cases SIVAPAC connector assignment on the backplane with tie trunk traffic via interface type 1A or 5 is shown in Table 3 162 Connecting the Genius announcement device The TMEW2 board may be installed on interface type 2 for connecting the Genius announce ment device Use HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E to configure the settings for the G...

Page 462: ... V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards Front panel Figure 3 113 TMEW2 Front Panel S30810 Q2292 X100 To ensure sufficient shielding provide the board with a shielding panel For informa tion on mounting the shielding panel see Section 4 1 5 3 Two LEDs indicating the board status LED red LED green ...

Page 463: ...f Off Board not receiving power or not plugged in correctly Board is out of order Check plug contact on board On Off Board is receiving power and board test is in progress Board is defective if status remains un changed board test unsuccessful Replace board Loadware loading not successfully com pleted Board is faulty Replace board Error detected on board Board is deactivated not applicable to er r...

Page 464: ...n 7 1ka Port 4 4a Ring Transmit brn wht 8 1kb 4b Tip 5 wht gry 9 1ga Port 1 5a Ring Receive gry wht 10 1gb 5b Tip 6 red blu 11 1ga Port 2 6a Ring Receive blu red 12 1gb 6b Tip 7 red ora 13 1ga Port 3 7a Ring Receive ora red 14 1gb 7b Tip 8 red grn 15 1ga Port 4 8a Ring Receive grn red 16 1gb 8b Tip 9 red brn 17 1E Port 1 9a Ear brn red 18 1M 9b Mouth 10 red gry 19 1E Port 2 10a Ear gry red 20 1M 1...

Page 465: ... 1kb 3b Tip 4 wht brn 7 1ka Port 4 4a Ring Transmit brn wht 8 1kb 4b Tip 5 wht gry 9 1ga Port 1 5a no answer gry wht 10 1gb 5b 6 red blu 11 1ga Port 2 6a no answer blu red 12 1gb 6b 7 red ora 13 1ga Port 3 7a no answer ora red 14 1gb 7b 8 red grn 15 1ga Port 4 8a no answer grn red 16 1gb 8b 9 red brn 17 1E Port 1 9a Ear brn red 18 1M 9b System ground 10 red gry 19 1E Port 2 10a Ear gry red 20 1M 1...

Page 466: ...property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion 7 Warning You must disconnect the power and remove the slip on connectors from the TMGL4 board before removing it from the system Do not connect the slip on connectors to the TMGL4 board until the board is seated in its slot and the system power is on Failu...

Page 467: ...Pinouts shown are at the board itself The main distribution frame cable MDF cable supplied reverses the signal order before the MDF Table 3 164 TMGL4 for U S only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X2 Port 1 b wire ring trunk 1 1 2 a wire tip trunk 1 3 b wire ring trunk 2 2 4 a wire tip trunk 2 5 b wire ring trunk 3 3 6 a wire tip trunk 3 7 b wire ring trunk 4 4 8 a wire tip trunk 4 ...

Page 468: ...nd HiPath 3300 Ground start is the default Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 115 TMGL4R for U S only S30810 K2918 Z If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2 TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4 6 or 8 slots 6 and 8 are not available with HiPath ...

Page 469: ...ent Table 3 165 TMGL4R for U S only Contact Assignment Port X3 Pin To GEE X4 Pin To trunks 1 4 X5 Pin To ANI4R Signal 1 3 12 3 b wire ring trunk 1 2 13 2 a wire tip trunk 1 2 5 22 5 b wire ring trunk 2 4 23 4 a wire tip trunk 2 3 7 32 7 b wire ring trunk 3 6 33 6 a wire tip trunk 3 4 9 42 9 b wire ring trunk 4 8 43 8 a wire tip trunk 4 10 10 Call charging module assignment GMZ ...

Page 470: ...HiPath 3350 The TMQ4 board provides basic rate interface BRI ISDN via a U2B1Q interface The interface supports the following central office protocols AT T 5Ess NI 1 AT T 5ESS Custom Nortel DMS100 NI 1 Siemens EWSD NI 1 Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Fi...

Page 471: ...n are at the board itself The main distribution frame cable MDF cable supplied reverses the signal order before the MDF Table 3 166 TMQ4 for U S only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X2 Port Contact Connector X2 Port 1 b wire ring trunk 1 1 5 b wire ring trunk 3 3 2 a wire tip trunk 1 6 a wire tip trunk 3 3 b wire ring trunk 2 2 7 b wire ring trunk 4 4 4 a wire tip trunk 2 8 a wire tip trunk 4...

Page 472: ...ng S30810 K2919 Z for use in the HiPath 3500 19 inch housing The board can also be used for the following layer 1 operating modes Super Frame SF Extended Super Frame ESF Board usage is subject to the following restrictions Only one TST1 board allowed primary multiplex access For slot 7 or 9 only Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame MDF the TST1 connects to a channel service unit CSU...

Page 473: ...06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 341 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Peripheral boards Interfaces Figure 3 117 TST1 for U S only S30810 Q2919 X S30810 K2919 Z X1 50 1 To CUC CUCR TST1 To CO X2 1 8 ...

Page 474: ...00 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Peripheral boards Contact assignment Table 3 167 TST1 for U S only Contact Assignment Contact X2 Contact X2 1 b wire ring receive 5 a wire tip transmit 2 a wire tip receive 6 not connected 3 not connected 7 not connected 4 b wire ring transmit 8 not connected ...

Page 475: ...300 Figure 3 118 for use in HiPath 3550 wall housing TS2R Trunk Module S2M Rack S30810 K2913 Z300 Figure 3 119 for use in Hi Path 3500 19 inch housing Board usage is subject to the following restrictions Only one TS2N TS2R board allowed primary multiplex access For slot 7 or 9 only To support country specific CAS protocols you can use the Euro ISDN CAS gateway ECG The ECG cabinet is a protocol con...

Page 476: ...For HiPath 3000 V1 0 and later you can also use the new TMCAS board to support country specific CAS protocols TS2N interfaces old TS2 TS2R interfaces Figure 3 118 TS2N not for U S Interfaces S30810 Q2913 X100 X300 Figure 3 119 TS2R not for U S Interfaces S30810 K2913 Z100 Z300 X1 50 2 X2 8 1 To CUC TS2N S2M interface Wieland termi nal symm line X5 1 MW8 RJ48C jack MW line X1 50 2 To CUCR TS2R X5 1...

Page 477: ...proper operation Connect the cable to the X2 using an 8 pin Wieland terminal TS2N only MW line MW8 RJ48C jack The shielded 8 pin MW8 RJ48C jack X5 is provided for connecting MW lines The maxi mum cable length approx 100 m depends on the quality of the cable used and its signal attenuation Table 3 168 Contact Assignments for X2 Connector Contact X2 TS2N only 1 48V NT1 feeding max 15 W 2 0 V NT1 fee...

Page 478: ...for this voltage which the system feeds over the CUC TS2R board The NT1 power supply must come from an S30122 X7321 X S30122 X7321 X100 with UPS operation power supply unit Figure 3 120 S2M trunk connection 7 Caution There should be absolutely no ground connection between the HiPath 3550 wall housing and the NT Do not connect the shield of the connection cable you are using either on the HiPath 35...

Page 479: ...converter S30122 X7357 X Cable 1 Patch cable MW8 RJ48C 10 m C39195 Z7208 A100 Cable 2 2 units coaxial adapter cable 30 cm S30267 Z354 A3 TS2N TS2R upgrade kit for Portugal L30252 U600 A190 containing the following Cable 3 2 units Mini coaxial cable 10 cm S30267 Z353 A1 Figure 3 121 S2M NT Connections for Spain and Portugal Cable 1 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 NT Public network Interface con verter Cabl...

Page 480: ...ntary equipment such as group 3 fax machines and entrance telephone adapters Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 122 4SLA not for U S 8SLA Interfaces S30810 Q2923 X200 X100 Table 3 170 4SLA not for U S 8SLA Contact Assignments Contact X2 T R ports ...

Page 481: ...R ports 1 to 4 X3 T R ports 5 to 8 X4 T R ports 9 to 12 X5 T Rports13 16 1 a 1 a 5 a 9 a 13 2 b 1 b 5 b 9 b 13 3 a 2 a 6 a 1 a 14 4 b 2 b 6 b 10 b 14 5 a 3 a 7 a 11 a 15 6 b 3 b 7 b 11 b 15 7 a 4 a 8 a 12 a 16 8 b 4 b 8 b 12 b 16 Table 3 170 4SLA not for U S 8SLA Contact Assignments Contact X2 T R ports 1 to 4 X3 T R ports 5 to 8 T R ports 1 4 Stns 1 to 4 T R ports 5 8 Stns 5 to 8 X1 50 2 X2 X3 16...

Page 482: ...e menu settings Set up station Station Param Flags Technical connection conditions Maximum supply current approximately 34 mA maximum supply voltage approximately 40 V DC Ring voltage against negative supply voltage a wire tip RING two telephones maxi mum Range see Section 2 7 Loop current detection 10 mA Ground button detection 20 mA The transmission technology is set according to the specific co...

Page 483: ...nd TFE adapters in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch housing Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 124 8SLAR Interfaces S30810 K2925 Z Table 3 172 8SLAR Contact Assignments RJ45 jack X2 Pin T R ports 1 4 MW8 jack X2 Pin T R ports 5 8 1 14 a 1 5 54 ...

Page 484: ...DC Ring voltage against negative supply voltage a wire tip RING two telephones maxi mum Range see Section 2 7 Loop current detection 10 mA Ground button detection 20 mA The transmission technology is set according to the specific country through the respec tively entered country code for country initialization see Chapter 5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 4 44 a 4 8 84 a 8 45 b 4 85 b 8 Table 3 172 8SLAR ...

Page 485: ... internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options 3 4 Options Abbreviations for colors The tables in this section use abbreviations to denote the colors of connector assignments The abbreviations used are as follows wh white rd red bn brown gr gray gn green bk black ye yellow bu blue or orange vi violet ...

Page 486: ...od of the connected telephones should be the same as that on the trunk line otherwise signaling will not be possi ble When the system is deactivated or if an error occurs the trunk lines are connected directly to the telephones When normal operation is resumed the transfer represented in the figure be low takes place ALUM4 module function NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The ...

Page 487: ...nts not for U S Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X6 1 R1 from trunk 1a AE1 to Stn 1a AT1 to TLA a 2 T1 from trunk 1b BE1 to Stn 1b BT1 to TLA b 3 R2 from trunk 2a AE2 to Stn 2a AT2 to TLA a 4 T2 from trunk 2b BE2 to Stn 2b BT2 to TLA b 5 R3 from trunk 3a AE3 to Stn 3a AT3 to TLA a 6 T3 from trunk 3b BE3 to Stn 3b BT3 to TLA b 7 R4 from trunk 4a AE4 to Stn 4a AT4 to TLA a 8 T4 from trunk...

Page 488: ...ort 4 2 T from trunk 1 T to station 1 2 R to TMGL4 port 1 10 R to analog port 4 3 R from trunk 2 R to station 2 3 T to TMGL4 port 2 11 T to analog port 3 4 T from trunk 2 T to station 2 4 R to TMGL4 port 2 12 R to analog port 3 5 R from trunk 3 R to station 3 5 T to TMGL4 port 3 13 T to analog port 2 6 T from trunk 3 T to station 3 6 R to TMGL4 port 3 14 R to analog port 2 7 R from trunk 4 R to st...

Page 489: ... internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options ALUM module block diagram Figure 3 127 ALUM4 Basic Structure K1 B HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 K2 B R1 T1 Relay K1 C K2 C AE1 BE1 Relay Trunk board Subscriber line module Connector X6 TB1 TA1 AT1 R1 BT1 T1 Connector X3 Trunk ALUM Connector X4 Analog telephone ...

Page 490: ...ure 3 128 AMOM Connection to DIUN2 DIU2U and DIUT2 AMOM variant Wave length Op fiber cable Cable length km Cable attenua tion dB km Maximum at tenuation1 dB 1 Maximum optical attenuation in an AMOM to AMOM connection a reserve of 4 dB attenuation must be included for ageing and splicing S30807 K5480 X100 850 820 nm multimode 50 µm 62 5 µm 2 5 3 3 3 5 11 5 14 5 S30807 K5480 X200 1300 nm multimode 5...

Page 491: ...Signal description Direction 4 LWLO0_FRONT Data output on the optical fiber in terface Input 5 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 6 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Output 7 SCAN_IN0 Adapter test Output 10 5 V 5 V power supply Input 11 LWLI0_FRONT Data input on the optical fiber inter face front Output 12 GND Ground return path for the 5 V power supply Input output 14 5 V 5 V power ...

Page 492: ...ardware interfaces TMGL4 as well as a trunk and options bus interface The trunks are transferred directly on the board between the trunk and the trunk board interfaces Interfaces on the ANI4 module LED statuses and their meanings On the ANI4 board two LEDs are implemented that show the status of trunk channel 1 After system startup the green LED is on and the red LED is off This signals that the l...

Page 493: ...e signal the Mitel chip on ANI4 shows no reaction Call service provider and ask if feature is available If so the signal that appears on the customer side is too low not Bellcore compliant This must be corrected by the service provider The LED or the microcontroller is defective Replace ANI4 board The system has not yet started Start up system On but glowing weakly The Mitel chip interprets the si...

Page 494: ...orrected by the service provider Off Checksum is OK Table 3 177 ANI4 for selected countries only Contact Assignments Contact Connector X3 Component Side Connector X3 Solder Side Connector X4 1 Not assigned a wire tip trunk 1 2 b wire ring trunk 1 b wire ring trunk 1 3 a wire tip trunk 1 a wire tip trunk 2 4 b wire ring trunk 2 b wire ring trunk 2 5 a wire tip trunk 2 a wire tip trunk 3 6 b wire ri...

Page 495: ...m 4 Connect the OPAL adapter cable to the ANI4 board 5 Use the ribbon cable supplied to connect ANI4 and TMGL4 The colored marking pin 1 on both cable ends must face upwards Figure 3 130 Fig 2 6 Connect the trunk slip on connectors to the ANI4 Figure 3 130 Fig 3 7 Restart the system by reconnecting the power plug 7 Caution Remove the trunk slip on connectors from the TMGL4 board before starting to...

Page 496: ...nalyzed in addition to the call number and shown on the telephone display Each ANI4R module can serve four trunks It contains the external trunk board hardware inter faces TMGL4R and the options bus interface Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion If ANI4R is ...

Page 497: ...h 3000 Options Contact assignment Table 3 178 ANI4R for selected countries only Contact Assignment X3 Pin Signal X3 Pin Signal 1 6 a wire tip trunk 3 2 a wire tip trunk 1 7 b wire ring trunk 3 3 b wire ring trunk 1 8 a wire tip trunk 4 4 a wire tip trunk 2 9 b wire ring trunk 4 5 b wire ring trunk 2 10 Call charging module assignment GMZ ...

Page 498: ... 3800 IVMP8 not for U S and IVMP8R not for U S HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 IVMS8 IVMS8R HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact startup and administration see the manual for the product Table 3 179 Announcement and Music Modules Module Board Part number Use EXM S30817 Q902 B401 Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 wall hous ing see Figure 3 ...

Page 499: ...announcement function Telroth Modules MUSIC plug in module internal music on hold L30250 U600 A337 CUA337 S30122 K7275 T Use in all HiPath 3000 systems The module is plugged directly on the central con trol board CBCC CBRC X19 and X20 of HiPath 3550 3350 and HiPath 3500 3300 Sound Player eMusic L30251 U600 A722 DUA722 S30122 X8005 X8 Connection via analog interface or via 3 5 mm jack plug at an EX...

Page 500: ...3350 Wall Housing Figure 3 133 EXMR connection to HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Figure 3 134 EXMR Connection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Cable duct Slot for EXM module Direct connection of the ex ternal music source X1 X2 Note A cable binder has been provided in the cable duct for suitable strain relief of the connecting cable EXMR component side Front panel of the system Cinch jack X1 X2 Cable C...

Page 501: ...V9 Service documentation 3 369 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options Installing the EXMR S30122 K7403 T on the CBRC S30810 K2935 Z401 The installation of the EXMR on the CBRC is described in Section 4 2 4 13 Installing the EXMR on the CBRC ...

Page 502: ... recorded messages You can create up to 24 standard mailboxes and up to four of these can be configured as Auto Attendant mailboxes attendant mailboxes with automatic call acceptance greeting with routing options day and night mode speed dialing Information on administering HiPath Entry Voice Mail for HiPath 3000 can be found in the Hi Path 3000 5000 Manager E Help 7 Caution The EVM subboard must ...

Page 503: ...s Individual announcements in the case of upgrades In the case of a Fast Upgrade i e within a release the individual announcements and mes sages are retained In the case of an upgrade from HiPath 3000 V7 to V8 these announce ments and messages are deleted Figure 3 135 EVM S30807 Q6945 X Interfaces Spacing bolts X2 26 pin socket strip X1 not used for HiPath 3000 ...

Page 504: ...ibbon ca ble Ribbon cable connected External music Ribbon cable not connected Internal music Expert mode code 22 11 allows you to choose between music on music off ring tone or music on unscreened transfer If the EXMNA module is connected you must select Music on using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E The module is operational as soon as it is plugged in Interfaces Figure 3 136 EXMNA for ...

Page 505: ...für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options Contact assignment Table 3 180 EXMNA for U S only Contact Assignments Contact Connector X1 Connector X2 1 GND Input 2 Not assigned Input 3 Not assigned Not assigned 4 EXMCL Not assigned 5 EXMDIR 6 HRES 7 EXMD 8 EXMDET 9 5 V 10 Not assigned ...

Page 506: ...and HiPath 3350 The call charge detection channel is looped in the trunk and then routed to the TLA Interfaces NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Table 3 181 GEE12 GEE16 GEE50 not for U S Modules Module Frequency Remarks GEE 12 12 kHz also for Silent Reversal GEE 16 ...

Page 507: ...2 GEE16 GEE50 not for U S Contact Assignments Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 Connector X5 1 a GND CO 1 AL1 0V 2 b CO 1 BN 1 CO 1 BL1 0V 3 a CO 1 AN 1 CO 2 AL2 RTS 4 b CO 2 BN 2 CO 2 BL2 CTS 5 a CO 2 AN 2 CO 3 AL3 RXD 6 b CO 3 BN 3 CO 3 BL3 TXD 7 a CO 3 AN 3 CO 4 AL4 0V 8 b CO 4 BN 4 CO 4 BL4 5V 9 a CO 4 AN 4 0V 10 Call charging module as signment 5V for GEE 50 in France otherwise free ...

Page 508: ...eMail system The software load diagnostic button is for software loads for example loading a specific language The digital station connector connects the HOPE board to the corresponding digital ports using a modular cable The HOPE board does not identify itself to the system and is therefore not visible in the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E card map When expanding a system such as Hi Path 3350 or HiPa...

Page 509: ...the Office PhoneMail system on and off The PCMCIA slot is for Office PhoneMail software cards for example voice cards The card ejector ejects the software cards from the PMCIA slot Installation servicing and connectivity For information on installing connecting and servicing the HOPE board refer to the Hicom Of fice PhoneMail Entry Installation and System Administration Guide ...

Page 510: ...ral board to the first optional board comes in two ver sions OPAL Options Adapter Cable Long C39195 A7001 B130 Figure 3 140 for use in Hi Path 3550 and HiPath 3350 wall housing OPALR Options Adapter Cable Long Rack C39195 A7001 B142 Figure 3 141 for use in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19 inch housing OPAL interfaces Figure 3 140 OPAL C39195 A7001 B130 CBCC CBCP interface Option board con nection Ri...

Page 511: ...0 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 379 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options OPALR interface Figure 3 141 OPALR C39195 A7001 B142 CBRC interface Option board connection ...

Page 512: ...ks can be transferred ALUM to designated analog telephones These are 1 analog trunk with a PFT1 Power Failure Tranfer board 4 analog trunks with a PFT4 board When using an analog telephone for outgoing calls you may need to adapt its signaling method to match the signaling method of the connected trunk ALUM using PFT1 PFT4 Figure 3 142 ALUM Using PFT1 PFT4 not for U S R E L A I S TMB TMA SMA SMB T...

Page 513: ...ds for HiPath 3000 Options Installation location of the PFT1 and PFT4 board MDFU MDFU E Wire PFT1 or PFT4 into the MDFU or MDFU E The boards require 48 V For the assignments of both boards see Figure 3 144 Figure 3 143 Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 MDFU MDFU E not for U S 2 x PFT1 or 1 x PFT4 System side Line network ...

Page 514: ...signment Figure 3 144 PFT1 S30777 Q539 X and PFT4 S30777 Q540 X Board Assignment X3 X4 X1 X2 10 1 10 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 1 10 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B 10 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B PFT 48 X1 10 1 SMB A SLA SLB SMA TMB TMA B PFT 48 TMA TMB Trunk circuit A B a b Telephone company SMA SMB SLA board SLA SLB Analog telephone PFT1 PFT4 ...

Page 515: ...nt of a power failure or a system restart or reload an analog trunk is transferred from the system to an analog telephone If the power supply voltage returns after an inter ruption and a trunk call is in progress activation of the trunk failure transfer relay is pre vented by optocoupler Default HiPath 3800 is in normal mode PFTALa b trunk is connected to PFTASa b trunk module PFTTLa b terminal is...

Page 516: ... resistor are available for external applications The voltage is picked up by the MDFU E Table 3 183 M48VF1 0V_F and M48VF2 0V_F Each trunk has a maximum load capacity of 300 mA Figure 3 145 REALS S30807 Q6629 X To the SIPAC 4SU connector X17 Signals are picked up via SIVAPAC con nector X116 on the backplane Removal tab You can insert a screwdriver here to remove REALS from the shelf ...

Page 517: ...e until you hear a click see Figure 4 21 The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws see Figure 3 146 Cable and connector assignment Table 3 183 shows the assignment of the SIVAPAC connector X116 on the backplane and the assignment of the jumper strip in the MDFU...

Page 518: ... 2b 3 wht grn 16 0 V 3a grn wht 15 3b 4 wht brn 14 0V_F 4a brn wht 13 M48VF2 4b 48 V max 300 mA 5 wht gry 12 5a gry wht 11 0 V 5b 6 red blu 10 AK1 6a Relay 1 Normally open contact blu red 9 AK2 6b Relay 2 Normally open contact 7 red ora 8 AK3 7a Relay 3 Normally open contact ora red 7 AK4 7b Relay 4 Normally open contact 8 red grn 6 0 V 8a grn red 5 PFTASa 8b ALUM Trunk module 9 red brn 4 PFTASb 9...

Page 519: ...yel 55 18b 19 yel brn 54 19a brn yel 53 S3 19b 20 yel gry 52 S4 20a gry yel 51 0 V 20b 21 vio blu 50 UK1 21a Relay 1 Switch contact blu vio 49 UK2 21b Relay 2 Switch contact 22 vio ora 48 UK3 22a Relay 3 Switch contact ora vio 47 UK4 22b Relay 4 Switch contact 23 vio grn 46 0 V 23a grn vio 45 23b 24 vio brn 44 24a brn vio 43 S6 24b 1 see Abbreviations for colors at the start of Section 3 4 Table 3...

Page 520: ... options bus lines are needed The slot X3 wiring is polarized The STBG4 channel is looped between TLA and the trunk NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage The required lightning protec tion measures must be taken for this board see Section 2 1 2 Lightning Protec tion Figure 3 147 STBG4 for France only Interfaces S30817 Q934 A Table 3 184 STBG4 for France only Contact Assignment Con...

Page 521: ...7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 3 389 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Boards for HiPath 3000 Options 9 On 4 10 Not used Table 3 184 STBG4 for France only Contact Assignment Contact Connector X3 Connector X4 ...

Page 522: ...a total of four outputs in the form of two floating switch contacts each and four control inputs in the form of optocouplers for externally activating an electrically isolated nor mally open NO contact Example You can route the 12 V signal for power failure alert to the control input of the op tocoupler for connector X4 or X6 Route the signal through a normally open NO contact that is electrically...

Page 523: ...erfaces S30817 Q932 A Figure 3 149 STRBR Interfaces S30817 Q932 Z 7 Warning The STRB or STRBR interface is an SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Circuit inter face as defined by IEC 60950 Do not connect any circuits whose voltages exceed the following limit values Maximum 30 VAC 42 V peak or 60 VDC CBCC CBCP side Board side STRB X1 X2 X3 X4 1 8 1 8 X5 X6 8 1 8 1 MDF CBRC side Board side STRBR X1 X2 8 p...

Page 524: ...Path 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Options STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions Figure 3 150 STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions STRB or STRBR K1 21 K1 22 K1 23 K1 11 K1 12 K1 13 Relay 12 VI 12 V OPTKP1 To system Short the wires to activate the sensor Sensor ...

Page 525: ...2 common 3 K 1 22 Relay contact K1 2 NO 4 K 1 23 Relay contact K1 2 NC 5 12VI 12 V control voltage optocoupler 6 OPTKP 2 Control input optocoupler 2 7 12VI 12 V control voltage optocoupler 8 OPTKP 1 Control input optocoupler 1 X5 1 K 3 12 Relay contact K3 1 NO 2 K 3 13 Relay contact K3 1 NC 3 K 2 11 Relay contact K2 1 common 4 K 2 12 Relay contact K2 1 NO 5 K 2 13 Relay contact K2 1 NC 6 K 1 11 Re...

Page 526: ...ct K202 NO 2 23 ACT3 2A Relay contact K202 NC 2 24 ACT3 1M Relay contact K202 common 1 25 ACT3 1B Relay contact K202 NO 1 26 ACT3 1A Relay contact K202 NC 1 27 P12VI 12 V optocoupler 3 28 SENSE3 Control input optocoupler 3 31 ACT2 2M Relay contact K201 common 2 32 ACT2 2B Relay contact K201 NO 2 33 ACT2 2A Relay contact K201 NC 2 34 ACT2 1M Relay contact K201 common 1 35 ACT2 1B Relay contact K201...

Page 527: ...r connecting serial devices to the USB interface on the service PC Serial USB adapter F5U103 from Belkin Corporation www belkin com Serial USB adapter BF 810 from BAFO Technologies www bafo com The delivery includes one USB cable the adapter and a CD ROM with drivers Notes The drivers provided must be used If a connection cannot be established between the PC and the system close the Transfer dialo...

Page 528: ...with the CBCC central board up to and including S30810 Q2935 A301 the V24 1 module can be used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 This provides a serial V 24 inter face for connecting PCs printers or applications Interfaces Figure 3 151 V24 1 not for U S S30807 Q6916 X100 Figure 3 152 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 V 24 Connections 1 26 25 pin Sub D jack To CBCC CBCP X7 via ribbon cable X2 Component side...

Page 529: ... 24 RS 232 Connector Assignment HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Table 3 187 Pin Assignments of the V 24 Socket X2 Connector X2 Signal I O 2 TxD O 3 RxD I 4 RTS O 5 CTS I 6 DSR I 20 DTR O 7 0V No other pins in connector X2 are used TxD RxD RTS CTS DSR DTR Vcc GND RxD TxD CTS RTS DTR DSR 0V To CB X7 Edge connector 25 pin TTL RS 232 Level converter and electrical isolation X2 Sub D jack 25 pin ...

Page 530: ... 24 adapter is required as an adapter between the 25 pin connector on the cable C39195 Z7267 C13 and a 9 pin jack for connection to the V 24 interface on all HiPath 3000 V1 2 or later systems V 24 adapter assignment Table 3 188 V 24 Adapter Assignment C39334 Z7080 C2 9 pin jack Signal 25 pin jack Pin Pin 1 DCD 8 2 RxD 3 3 TxD 2 4 DTR 20 5 GND 7 6 DSR 6 7 RTS 4 8 CTS 5 9 RI 22 ...

Page 531: ...g a service PC to the V 24 interface on all HiPath 3000 systems V1 2 or later V 24 cable assignment Figure 3 154 V 24 Cable Assignment C30267 Z355 A25 9 pin jack DCD RxD TxD DTR DSR RTS CTS GND RI 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 9 Shield Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit data Data Terminal Ready Data Send Ready Request to send Clear to send Ground Ring Indicator DCD RxD TxD DTR DSR RTS CTS GND RI 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 532: ...Boards for HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 3 400 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation boards fm Options ...

Page 533: ...lling Boards Configuration Notes page 4 31 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane page 4 51 Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch Panel page 4 66 Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP page 4 81 Connecting Workpoint Clients page 4 82 Making Trunk and Networking Connections page 4 82 Performing a Visual Inspection page 4 83 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPa...

Page 534: ...from 2 to 8 mm 1 4 to 5 16 in Phillips or cross point screwdrivers sizes 1 and 2 TORX screwdriver Wire stripper for example from Krone Board wrench part no C39300 A7194 B10 Electric drill hammer Level tape measure For U S only Punch down tool suitable for the block used such as block 66 Resources Assistant T or HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partia...

Page 535: ...up the System Cabinets from Page 4 7 Single Cabinet Two cabinets stacked Two cabinets side by side Mounting System Cabinets in the 19 Inch Cabinet page 4 24 4 Grounding the System page 4 14 Checking the Grounding page 4 19 Grounding the System page 4 27 Checking the Grounding page 4 30 5 Installing Boards Configuration Notes page 4 31 6 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane page 4 51 7 If required...

Page 536: ...boards and for wiring Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat for example sunlight and heaters Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specifie...

Page 537: ...20 V AC single phase fused power at 50 60 Hz and 20 A A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used The system must be properly grounded before startup see description in Section 4 1 3 4 Table 4 2 Electrical Connection Values for U S only Nominal voltage Nominal voltage ran...

Page 538: ...nts Procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the proper departments 3 Dispose of the packing materials properly 7 Caution Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition Do not use equipment with visible damage ...

Page 539: ...tor Panels if required The front plastic cover for board servicing and the rear plastic cover for cable servicing are not attached to the system cabinets Both covers are supplied in separate packages 4 1 3 3 1 Overview System configurations The following setup options are possible for system cabinets Single cabinet Two cabinets stacked Two cabinets side by side 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main...

Page 540: ...e system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and stable 2 Check that the space between the base of the cabinet and the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figu...

Page 541: ...cabinet and the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figure 4 1 B so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the loc...

Page 542: ...Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 4 10 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Positioning the cabinet feet Figure 4 2 HiPath 3800 Positioning the Cabinet Feet ...

Page 543: ...iPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 4 11 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Installing a stacked two cabinet system Figure 4 3 HiPath 3800 Installing a Stacked Two Cabinet System Rear View 50 mm 50 mm ...

Page 544: ...net and the ground is at least 50 mm 3 If necessary set up the basic cabinet in the following way Unscrew lock nut Figure 4 1 A on one of the cabinet feet using an open end wrench wrench size 13 mm Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut Figure 4 1 B so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nu...

Page 545: ...ath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 4 13 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Installing a Two Cabinet System Side by Side Figure 4 4 HiPath 3800 Installing a Two Cabinet System Side by Side Rear View 50 mm ...

Page 546: ...ross section 2 5 mm2 Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain relieved If external factors can impact on the ground conductor and if protected installation is not possible the ground conductor must have a minimum cross section of 4 mm2 Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock 7 Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low volt...

Page 547: ...ion frame if present for example the building s potential equalization bus but not central heating system drain channels Ground conductor for antenna system to next main distribution frame if present for example MDFU E Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 HiPath 3800 BC HiPath 3800 EC if present Attach to the grill us ing cable ties green yellow Min cro...

Page 548: ...g HiPath 3800 Grounding option 1a Grounding option 1b Figure 4 6 HiPath 3800 Grounding Option 1a not for U S Figure 4 7 HiPath 3800 Grounding Option 1b not for U S green yellow Example Potential equalization bus HiPath 3800 Main grounding terminal HiPath 3800 L1 N PE 230 V green yellow Example Connector sok ket Grounding outlets Main grounding ter minal ...

Page 549: ...onnecting cable is used for grounding the system cabinets The system must also be grounded by a separate ground conductor Choose a ground connection with less than 2 ohms of resistance such as Master ground busbar Ground field Copper ground rod Run a separate earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground lo cated in the lower right corner of the backplane The minimum cro...

Page 550: ...pleted by a qualified electrician and must comply with the national and local electrical codes The Section 1 6 1 Connection to the Power Circuit is to be adhered to HiPath 3800 Located in the electrical service panel providing power to the Hi Path 3800 system Main grounding ter minal Connection cable with plug Recommended 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire con ductor not exceeding 126 feet in le...

Page 551: ...nce of the ground connection to the system Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3800 Prerequisites HiPath 3800 is not yet connected to the low voltage network via the power cable The system s separate grounding is connected 10 ohms 2 Check the ohmic resistance between the individual sys tem parts ...

Page 552: ... 800 900 mm make installation cable servicing and the installation of additional components in the rear of the cabinet much easier The support brackets required for installing the system cabinets must have a minimum ultimate load of 40 kg The support brackets must be purchased from the relevant 19 inch cabinet supplier The system cabinets must be fixed to the cabinet bars using the angle brackets ...

Page 553: ...rs Do not expose the 19 inch cabinet to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 Information on the design of the HiPath 3800 can be found in Section 2 1 4 1 F...

Page 554: ...a 19 inch cabinet 7 Caution The height units represented in yellow in Figure 4 10 must be kept clear to ensure adequate ventilation of the system cabinets Figure 4 10 HiPath 3800 Installation Examples in the 19 Inch Cabinet Examples of a 19 inch cabinet height of 1 92m with 37 height units HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet HiPath 3800 Expansion cabi net Patch Panel Patch Panel ...

Page 555: ...onents Procedure Table 4 3 Electrical Connection Values for U S only Nominal voltage Nominal voltage range Nominal Frequency Range Wall Outlet Configura tions from to from to 120 V AC 60 Hz 110 V AC 130 V AC 47 Hz 63 Hz NEMA 5 15 2 pin 3 wire earth Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether an...

Page 556: ...inet supplier Two angle brackets order no C39165 A7075 D1 which are supplied with the system cabinet 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before starting the system and before connecting up the peripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected...

Page 557: ...et B in Figure 4 12 in the 19 inch cabinet using the screws provided Note the use of cabinet floors is not permitted to prevent overheating 4 Lift the system cabinet into the 19 inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two sup port brackets B in Figure 4 12 Slide the cabinet into the 19 inch cabinet until the front edge of the system cabinet is flush with the front of the 19 inch frame 5 Secure the...

Page 558: ...rnen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 4 26 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Installation in the 19 inch cabinet Figure 4 12 HiPath 3800 Installing System Cabinets in 19 Inch Cabinet A B A B ...

Page 559: ...nger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a li censed electrician to install the ground The Section 1 6 1 Connection to the Power Circuit is to be adhered to Does the 19 inch cabinet have a potential equalization bus at which the HiPath 3800 can be grounded as shown in Figure 4 13 A potential equalization bus must be installed in the 19 inch ...

Page 560: ... 13 by a separate ground con ductor minimum cross section 2 5 mm2 Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain relieved If external factors can impact on the ground conductor and if protected installation is not possible the ground conductor must have a minimum cross section of 4 mm2 Please note The 19 inch cabinet s potential equalization bus may only be used if it is grou...

Page 561: ...inet for example HiPath 3800 BC HiPath 3800 EC if present Attach to the grill using cable ties Any color except for green or yellow to avoid confusion Min cross section 2 5 mm2 To other patch panels S30807 K6143 X if present A ground conductor is not required for the S0 patch panel S30807 K6143 X green yellow Min cross section 2 5 mm2 The grounding of the individual racks must be performed from th...

Page 562: ... a line driver to isolate the external devices in the event of a malfunction Step Activity Target 1 Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to the 19 inch cabinet Perform measurement between the PE protective earth on a socket in the internal installation at the sys tem s installation site and HiPath 3800 Prerequisites No device in the 19 inch cabinet is connected to the low voltage ne...

Page 563: ...binet There are nine slots available in the basic cabinet BC slots 1 to 5 and slots 7 to 10 and thirteen in the expansion cabinet EC slots 1 to 6 and slots 8 to 14 for peripheral boards The central control board CBSAP has a fixed slot slot 6 only in the basic cabinet BC Depending on your requirements up to three LUNA2 power supply units can be used in the basic cabinet BC and up to four in the exp...

Page 564: ...HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 4 32 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 14 HiPath 3800 Board Slots in the Basic Cabinet ...

Page 565: ... H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 4 33 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 15 HiPath 3800 Board Slots in the Expansion Cabinet Not used ...

Page 566: ...es for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices see Section 1 2 6 Notes If Then Board is to be re moved Insert the tip of the board wrench marked Pull into the top opening on the front cover of the board to be removed Lever the board out of the shelf by pushing the board wrench upwards Figure 4 16 left Then you can pull the module out of the system cabinet over the guide rails Board is to be...

Page 567: ...shielded front panel These are DIUT2 DIUN2 DIU2U STMI2 TMCAS 2 TMANI8 SLCN IVMNL Empty board slots must be equipped with shielding covers at the front and at the back When using internal patch panels The number of rear shielding covers DUA437 depends on the number of internal patch panels used Example Basic cabinet 9 slots 4 internal patch panels 5 shielding covers Patch panels should be handled i...

Page 568: ...ing HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 4 36 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 17 Installing the Board Shielding Cover ...

Page 569: ... up to four LUNA2 modules can be used in the expansion cabinet For in formation on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required see the LUNA2 board description Push the LUNA2 power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system cabinet shelf until you hear a click The slots for the power supply units must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up ...

Page 570: ... HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 19 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 and REALS in the Basic Cabinet With Out er Panel Mounted Figure 4 20 HiPath 3800 Slots for LUNA2 in the Expansion Cabinet With Outer Panel Mounted Fixing screws Fixing screws ...

Page 571: ... the REALS board into the slot marked 3 in the lower part of the shelf in the basic cabinet and apply pressure until you hear a click The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws see Figure 4 19 Figure 4 21 HiPath 3800 Installing the REALS Board ...

Page 572: ...SLMA21 SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Attach a connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks S30807 Q6622 X to the SIVAPAC connector on the back plane different or no as signment Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots see Section 4 1 5 3 Inserting or Removing Boards In stalling shielding covers For U S only Connector panels with CHAMP jack see Section 4...

Page 573: ... 7 Slot with SLCN SLMA SLMA21 SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 STMD3 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Plug a connector panel with SIPAC 1 SU connectors S30807 Q6631 X into the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane different or no as signment Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots see Section 4 1 5 3 Inserting or Removing Boards In stalling shielding covers 1 for selected countrie...

Page 574: ...on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connectors The TMEW2 and TMDID for U S only boards have SIVAPAC connector strips and as a result SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapters have to be installed in order to use them in HiPath 3800 The SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapter consists of three individual parts refer to Figure 4 22 two adapter modules one startup module Figure 4 22 SIVAPAC SIPAC board adapter Comp...

Page 575: ...dapter module on the connector strip Figure 4 23 B of the board The outside edges of the adapter module must match the outside edges of the connector strip 4 Make sure that the outermost row of pins on the adapter module and the outermost row of jacks on the connector strip are aligned flush with one another and press the adapter module fully into the connector strip 5 Close the locking hooks 6 Re...

Page 576: ...d adapter increases the board length The boards jut out slightly from the board shelf To ensure that these boards can still snap into place in spite of the board adapter the upper black lock must be replaced with a gray lock Figure 4 24 Replacing the board lock Remove the black latch At the point marked with the arrow press the latch out of its seating and pull it out of the shelf Black and gray b...

Page 577: ...s all connected boards in the following situations The maximum configuration has not yet been reached While sequentially scanning the slots for each board the system software checks whether the maximum number of stations or trunks has been exceeded If it has the board is not activated The board LED shows the board s status At least one B channel on line trunk modules is available for the slot only...

Page 578: ... division multiplex channels available The following figures show the PCM highways for both system cabinets of the HiPath 3800 Basic cabinet PCM highways The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each There are 32 time division multiplex channels available for each PCM highway The PCM highway bundles in the basic cabinet are used by peripheral boards according to t...

Page 579: ... However only complete boards are acti vated on the other trunk group The remaining time division multiplex channels remain free Two cabinet system basic cabinet expansion cabinet All peripheral boards use the PCM highways from trunk group A only Expansion cabinet PCM highways The expansion cabinet provides a PCM highway bundle with 2 x 4 PCM highways There are 32 time division multiplex channels ...

Page 580: ...er of active stations 7 Restrictions for using the TMDID board The TMDID board only uses the first half of a PCM segment Consequently a max imum of 64 channels is available on each PCM segment for TMDID specific static time division multiplex channels To guarantee that the system operates without blocking when using the TMDID the boards on a PCM segment must not require more than the 64 static tim...

Page 581: ...d over the home SLCN board of a mobile tele phone If a call is being conducted over a Current location SLCN board additional time division multiplex channels will be required More information is provided in Section 11 5 Multi SLC and System Wide Networking 2 The maximum number of masters and slaves possible is taken into consideration 3 Static time division multiplex channel assignment for operati...

Page 582: ...of the system Single cabinet system see Page 4 46 1 5 128 erlangs 128 er langs1 1 The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each DIUT2 DIUN2 DIU2U for U S only and STMI2 use the PCM highways from trunk group F Thus there are an additional 128 time division multiplex chan nels available for these boards in the basic cabinet for slots 1 5 and slots 7 10 If HiPath 380...

Page 583: ...ls are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting the external mail distribution frame MDFU E or external patch panels using CABLUs see Section 4 1 6 7 The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion ...

Page 584: ...12 4 52 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 1 6 1 Backplane of the Basic Cabinet Figure 4 28 HiPath 3800 Backplane S30804 Q5392 X of the Basic Cabinet 9 SIVAPAC con nector for peripher als 68 pin DB68 mini jack connection to EC DC port AC port ...

Page 585: ...V9 Service documentation 4 53 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 29 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Basic Cabinet X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X109 X110 X111 X112 X201 X116 X209 X212 X211 X214 ...

Page 586: ...s each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting an external main distribution frame or external patch panel using CABLUs see Section 4 1 6 7 X109 X112 X116 SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the REALS board CABLUs for connection to the MDFU E jumper strip for 25 TW C39195 A7267 A372 3 m in length short stripped length for MDFU E slots 11 21 see Figure 4 36 C39195 A7267 A373 3 ...

Page 587: ...5 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3800 4 1 6 2 Expansion Cabinet Backplane Figure 4 30 HiPath 3800 Expansion Cabinet Backplane S30804 Q5393 X 13 SIVAPAC connectors for peripheral boards DBSAP with 68 pin DB68 mini jack connection to BC DC port AC port ...

Page 588: ...7 7620 06 2012 4 56 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Figure 4 31 HiPath 3800 Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Expansion Cab inet X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X109 X110 X111 X112 X113 X114 X115 X106 X209 X211 X220 X223 X214 ...

Page 589: ...on to the MDFU E or to an external patch panel see Section 4 1 6 4 Note The SIVAPAC connectors can have the following connector panels Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for direct connection of peripherals see Section 4 1 6 5 For U S only Connector panels with CHAMP jack for direct connection of peripherals see Section 4 1 6 6 Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting an e...

Page 590: ...e ripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected to the power supply if all system cabi nets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided If Then Slot with SLCN SLMA8 SLMO8 STMD3 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 CABLUs for connection between backplane SIVAPAC connector and MDFU E splitting strip for 16 TW C39195 A7267 A370 3 m in length short ...

Page 591: ...ts 11 21 see Figure 4 36 C39195 A7267 A373 3 m in length long stripped length for MDFU E slots 1 10 see Figure 4 36 CABLU for connection between backplane SIVAPAC connectors and ex ternal patch panel S30807 K6143 X SIVAPAC socket terminal strip S30267 Z333 A20 2m in length refer to Figure 4 42 S30267 Z333 A50 5 m in length refer to Figure 4 42 Open end cable 24 TW for connection between backplane ...

Page 592: ..._h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 Closing the backplane of the system cabinets After the cable has been connected the backplane of the basic cabinet and that of the expansion cabinet if applicable must be closed with the dummy panels provid ed C39165 A7075 C44 Figure 4 32 HiPath 3800 Backplane of the Basic Cabinet with Mounted Filler Panels ...

Page 593: ...800 connector panels with RJ45 Jacks 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the pe ripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started connected to the power supply if all system cabi nets are sealed at the rear with the connection and fi...

Page 594: ...r assignment is provided in the board descriptions in Chap ter 3 Slot with SLCN SLMA SLMA21 SLMA8 SLMO2 SLMO8 TM2LP TMC161 TMDID2 Connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks S30807 Q6622 X The RJ45 jacks are configured with two wires different or no assignment The backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots must be cov ered with filler panels 1 for selected countries only 2 For U S only If The...

Page 595: ...ector assignment is provided in the board descriptions in Chap ter 3 Figure 4 34 HiPath 3800 Connector Panel with CHAMP Jack for U S only 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the pe ripherals for example potential equalization bus The system may only be started co...

Page 596: ...n external patch panel See also Section 4 1 7 Using an External Main Distribu tion Frame or External Patch Panel In special cases where the prefabricated CABLUs cannot be used open end cables should be used Figure 4 35 HiPath 3800 Connector Panel with Two SIPAC 1 SU Connectors S30807 Q6631 X 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to the grounding p...

Page 597: ... cable with 16 TW 6 m in length S30267 Z192 A100 Open end cable with 16 TW 10 m in length S30267 Z192 A200 Open end cable with 16 TW 20m in length Information on the required stripped lengths for open end cables is provided in Figure 4 47 Slot with SLMA SLMA21 SLMO2 CABLUs for connection between connector panel SIPAC 1 SU connectors and MDFU E jumper strip for 25 TW S30269 Z100 A14 3 m in length s...

Page 598: ...ing the peripherals The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of the agree ment This may involve the implementation of an external main distribution frame or an external patch panel This section contains information on the following external components Main distribution frame MDFU E Section 4 1 7 1 Patch panel S30807 K6143 X Section 4 1 7 2 S0 patc...

Page 599: ...Using an External Main Distribution Frame MDFU E S30805 U5283 X For U S only No more than 21 CABLUs per MDFU E with one 16 TW strip or 25 TW strip 9 x 30 mm can be implemented Figure 4 36 MDFU E Layout and Dimensions 669 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm System side Line network 1 2 3 6 4 5 Jumpering Channel 19 20 21 21 slots 9 x 30 mm 328 8 mm 669 0 mm Special built in comps 2 x PFT1 or ...

Page 600: ... network see jumpering duct Figure 4 36 Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires Surge protector To divert surge voltage caused by lightning insert surge protectors on lines that leave the system buildings outside stations lines 500 m long Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip described above see Figure 4 38 Step Activity 1 Use the tem...

Page 601: ...ing and jumper strips Figure 4 37 Assignment Numbering of the Splitting Jumper Strips view from above a a b 1Ea 1Sa 1Eb 1Sb a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Splitting strip for 16 TW C39334 A166 A1 Jumper strip for 25 TW C39334 A166 A3 23 19 17 21 25 S0 bus 1 S0 bus 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 12 13 14 15 No 25 not used E Receive S Transmit b b ...

Page 602: ...rge protector plug locations View from below Cable with film sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 250 5 Stripped length Velcro tape 19 mm wide Bundle fastener 1 Stripped length 600 5 mm Stripped length 910 5 mm for MDFU E slots 1to 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a a a a a a a a b b b b b b b b 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a a a a a a a a ...

Page 603: ...6 yel blu blu wht blu yel 2 wht ora 17 yel ora ora wht ora yel 3 wht grn 18 yel grn grn wht grn yel 4 wht brn 19 yel brn brn wht brn yel 5 wht gry 20 yel gry gry wht gry yel 2 6 red blu 5 21 vio blu blu red blu vio 7 red ora 22 vio ora ora red ora vio 8 red grn 23 vio grn grn red grn vio 9 red brn 24 vio brn brn red brn vio 10 red gry Note In the case of cables with 16 double wires the specificati...

Page 604: ...807K6143 X Structure All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 39 Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X 8 1 MW8 jack assignment 4 a wire 5 b wire Necessary height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 1 one height unit corresponds to approx 1 7 43 mm SIVAPAC edge connector port for CABLU connection to the backplane Eight surge protector plug loca tions Front panel with 3 ...

Page 605: ...he system cabinet and secure it to the 19 inch frame on both the left and the right using two screws on each side 7 Caution The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee suf ficient ventilation of the system cabinet This is achieved by the gray plastic cover fixed to the top of the system cabinets Never rem...

Page 606: ...see Figure 4 42 7 Danger Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets and all patch panels to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals for example potential equalization bus Figure 4 41 Layout of the Patch Panel S30807 K6143 X for Different Peripheral Boards 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 ...

Page 607: ... 38 40 42 44 46 48 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 X5 X1 SIVAPAC edge connectors port for CABLU connection to the backplane Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks Slots F1 F8 for surge protector Options for connecting the external line network Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels Using jumper wire bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14 and between X13 and X15 ...

Page 608: ...inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 1 7 3 Inserting External S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 Structure All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties Figure 4 43 S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 3 x 8 MW8 jacks Necessary height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 1 one height unit corresponds to approx 1 7 43 mm ...

Page 609: ...e a system cabinet and secure it to the 19 inch frame on both the left and the right using two screws B on each side 7 Caution The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee suf ficient ventilation of the system cabinet This is achieved by the gray plastic cover fixed to the top of the system cabinets Never ...

Page 610: ...ch panel Figure 4 46 You can use the Kro ne wiring tool for this Figure 4 45 Assignment of the S0 Patch Panel C39104 Z7001 B3 Figure 4 46 Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel 7 5 3 1 23 21 19 17 8 6 4 2 24 22 20 18 3 x 8 MW8 jacks numbering 8 1 Pin MW8 jack assignment as a subscriber line as a trunk connection 3 Transmit Receive 4 Receive Transmit 5 Receive Transmit 6 Transmit Receive 8 7 6 3 2...

Page 611: ...pen end cable for the S0 patch panel The color codes for open end cables are provided in Table 4 8 Figure 4 47 Stripping the Open End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel 250 5 Stripped length Velcro tape 19 mm wide Bundle fastener 1 Cable with film sheath No 6 conductive copper tape 1 5 windings Ground wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape 1 Stripped length 600 mm 5 mm ...

Page 612: ...e wires Connecting to T1 PRI or CorNet Additional primary protection NOTE Before installing the outgoing lines the grounding of the system must be ensured NOTE The DIU2U and DIUT2 boards can only be installed in conjunction with a listed CSU channel service unit NOTE Danger of damage to property due to surge voltage Lines from the following boards that exit the building must be protected with an a...

Page 613: ...ivered Optional plug in boards are packaged individually See Section 3 2 3 for information on slots for subboards on the central control board CBSAP 7 Caution Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system especially when handling boards Connect the wristband to the slide in shelf in the cabinet using the alligator clip 7 Caution Place the central control board on a flat surface be...

Page 614: ...st_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3800 4 1 9 Connecting Workpoint Clients Refer to Chapter 10 for details 4 1 10 Making Trunk and Networking Connections Refer to the following board descriptions for information DIUN2 S2M DIUT2 S2M T1 STMD3 S0 STMI2 IP TM2LP MSI TMEW2 E M DIU2U for U S only TMC16 for selected countries only TMDID for U S only ...

Page 615: ... see Section 1 2 6 Notes Table 4 9 Visual inspection procedure Step Activity Resources Remarks Action 1 Compare the slots of the available boards with the component mounting dia gram Board assign ment map If necessary correct the board config uration and notify the sales depart ment 2 Check that all boards are secure See Page 4 34 If necessary plug the boards in again 3 Check that a shielding cov ...

Page 616: ...r installing the standalone HiPath 3800 Section 4 1 4 4 for installing the HiPath 3800 in the 19 inch cabi net 7 Check the local supply volt age Digital multime ter 8 Only for installing HiPath 3800 as a standalone sys tem close all system cabinets with the front and back plas tic covers provided Fit the cover into the guides and press down on the cover unit it snaps into place After finishing the...

Page 617: ...ers telephone pliers wire stripper flat nosed pliers Slotted screwdrivers from 2 to 8 mm 1 4 to 5 16 in Phillips or cross point screwdrivers sizes 1 and 2 TORX screwdriver Electric drill hammer Level tape measure For U S only Punch down tool suitable for the block used such as block 66 Resources Assistant T or HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial...

Page 618: ...Frame HiPath 3550 only page 4 90 Not for U S Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall page 4 113 4 Removing the System Housing Cover page 4 92 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet page 4 114 5 Attaching the System to the Wall page 4 94 Grounding the System page 4 116 6 Grounding the System and the Main Distribution Frame page 4 95 Installing the Boards page 4 117 7 Insta...

Page 619: ...ly dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 Ensure that the installation site is in the immediate vicinity of an electrical outlet Allow space for a main distribution fr...

Page 620: ...4 48 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Space Requirements HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 The system measures 18 by 17 7 inches 46 x 45 cm The following spaces should be allowed 18 in 46mm of clearance on the left and at least 8 in 203 mm of clearance on the top and right Allow 20 in 50 8 cm of clearance on the bottom for cables Backplane 122 X 122 cm 4 X 4 ft Main distribution frame 20 3 cm 8 Leave 46 cm 18...

Page 621: ...t Requirements The power source may not be more than 2 m 6 ft from the system The power source must supply a voltage of 120 V AC single phase fused in 50 60 Hz A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used Recommendation Add a power surge protector between the AC outlet and...

Page 622: ... connection cable and at eye level Mount it on the wall according to the instruc tions that came with it The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template It also contains the necessary screws and wall anchors for attaching the MDF to the wall The MDFU must be grounded Refer to Section 4 2 3 6 for an explanation of the procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or...

Page 623: ...d dimensions of the MDFU Step Activity 1 Use the template to drill the holes 2 Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws leaving 5 mm projecting 3 Remove the housing cover and mount the MDFU E on the brackets 4 Tighten the screws through the holes Figure 4 49 MDFU Layout and Dimensions 367 0 x 328 8 x 125 4 mm not for U S 2 x PFT1 or 1 x PFT4 9 slots 9 x 30 mm Special built in comps System s...

Page 624: ...50 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 4 2 3 4 Removing the System Housing Cover Procedure 7 Warning To prevent injuries you must observe the following instructions for the removal and attachment of the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing cover Step Activity 1 Loosen the two screwed plugs on the housing cover with a slotted screw driver Hold the housing cover so that it does not fall ...

Page 625: ...ath 3300 Mounting the housing cover To close the system housing again put the cover on and fasten it with the two screwed plugs To avoid injuries grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only when mounting it 2 Remove the housing cover Warning Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which can cause cuts Step Activity...

Page 626: ...h the system to the wall as shown in Figure 4 50 Attaching the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing to the wall Figure 4 50 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Wall Attachment Figure 4 51 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Wall Attachment PSU UPS Cable duct Rear wall of housing Oblong holes for wall attachment Attachment of PSU UPS to the rear wall of hous ing Hang system and tighten screws Minimum clearance for ...

Page 627: ... and that of the external MDF must be set from the building s potential equalization bus in a star configuration Not for U S HiPath 3550 Shipments always include an MDFU Germany only and two grounding cables Use one of the cables to ground the MDFU It is not necessary to ground the connection between the MDFU and HiPath 3550 see Figure 4 52 HiPath 3350 This system type does not require an external...

Page 628: ...ning the existing exter nal main distribution frame For U S only The customer supplies a main distribution frame to complete the communications system Mount and ground the MDF in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 7 DANGER Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires An external main distribution frame which requires grounding if the existing ground connection is marked must...

Page 629: ...Path 3350 Grounding an External Main Distribution Frame Example Potential equalization bus but not central heating system drain channels ground conductor for antenna system Communication system to be re placed Grounding screw Main distribution frame being reu sed HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 Grounding not required e g MDFU green yellow Min cross section 2 5 mm2 External main distribution frame You m...

Page 630: ...0 and HiPath 3300 4 2 3 7 Installing the Boards Outside the U S the system is already equipped with the boards needed for the customer spe cific requirements when the system is delivered In the U S you may need to install the boards Connecting to T1 PRI or CorNet for U S only 7 Caution The TST1 Module HiPath 3550 can be installed only in conjunction with a listed channel service unit CSU ...

Page 631: ...th 3500 and HiPath 3300 4 2 3 8 Laying the Line Network and Connection Cables HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 CABLU for connection to the external main distribution frame Figure 4 53 Layout of CABLU S30269 Z41 A30 Length 3 m 6 slip on connectors 4 TW each for connection to the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 boards Jumper strip 25 TW for installation in the exter nal main distribution frame ...

Page 632: ...CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9 to the same jumper strip 25 TW Slot with any other periph eral board Without an external main distribution frame MDFU You can attach cables for the peripheral boards directly to the boards see Figure 4 55 for the slip on connectors and route them to the MDFU through the cable duct inside the housing With an external main distribution frame MDFU Use CABLU S3...

Page 633: ...strip For U S only HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Connecting the Cabling If the boards are not already connected to the appropriate cables leaving the system you need to connect them The TST1 Module HiPath 3550 connects to a customer supplied channel service unit CSU using the supplied cable The CSU offers the required additional primary protection Each port on the STLS4 Module connects to an S0 bus ...

Page 634: ... the LAN cable being used must already be shielded Procedure LAN cable shield contacts 4 2 3 9 Attaching Ferrite To keep within the interference limit required by EMC Class B you must attach ferrite to the following lines HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 power cables wall housing The wall housing s power cable must be guided through the C39022 Z7000 C7 ferrite sleeve that is included in the accessory p...

Page 635: ...ce documentation 4 103 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Figure 4 56 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Power cable with ferrite sleeve Ferrite sleeve C39022 Z7000 C7 40 5 mm min 15 mm Power cable ...

Page 636: ... be no gap between the two ferrite halves The ferrite sleeves should where possible be mounted in the cable duct If the number of lines makes this impossible the ferrite can be attached directly at the output of the cable duct HiPath 3350 Guide the trunk and subscriber lines of all ports connected on a board through a ferrite sleeve C39022 Z7000 C6 twice i e in a loop More than one trunk or subscr...

Page 637: ...ath 3000 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 4 2 3 10 Configuration Notes HiPath 3550 system overview and slots Restrictions for equipment with IVMP8 IVMS8 TST1 and TS2N boards must be ob served Figure 4 57 HiPath 3550 Wall Housing System Overview Optional boards 1 2 3 4 5 6 PSU UPS Cable duct Slot levels CUC ...

Page 638: ...th 3500 and HiPath 3300 Figure 4 58 HiPath 3550 Slots in the Wall Housing Figure 4 59 HiPath 3550 Option Adapter Long OPAL Opt 1 Opt 2 Opt 3 Opt 4 Opt 5 Slot 10 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 7 V 24 Slot 2 Slot 3 CBCC OPAL Wall to MDF CUC Connection Unit Com Slot levels 1 2 3 4 5 6 The CBCC board is connected to the optional board via a ribbon ca ble OPAL see adjacent figure ...

Page 639: ... 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 HiPath 3350 system overview and slots Figure 4 60 HiPath 3350 Wall Housing System Overview Figure 4 61 HiPath 3350 Slots in the Wall Housing Optional boards 1 2 3 PSU UPS Cable duct Slot levels CUP Opt 1 Opt 2 Opt 3 Opt 4 Opt 5 OPAL Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 2 Slot 3 CBCC V 2 CUP Connection Unit Point Slot levels 1 2 3 Wall ...

Page 640: ...3350 Static Traffic Capacity System Slots Static traffic capac ity Total static traffic capacity of the system HiPath 3550 see Figure 4 58 2 3 CBCC 24 erlangs 198 erlangs 4 16 erlangs 5 16 erlangs 6 16 erlangs 7 16 erlangs 8 16 erlangs 9 30 erlangs1 1 Use of a TS2N board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs A maximum of one TS2N per HiPath 3550 is possible and the board may only be installed in slo...

Page 641: ...13 Performing a Visual Inspection Before starting up the system you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware cables and the power supply The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnect ed from the power supply 7 Caution Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power supply Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measure...

Page 642: ...ion assembly kit includes adhesive feet Stick the adhesive feet to the bottom of the housing Installation into 19 cabinet with assembly kits for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 These systems also support the use of Powerbox PB3000 PB3000 can accommodate four batteries and or an additional LUNA2 external power supply unit The batteries guarantee un interruptible power supply LUNA2 is needed if the syst...

Page 643: ...le sunlight and heaters Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments Avoid contact with chemicals Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during op eration Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2 11 Information on the design can be found in the following sections ...

Page 644: ...Unpacking the Components Procedure Step Activity 1 Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure that they are correct and complete 2 Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the proper departments 3 Dispose of the packing materials properly 7 Caution Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition Do not use equipment w...

Page 645: ...nting Figure 4 62 Wall mounting Step Activity 1 Drill a hole in the selected wall insert a wall anchor and screw in the screws 2 Screw the angle brackets A and B for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 onto the base of the device 3 Mount the system with the angle bracket A on the screws 4 Drill a second hole in the wall for the lower angle bracket B insert a wall anchor and attach the angle bracket with a ...

Page 646: ... HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet Procedure for 19 inch cabinets Figure 4 63 Step Activity 1 HiPath 3500 only Attach the two angle brackets A to the 19 inch cabinet using two screws per bracket 2 Attach the two angle brackets B to the left and right of the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 using two screws per bracket 3 Slide the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 system into the 19 inch cabinet and attach it to the lef...

Page 647: ...ocumentation 4 115 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Mounting the 19 inch cabinet Figure 4 63 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Mounting the 19 Inch Cabinet HiPath 3300 B B HiPath 3500 A HiPath 3500 ...

Page 648: ...yellow Danger If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low voltage network 230 Vac you must hire a li censed electrician to install the ground The Section 1 6 1 Connection to the Power Circuit is to be adhered to Does the 19 inch cabinet have a potential equalization bus at which the HiPath 3500 or Hi Path 3300 can be grounded A potential equalization bus must be installed in the 19 inch...

Page 649: ...ounding cable to the potential equalization bar on the 19 inch cab inet 2 Connect the grounding cable to the system s ground connection with the ground ing screw supplied point A 3 Attach the grounding cable strain relief to the system point B with a cable tie Figure 4 64 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Grounding 7 Danger The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 housing to be wall mounted must be grounded by a...

Page 650: ...ld to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 housing as shown in Figure 4 65 The tooth lock washer must be mounted between the painted surface of the cover and the clip Attaching to the PB3000 side see Section 9 1 3 Line network The connecting cords to the peripherals can be connected directly to the relevant MW8 jacks on the front panel of the 19 inch housing Connecting the LAN cable for HXGR3 LAN cables...

Page 651: ...ath 3300 Procedure LAN cable shield contacts Step Activity 1 Expose the external shield D by stripping the LAN cable sheath A Stripped length approx 30 mm 2 Wrap conductive tape C around the exposed external shielding at least 1 5 times and use a cable binder B to attach it to the housing maintaining a continuous conducting contact between the tape and the housing see figure A Stripped length B C ...

Page 652: ...rview and slots 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3500 only with the housing front closed Always use dum my panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Figure 4 66 HiPath 3500 Slot Levels in the 19 Inch Housing It is imperative that you observe the restrictions regarding TS2R installation Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slots 1 3 Slot levels 5 options 4 CB...

Page 653: ...ath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 HiPath 3300 system overview and slots 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed Always use dum my panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Figure 4 67 HiPath 3300 Slot Levels in the 19 Inch Housing Slot 4 Slot 5 Slots 1 3 Slot levels 3 options 2 CBRC 1 Peripheralboards ...

Page 654: ...HiPath 3300 Static Traffic Capacity System Slots Static traffic capac ity Total static traffic capacity of the system HiPath 3500 see Figure 4 66 2 3 CBRC 24 erlangs 134 erlangs 4 16 erlangs 5 16 erlangs 6 16 erlangs 7 16 erlangs 8 16 erlangs 9 30 erlangs1 1 Use of a TS2R board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs A maximum of one TS2R per HiPath 3500 is possible and the board may only be installed...

Page 655: ...stem you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware cables and the power supply The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnect ed from the power supply 7 Caution Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power supply Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting elec trostatically sensitive devices see S...

Page 656: ...el Before the installation the HiPath system must be be switched off and disconnected from the power supply To install the EXMR proceed as follows 1 Insert the RCA jacks of the supplied NF audio cable on the right side of the front panel of the CBRC module 2 Insert the two wires at the other end of the NF audio cable into the 2 pole Wieland connec tor and tighten the connection Then plug in the Wi...

Page 657: ...7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 4 125 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installing HiPath 3000 Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 Figure 4 69 Rear view of EXMR module mounted on the CBRC ...

Page 658: ...the backplane proceed as follows 1 Siconnect the HiPath system by unplugging the power cord from the wall socket 2 Remove the cable connectors from the motherboard the expansion cards and the optional modules 3 Detach the HiPath system from the wall 4 Remove the motherboard expansion cards and the optional modules Figure 4 70 HiPath 3550 after removing the motherboard expansion cards and the optio...

Page 659: ...iPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 6 Release the backplane from the rear of the HiPath system Figure 4 72 Releasing the backplane 7 Remove the backplane from the HiPath system a To remove the backplane pull it upwards and then press it back in the direction where there the power supply was b Remove the container of the HVT connection cable from the back of the backplane Hi Path 3550 only ...

Page 660: ...backplane forward and slide it upward out of the case 8 Insert the new backplane into the HiPath system 9 Attach the container for the Hvt cable to the back of the backplane 10 Mount the housing with the backplane on the baseplate of the system 11 Install the motherboard in the system and the backplane 12 Install the power supply 13 Install the expansion cards and optional modules in the HiPath sy...

Page 661: ...llows 1 Dconnect the HiPath system by unplugging the power cord from the wall socket 2 Remove the cable connectors from the motherboard the expansion cards and the optional modules 3 Pull out the HiPath system pull from the rack and remove the cover 4 Remove the motherboard expansion cards and the optional modules 5 Remove the UPSC DR power supply from the HiPath system Figure 4 73 HiPath 3500 aft...

Page 662: ...HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 6 Release the backplane from the rear of the HiPath system 7 Remove the backplane from the HiPath system a To remove the backplane bend the springs a little and push the backplane forward b Tilt the backplane forward and pull it upward and out of the case 8 Install the new backplane into the HiPath system ...

Page 663: ...ee image above c Fix the backplane by pressing the springs back into the original position 9 Install the motherboard in the system and the backplane 10 Install the UPSC DR power supply 11 Attach the cover of the system 12 Insert the expansion cards and optional modules in the HiPath system 13 Mount the HiPath system back into the rack 14 Attach the cable connectors again onto the motherboard expan...

Page 664: ...talling HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 4 132 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation inst_h3 fm Installing HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 ...

Page 665: ...ting Up HiPath 3000 Chapter contents This chapter covers the following topics Privacy and data security Topic Starting Up HiPath 3800 page 5 2 Starting Up HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 page 5 11 7 For startup and maintenance please follow the instructions on data protection and data security see Section 1 7 Privacy and Data Security ...

Page 666: ...ls provided Table 5 1 HiPath 3800 Startup Procedure Step Startup Activity Remarks 1 Supplying the System with Power page 5 2 Plugging in the power supply cable for the system cabinet s and positioning the switches for all LUNA2 power supplies to DC ON starting system boot 2 Carrying Out a System Reload page 5 6 3 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type page 5 7 4 No...

Page 667: ...ion is guaranteed up to approx 4 kV 2 Position all LUNA2 power supply switches to DC ON Note Startup does not begin until the switches on all LUNA2 units are in DC ON position 3 Monitor the RUN LED of the CBSAP The individual steps of the system boot Table 5 2 can be observed this way Table 5 2 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch...

Page 668: ...hen Missing or defective board No action Different board type The system does not automatically activate the board Underequipped or same board variant Board is activated The same station range is used Over equipped board vari ant Board is activated The old station range is activated and the ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end The ports are split if there is no contiguous st...

Page 669: ...ed Expand as required 2 Connect system to power sup ply A continuous numbering plan is generated as was the case when the system was first initialized Notes Changes to the extension numbers result in changes to the individual extension specific data Only those ports provided for in accordance with the maximum configuration are activated if the maximum line configuration is exceeded too many trunk ...

Page 670: ...ou do not hold down the reset switch for a full 5 seconds the system may perform a reset rather than a reload or may not reload properly The reset reload switch is tested by a Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA This FPGA is loaded by the processor when starting up the HiPath 3800 and is only fully functional after the loading process is complete If the reset reload switch is activated during loadi...

Page 671: ...r start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered You must now load the local language prior to country initialization using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E see information on multilingual text output in the Feature De scription HiPath 3000 5000 After carrying out the country initialization but before loading the required local lan guage the displays come up in German Table 5...

Page 672: ...ion per trunk If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil the option for saving the digits dialed and transmitting them via the system dial rule 1A is not activated This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the DTMF terminal and the trunk until it recognizes the ...

Page 673: ...ork or service provider Depending on the configuration type system station numbers should not be entered for point to multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000 for example Example Port number 98008 National number 2302 prefix without 0 International number 49 country code Station number type international Input procedure Table 5 4 Entering the System Number Step Input Description 1 95 ...

Page 674: ...are normally displayed If a different text appears Gateway not found for example this means that there is an error Correct the error by following the administration instructions for the relevant telephone Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 4 11 on all telephones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioni...

Page 675: ...arning Only authorized service personnel should start up the system 7 Caution For safety operate HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed Always use dummy panels C39165 A7027 B115 to close slots that are not equipped with boards Table 5 5 Startup Procedure Step Startup Activity Remarks 1 Supplying the System With Power page 5 12 starting system boot 2 Carrying Out a System Re...

Page 676: ...th 3300 systems is internally equipped with transient overvoltage protection up to approx 2 kV Since additional lightning protection is prescribed for Brazil the AC power of a system must be conducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection part number C39334 Z7052 C33 In this way tran sient overvoltage protection is guaranteed up to approx 4 kV 2 Monitor the Run LED of the central co...

Page 677: ...00 and the time 00 00 appear in the display on the system telephone If Then Missing or defective board No action Different board type The system does not automatically activate the board Underequipped or same board variant Board is activated The same station range is used Over equipped board vari ant Board is activated The old station range is activated and the ports associated with the new board ...

Page 678: ...he individual extension specific data Only those ports provided for in accordance with the maximum configuration are activated if the maximum line configuration is exceeded too many trunk boards A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk lines on one S0 board can result in gaps in line number ing This is because all board ports are initially acti vated as trunks and are only subsequently reco...

Page 679: ...uage and features and ensures that the system meets the coun try s conditions for approval In Germany no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the German country code by default The next step involves selecting the password type Input procedure Since the system software no longer provides all languages some systems no long er start up in the customary local la...

Page 680: ...call privileges ringback protection per trunk If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil the option for saving the digits dialed and transmitting them via the system dial rule 1A is not activated This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the DTMF terminal and th...

Page 681: ...th 3300 The system station number is determined by the network or service provider Depending on the configuration type system station numbers should not be entered for point to multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000 for example Example Port number 98008 National number 2302 prefix without 0 International number 49 country code Station number type international Input procedure Table ...

Page 682: ...umber date and time are normally displayed If a different text appears Gateway not found for example this means that there is an error Correct the error by following the administration instructions for the relevant telephone Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 4 11 on all telephones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the...

Page 683: ...paring for Installation page 6 16 Integrating the HiPath 5000 Server in the Customer LAN page 6 17 HiPath 5000Installing Standard Components page 6 18 Installing HiPath Fault Management page 6 26 Installing the TAPI Service Provider page 6 30 Verifying Installation page 6 32 Modifying HiPath 5000 Components Retro Fitting Updating Deleting page 6 34 Version wide Upgrading of an Existing HiPath 5000...

Page 684: ...tion service in a HiPath 3000 5000 network Presence Manager service for LED signaling of call processing station statuses and net work wide DSS keys Database Synchronization for HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E MS Windows based tool for system administration of all service and customer specific data by Service HiPath 3000 5000 Manager C MS Windows based tool for system administration of cus ...

Page 685: ...h 3500 HiPath 3000 PSTN IP Network HiPath 3500 Central administration unit with Feature Server Presence Manager Software Update Manager HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Inventory Manager HiPath Cordless Office optiPoint 500 OpenStage TDM Central resourcing of applications possibly installed on a separate PC such as OpenScape Xpressions OpenScape Contact Center HiPath Fault Management HiPath 5000 RSM RSM...

Page 686: ...administration tool does not communicate with the individual systems but exchanges data with the Feature Server The Feature Server ensures that the net worked HiPath 3000 systems receive synchronized CDB data The individual systems are accessed directly by HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E in the course of maintenance and online functions HG 1500 boards are still administered on a board specific basis us...

Page 687: ...ature Server Services and Routines CDB Synchronization HiPath 3000 server vsync exe Application Interface vaplx dll Call Address Resolu tion Update Server cars exe HG 1500 Registration Server regserver exe Server Control Layer MS Windows Service vsrv exe Server Database vdbaccess dll Socket Interface vsock dll Data Transfer Interface vadmtftp dll RemoteProcedureCall Interface FCT dll Event Log Tex...

Page 688: ...ents Component Function vsrv exe Basic Feature Server component As an MS Windows service it starts all other components vaplx dll Logical interface for applications Provides read only and read write access to CDB data cars exe The Call Address Resolution Server provides the HG 1500 boards with the call numbers of all HiPath 3000 systems nodes that belong to the net work Note Event 1027 confirms th...

Page 689: ...tables are updated and overwritten by the Feature Server after every administration activity Internal call numbers can be assigned more than once in a network using open numbering However to enable unique call number evaluation every HiPath 3000 system is assigned a unique node number A station in node A always dials a station in node B by entering the node number internal call number The Open num...

Page 690: ...sing Table 6 2 HW and SW Minimum Requirements for HiPath 5000 Component New system Upgrade an existing system to V9 Processor 3 GHz CPU Pentium III 1 GHz RAM space See Table 6 3 See Table 6 3 Hard disk 80 GB 18 GB Operating sys tem MS Windows Server 2000 or MS Windows Server 2003 MS Windows Server 2000 Interfaces 2 x serial 2 x serial Slots free PCI slots for S0 S2M boards for HPCO and HiPath Xpre...

Page 691: ...server Table 6 3 RAM Space of the HiPath 5000 Server Minimum RAM Up to 2 nodes Up to 8 nodes Up to 16 nodes Up to 32 nodes Up to 64 nodes1 1 Networks are currently released with up to 32 nodes Larger configurations can be released on a project specific basis HiPath 5000 V9 HiPath FM V3 0 Teledata Office V3 0 HiPath Software Man ager 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 1 5 GB 2 GB OpenScape Office Contact Center with...

Page 692: ... currently transmitted in a HiPath 3000 corporate network are also supported by HiPath 5000 with some enhancements in comparison to con ventional networking see General Features Central Attendant Console A central attendant console can be used in HiPath 2000 HiPath OpenOffice EE HiPath 3000 HiPath 5000 networks Platform wide busy signaling is also possible Automatic Routing HiPath 5000 can perform...

Page 693: ...ope of delivery and is installed on the HiPath 5000 server From here it is possible to have central administration of all communi cation platforms in a shared database An application running permanently on the feature serv er is used for the automatic administration and maintenance of the IP routing tables and the transmission of data to the individual communication platforms Network management in...

Page 694: ...ts 6 5 2 2 Bandwidth The bandwidth for voice must be available in the network at all times For this reason network measurement and analysis is carried out before installing the components Why Measure the Network The following data is required to calculate the required bandwidth for voice transmission in an IP network in relation to the number of simultaneous connections Bandwidth for voice informa...

Page 695: ...ult of the synchroni zation process configured in the system It is difficult to define an accurate value at the moment due to the lack of data from the field However the bandwidth requirement will in practice be well below 132 Kbps or there will be short term peaks during which this value will be required by the network In practice the most frequent application is the call up of key programming by...

Page 696: ...natural communication The effect is similar to that experienced with voice connections over satellite The maximum number of HOPs must not exceed 15 Priority control is a particularly efficient means of reducing the delay see next section Please proceed with caution if the network is operated using lines with a low bit rate for example con nection of a branch to headquarters at a rate of 128 Kbps T...

Page 697: ...cast traffic should be kept to a minimum The use of routers layer 3 switches to structure the network for example VPM or the use of layer 2 switches can help detect multicasting traffic 6 5 2 8 Requirements for Standalone Systems Switched or shared LAN Ethernet IEE 802 3 802 3 u with 10 or 100 Mbps Pure Microsoft TCP IP network not a Novell network with IPX SPX Fixed IP addresses no DHCP The bandw...

Page 698: ...artitions The main partition C should have a capacity of at least 4 GB and should be re served for the operating system and the HiPath 5000 software For safety reasons partitioning with the format FAT 16 32 is not permitted Hardware Make sure that no unnecessary hardware is connected to the server PC any sound cards should be removed Access privileg es To install HiPath 5000 you must log on to the...

Page 699: ...e LAN connection with a ping to another computer Integrate the HiPath 5000 in the Windows domain under Control Panel Network Identi fication a domain administrator account is required here Network analysis must be performed before the relevant systems and applications are installed to guarantee smooth operation in the IP customer network Network analysis determines the conditions under which the I...

Page 700: ...Client PC Standard component default setup 1 1 Standard components should generally always be installed and are therefore already selected in the master setup de fault setup MSDE 2000 SQL database with SP3 Yes No Yes TFTP Server Yes Yes Yes Common Web Service Yes Yes Yes HiPath Call Accounting GetAccount yes optional No No see Section 6 11 HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Yes Yes Yes HiPath 3000 5000 Ma...

Page 701: ...products within this grace period HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E comes with a customer specific file which is used by the Cus tomer License Agent CLA to generate a GPCF Grace Period Configuration File file This file ensures that the maximum expansion of all features that are subject to mandatory licensing is possible within the 30 day grace period The system or systems are not licensed The system fall...

Page 702: ...up exe 2 Select the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available Click OK The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to start the installation routine Important installation information is displayed This includes the latest information on installation Please read this information carefully 4 Click Next to proceed with the inst...

Page 703: ...00 7 The Select Features dialog appears Mark the components you want to install and unmark the ones you don t The components marked by default Default Setup are standard components that as a rule should always be installed For information on the exact compo nents to install refer to your order The subsequent description of the installation procedure relates to the default setup ...

Page 704: ...Click Next to start the copy procedure At this point your attention is drawn to the fact that a TAPI service provider must be installed for the current selection of components If this requirement is met click Yes to continue with the procedure If there is no TAPI service provider installed click No to cancel the procedure Install the TAPI service provider on the basis of the information in Section...

Page 705: ...ür den internen Gebrauch Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 Starting HiPath 5000 10 The File Transfer Folder appears Select the folder where you want to install the files Confirm the default folder c program files siemens hipath tftp files with Next or click Change to select a different folder ...

Page 706: ... Names dialog appears Enter the trap destinations if necessary and the HiPath Fault Management desktop com munity names The FM Reporting Client does not have its own user interface The trap destina tions and community names defined during installation may only be changed by uninstalling and then reinstalling the FM Reporting Client Users with sufficient knowledge of SNMP can change trap destinatio...

Page 707: ...ion HiPath 5000 Starting HiPath 5000 12 Click Next to proceed with the setup routine The User Configuration dialog appears Configure the user account for the license agents Customer License Agent CLA 13 Click Next to proceed with the setup routine 14 When installation is complete a dialog appears in which you can terminate the setup with Finish ...

Page 708: ...Windows Explorer under DVD drive let ter HiPath5000RSM setup exe 2 Select the language you require for the Setup browser German Germany and English USA versions are currently available Click OK The system is prepared for installation 3 Click Next to start the installation routine Important installation information is displayed This includes the latest information on installation Please read this i...

Page 709: ...ervice documentation 6 27 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 Starting HiPath 5000 7 The Select Features dialog appears Select the HiPath Fault Management components you want to install and deselect the ones you do not want to install ...

Page 710: ...re specified and if all neces sary components are installed 9 Click Next to start the copy procedure The software license agreement is displayed The license terms must be accepted before continuing with the setup 10 Confirm the license agreement with Yes 11 The Choose Destination Location dialog is displayed Select the folder where you want to install the Java Runtime Environment Confirm the defau...

Page 711: ...e licensing conditions for HiPath Fault Management are displayed The license terms must be accepted before continuing with the installation Click I accept the terms of the license agreement 15 Click Next to proceed with the installation routine The installation options are displayed Select the Server Client option 16 Continue installation with Next The Directory Name dialog is displayed Confirm th...

Page 712: ...nd Multi Node the required installation components are automatically preselected 4 Select the appropriate option and confirm with Next 5 The system starts to install the selected components When a component is successfully installed the associated configuration dialog opens You can set the required parameters here or postpone configuration until a later time Setup type Installation component TAPI ...

Page 713: ...tation 6 31 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 Starting HiPath 5000 6 When all of the selected components have been installed a final dialog is displayed in which you can conclude installation with Finish The TAPI Service Provider is now installed ...

Page 714: ...task schedulers and spoolers defining properties for memory devices displaying device configurations and adding new device drivers administering server applications and services for example DNS Domain Name System or DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Computer Management is displayed in a separate window like Windows Explorer The console structure for the navigation and service program select...

Page 715: ...n the HiPath 5000 server and any application servers available All events associated with the server s and its their applications are saved The events pro vide a quick and above all time specific overview of all relevant actions status information warning error etc To open the Event Viewer select Computer Management System Tools Event Viewer For more information see Section 12 4 12 Event log for H...

Page 716: ...tion 6 7 1 deleting all components features of the current HiPath 5000 installation When activated the Setup creates the relevant selection lists based on the current HiPath 5000 installation The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath 3000 5000 V4 0 or later Call data records must be evaluated with WinAccount before starting an update be cause updating uni...

Page 717: ...DB files of all connected systems see HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Help 3 Call up the HiPath 5000 State Viewer with Start Programs HiPath HiPath 5000 State Viewer 4 Exit the HiPath 5000 server by clicking Stop Server 5 Insert the installation CD The installation program is started via the autorun function Alternatively you can initiate Setup via Windows Explorer under CD ROM drive letter setup exe 6...

Page 718: ...onfirm the deletion of all installed components features Follow the on screen user prompts 10 Delete the following directories default paths are provided c Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL C Program Files Siemens HiPath DB Feature Server C Program Files Siemens HiPath HiPath5000 Note As these directories are not installed via Master Setup it is not possible to delete them via the setup mai...

Page 719: ...eatures interfaces and products which are subject to mandatory licensing within this grace period HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E comes with a customer specific file which is used by the Cus tomer License Agent CLA to generate a GPCF Grace Period Configuration File file This file ensures that the maximum expansion of all features that are subject to mandatory licensing is possible within the 30 day gra...

Page 720: ... MB The same values should be entered for the virtual memory s upper and lower thresholds so that the paging file does not have to be ex tended during operation Optimizing availability If the operating system crashes blue screen it creates a file con taining debugging information from the paging file the next time the system starts If the size of this file is the same size as the system s physical...

Page 721: ... HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 6 39 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Startup and Administration HiPath 5000 Optimizing Operating System Settings 6 9 2 Windows Server 2003 No information is available on how to optimize Windows Server 2003 ...

Page 722: ...computer name and use the Hosts file of Win dows for this purpose this file can be found at C WINDOWS system32 drivers etc host The computer name must be real and actually exist e g the computer name of the decentral ized PC and must be appended as an alias to the file mentioned above During the configu ration of HiPath 3000 Manager E with the correct address or the computer name all the func tion...

Page 723: ...ed computers used for remote connection are not correctly configured Changes to default DCOM settings and Windows Firewall settings can result in the security for other DCOM capable applications being insufficient Changes to default DCOM settings must be checked and approved by your system security administrator Contents This chapter contains the following sections Section 6 9 3 2 Windows Firewall...

Page 724: ...ues set by Dcomcnfg exe are used if a process does not provide its own security settings either programmed or via the registry values So also you can use Dcomcnfg exe to enable the security only for a certain application Domains and Rights What should be taken into account in particular is whether computer A and computer B belong to the same domain or different domains or whether neither of the tw...

Page 725: ...nd the dialog Component Services is displayed 2 Create the new user in the settings My Computer a In the tree view go down to Console Root Component Services Computers My Computer till the branchMy Computer is selected In addition the tree com ponents COM Applications DCOM Config Running Processes and Distributed Transaction Coordinator are displayed b Right click in the tree view on My Computer a...

Page 726: ...Double click DCOM Config A component list is displayed c Right click in the list on the component vsrv and then in the context menu click Prop erties The vsrv Properties dialog is displayed d Click the tab General and set the property Authentication Level to Default e Click the Security tab The tab Security contains Access Permissions and Launch and Activation Permissions f In Access Permissions c...

Page 727: ... keys can be found in the aforemen tioned Microsoft KB article 6 9 3 2 3 Editing UAC settings on computer B If computer B does not belong to any domain additional considerations come into play In Win dows Server 2008 Variants and especially Windows Vista or later UAC has an effect on con nections for user accounts without domains If you set up a connection to a decentralized computer through a use...

Page 728: ... click Modify 5 In the data field Value input the number 1 and then click OK 6 Close the registry editor 7 Then restart the decentralized computer to activate the new setting 6 9 3 3 Other considerations Hipath 3000 Manager E uses functions that set up a connection to the registry and to the Ser vice Manager of the decentralized computer Error correction During the error correction the user can ch...

Page 729: ... the networked nodes receive syn chronized CDB data The Feature Server is an MS Windows service that automatically starts at the same time as the HiPath 5000 RSM HG 1500 boards are still administered on a board specific basis using Web based man agement WBM The administration of IP networking with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E is divided into the following steps a Configuring the individual nodes bel...

Page 730: ...he Feature server ensures that the networked nodes receive synchronized CDB data To facilitate this a central customer database the so called server net file must be created for IP networking 6 10 1 1 Creating a Central Customer Database for IP Networking An empty server net file must be created in order to create a central customer database for IP networking Procedure 1 Start HiPath 3000 5000 Man...

Page 731: ... Configuration 3 The Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Server dialog appears 4 The PC to be used as the HiPath 5000 server should be entered in the Server field Note If the required software is not installed on the specified PC the error message Hi Path 5000 RSM AllServe Server not Installed on this PC appears 5 Click Server Manager to create an empty server net file 6 Then click Close ...

Page 732: ...istributed to the various nodes The prerequisite for adding nodes HiPath 3000 to a HiPath 3000 5000 network is the success ful installation see Chapter 4 Installing HiPath 3000 and startup see Chapter 5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 of these systems Procedure 1 To select the node to be added to the CDB call File HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe New HiPath 3000 2 The Enter Source dialog appears 3 Select the appr...

Page 733: ...data in node option is activated the service and substitution codes are copied from the CDB firstly created to all other CDB files of the node belonging to IP networking 4 Clicking Finish opens the Transfer dialog Here specify the node whose data should be read 5 To add the node invoke File HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Server 6 The Transfer HiPath 5000 RSM AllServe Se...

Page 734: ...program 6 11 1 Parameters for Call Data Export For HiPath 5000 you can forward the existing call data for example for external call charge calculation The call data is forwarding in an ASCII file Proceed as follows to set the parameters for call data export 1 Start the GetAccount Administration program The following dialog appears Refer to the Help for HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E for additional inf...

Page 735: ... record Each call data record line is ended with CR LF Field name Meaning Mode Select the call data forwarding mode in this list field The following modes are available None save call charge data The call data is not written to the transfer file Select this option Save call charge data The call data is written to the transfer file The modes Export calls with calculation and Export and save calls w...

Page 736: ...d with leading blanks 5 23 28 6 Internal extension number right aligned with leading blanks 6 29 33 5 Call duration in seconds 7 34 41 8 Call duration Format hh mm ss for example 00 04 34 8 42 66 25 For incoming calls external caller number For outgoing calls external call number dialed including the call by call number left aligned with succeeding blanks 9 67 77 11 Number of tariff units right al...

Page 737: ...cess ing Switch to the folder containing the transfer file default C coldir Rename the transfer file default gcallserve The renamed file is now available for ex ternal processing The transfer file is automatically recreated in the specified folder with the file name saved in the parameters and can be renamed again at a later point To avoid uncontrolled folder growth with the transfer file an optio...

Page 738: ...ply UPS was certified for use with HiPath 5000 The P 500 UPS is fed through the AC power cord to the HiPath 5000 server The device bridges power failures lasting 5 10 minutes by means of an integrated battery P 500 UPS Front and Rear Panel 7 Caution For safety reasons and for protection against guarantee claims changes to the UPS settings may only be performed by specially trained technicians The ...

Page 739: ...0 V systems 2 increases the response voltage by 5 3 reduces the response voltage by 5 Switch positions normally DIP FIX 1 off DIP FIX 2 and 3 on 6 Reset key deactivates the acoustic alarm if the input voltage fails that is when using the UPS This alarm cannot be deactivated if the battery voltage falls under a certain value activates the UPS cold start To protect the battery from deep discharging ...

Page 740: ...and Administration HiPath 5000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 6 58 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation start_h5 fm Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 ...

Page 741: ...called gateways provide the HiPath 5000 with interfaces for trunk and tie trunk connections to the telecommunications network For HiPath 3000 V9 HiPath 3800 HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems can be used as gateways Chapter contents This chapter covers the following topics Topic Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway page 7 2 Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway page 7 5 Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway...

Page 742: ...let strip with overvoltage protection with part number C39334 Z7052 C33 is absolutely mandatory The AC power of the system cabinet s must be conducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection Table 7 1 HiPath 3800 as a GW Procedure for System Installation and Startup Step Activity Remarks Installing HiPath 3800 19 Inch Cabinet 1 Selecting the Installation Site page 4 20 generally deter...

Page 743: ... page 5 2 Plugging in the system cabinet s starting system boot Note for Brazil only The AC power of a system cabinet is internally equipped with transient overvoltage protection up to approx 2kV Since additional lightning pro tection is prescribed for Brazil the AC power of the system cabinet s must be con ducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection part number C39334 Z7052 C33 In...

Page 744: ... each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the link is defective Replace the terminal or fix the link Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 4 11 on all tele phones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is func tioning properly Test IP configuration Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gatewa...

Page 745: ...ress is assigned If an IP address responds then this address cannot be used again 7 Caution for Brazil only The use of the outlet strip with overvoltage protection with part number C39334 Z7052 C33 is absolutely mandatory The AC power of the system must be conduct ed through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection Table 7 2 HiPath 3500 as a GW Procedure for System Installation and Startup Ste...

Page 746: ... page 4 123 Startup of HiPath 3500 Section 5 2 1 Supplying the System With Power page 5 12 starting system boot Note for Brazil only The AC power of the system is internally equipped with tran sient overvoltage protection up to approx 2 kV Since additional lightning protec tion is prescribed for Brazil the AC power of the system must be conducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protectio...

Page 747: ... each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the link is defective Replace the terminal or fix the link Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 4 11 on all tele phones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is func tioning properly Test IP configuration Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gatewa...

Page 748: ...ress is assigned If an IP address responds then this address cannot be used again 7 Caution for Brazil only The use of the outlet strip with overvoltage protection with part number C39334 Z7052 C33 is absolutely mandatory The AC power of the system must be conduct ed through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection Table 7 3 HiPath 3300 as a GW Procedure for System Installation and Startup Ste...

Page 749: ... Section 5 2 1 Supplying the System With Power page 5 12 starting system boot Note for Brazil only The AC power of the system is internally equipped with tran sient overvoltage protection up to approx 2 kV Since additional lightning protec tion is prescribed for Brazil the AC power of the system must be conducted through the outlet strip with overvoltage protection part number C39334 Z7052 C33 In ...

Page 750: ... each telephone If a display does not appear either the telephone or the link is defective Replace the terminal or fix the link Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12 4 11 on all tele phones Checking for proper system booting Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is func tioning properly Test IP configuration Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gatewa...

Page 751: ...ng Licensing page 8 11 Licensing Scenarios page 8 17 HiPath 3000 as a Standalone System page 8 17 Networked HiPath 3000 Systems without HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 18 Networked HiPath 3000 Systems with HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 19 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V9 HiPath 5000 V9 page 8 22 Merging Standalone Systems HiPath 3000 to Form a Network with HiPath 5000 RSM page 8 25 Removing a Standalone System from a ...

Page 752: ...operates with regular licenses The system does not use the grace period licenses in this status only the licenses that were downloaded via Manager E This guarantees that an emergency call can be made in every system status Licensing procedure Version 5 0 and later of HiPath 3000 5000 uses a new centralized licensing procedure HiPath License Management The procedure is used in all HiPath products f...

Page 753: ...ecific data Customer License Agent CLA 4 License file is validated 5 License file is analyzed Customer License Client CLC for exampleHiPath 3000 5000 Manager E 6 Individual licenses are distributed to all products which are subject to man datory licensing 3 License file is activated License Management System Central License Server CLS https www central license server com Customer License Manager C...

Page 754: ...cense file Default values in unlicensed state Distribution of Licenses with Hi Path 3000 5000 Manager E Feature name Maximum number Mini mum number During grace period After grace period Net work wide Per board Per port per de vice boards per system HiPath Com Scendo Li censes System Clients SIP Clients HiPath 3000 V9 Com Scendo IP Workpoint HiPath 3000 V9 Com Scendo Se curity 2000 0 2000 0 HiPath...

Page 755: ... HiPath 3000 V9 BS4 Channel 6420 One li cense one regis tration 0 6420 2 B chan nels per BS4 0 10 li cen ses per port HG 1500 V3 0 VPN Virtual Private Net work LWCA package for HiPath 3000 V9 HiPath 3000 V9 LWCA HG 1500 1 0 1 0 Only on one HG 1500 board optiClient At tendant for Hi Path 3000 V9 HiPath 3000 V9 optiCli ent Atten dant 6 0 6 0 Max 6 on a central board Xpressions Compact Mo bility for ...

Page 756: ...s for OpenScape Office are available in addition to the existing licenses of the Hi Path 3000 5000 system The following licenses are supported for OpenScape Office and for CSP CSTA service provider Basic licenses OpenScape Office V3 HX Basis 5 1 system license to operate OpenScape Office HX 5 licenses for Standard User 1 license for OpenScape Office Directory Service Contains the OpenDirectory Bas...

Page 757: ... 384 licenses The VoiceMail license and the Standard User license cannot be used simulta neously myPortal for Outlook Integrated in Microsoft Outlook 1 license per user up to 384 licenses In order to use myPortal for Outlook a Standard User license is necessary If more myPortal for Outlook licenses are required than the number of Standard User licenses available an additional Standard User license...

Page 758: ... LAN messages of the Message Center The myAttendant application can therefore only be started with the following preconditions HiPath 3000 includes at least 1 voicemail license and myAttendant licenses or HiPath 3000 includes 1 myAttendant license and 1 stan dard user license for every instance of myAttendant Application Launcher For a call related control of applications on a client PC in the cas...

Page 759: ...0 customers already using OpenScape Office but without Contact Center Only the Contact Center is enabled The grace period is 90 days after which the license is automatically disabled If regular licenses are enabled for the Table 8 3 Contact center licenses Contact center license Description Contact Center basic li cense package Distribution of incoming calls contains 21 pre configured reports For ...

Page 760: ...HX Base Licence Package and is valid system wide Therefore only one license is required It serves to activate the feature OpenDirectoryServer The OSO V3 HX OpenDirectory Base license is a prerequisite for the OSO V3 HX OpenDirectory Connector license OSO V3 HX OpenDirectory Connector This license contains the number of possi ble Backend connectors for the OpenDirectoryServer A maximum of 4 license...

Page 761: ...nterfaces and products that are subject to mandatory licensing must take place during this period The system falls into licensing default if licensing is not performed within the 30 day grace pe riod This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced functionality The activation of a grace period is recorded by the Customer License Agent CLA and in the system CD...

Page 762: ...r online help The license file in XML format contains information about all products that are subject to man datory licensing and the MAC address with which these licenses are linked Feature IDs define the number of licenses available and the length of time for which they are valid A signature ensures that subsequent manipulation of the license file content is always detected Invalid changes to th...

Page 763: ...0 systems with HiPath 5000 RSM Service PC with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Customer License Agent CLA Customer License Client CLC HiPath 3000 Customer database CDB with licenses HiPath 5000 RSM with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Customer License Agent CLA Customer License Client CLC Customer data base CDB with li censes Networked HiPath 3000 systems Validation decryption and analysis of the license fi...

Page 764: ...r License Agent CLA installed on the PC opens the license file that corresponds to the MAC address Licenses The content of the license file is displayed In a configuration without HiPath 5000 RSM these are the licenses for the open CDB and the corresponding node HiPath 3000 Licenses The content of the license file is displayed In a network with HiPath 5000 RSM these are the licenses for the server...

Page 765: ...default value for each feature is displayed Expiration date The date displayed here specifies when the validity of the licenses assigned for this feature is due to expire For Base station tab only Type Slot Port The board type the slot in which the board is inserted and the board port used are displayed BS Type The base station type is displayed Name The name of the base station is displayed Note ...

Page 766: ... from the CDB of the first node the licensing dialog for this node must be opened first and as a minimum requirement licensing must be performed using a gcpf file The first node must then be added to the HiPath 3000 5000 network The Feature Server now has its grace period li cense If the Feature Server is not licensed through the first node within one hour the server automatically stops operating ...

Page 767: ...ble Determine the MAC address of the control board of the HiPath 3000 system requiring licensing 2 HiPath License Management Invoke the Central License Server CLS via https www central license server com Select the language version for the License Management Center Log on by entering the user name and password 3 Activate the Generate and Download License Key function under Management of Available ...

Page 768: ...Next 8 Before generating a license key the following content of the displayed dialog must be observed Legal notice The licensing conditions must be accepted Notes Notes on the generation procedure can be entered here A distinction is made here between internal notes only accessible to users authorized to create licenses and customer notes generally accessible Registered company and user Company an...

Page 769: ...eset is performed at 10 00 p m The time of the daily check is redefined as a result The licensing check begins at 10 00 p m every day with immediate effect Each additional reset results in the time of the daily check being redefined The system distinguishes between the following two types of error The Feature Server is unable to reach the first node needed for licensing The 30 day Li cense Failure...

Page 770: ...ed 6 In the MAC Address input field enter the MAC address for the HiPath 3000 control board as specified in step 1 In the Number field define the number of licenses to be generated for each feature Click Next 7 The customer and the user contact partner specified for this transaction are dis played If there are still no entries available these can be selected using the search mask for companies and...

Page 771: ...nse key are displayed Display tab Type and number of licensed features customer specific informa tion Transactions tab Actions performed for each feature 11 Select Download In the subsequent dialog specify the storage location for the license key you want to download Section 8 2 4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Step Activity Remarks ...

Page 772: ...previous designation HiPath 5000 RSM Features that were not previously subject to mandatory licensing cannot be migrated The base station BS4 is a new product DIUN2 S30810 Q2196 X DIUT2 S30810 Q2226 X100 TS2N S30810 Q2913 X300 and TS2R S30810 K2913 Z300 are new boards Up to now no li cense was required for the IVM announcement feature These features are released with the maximum configuration foll...

Page 773: ...nses and Certificates and License Key function under Management of Used Licenses Different search criteria are displayed in order to invoke the licenses to be converted B channels of HG 1500 boards 5 The MAC address locking ID of a HG 1500 board determined under step 1 should be entered in the Locking ID input field Click the Search button to display a list of the licenses belonging to the MAC add...

Page 774: ...nse key is upgraded 11 After successful execution the message License Key Generation Complete ap pears The upgrade information and the information about the license key will be dis played Note The number of pre installed HG 1500 B channels is no longer displayed nut only the effective total for the released licenses 12 Upgrading involves either a single HiPath 3000 system or several networked sys ...

Page 775: ...elect the relevant license key and click the Display Details button Details on the selected license key are displayed Display tab Type and number of licensed features customer specific informa tion Transactions tab Actions performed for each feature 17 Select Download In the subsequent dialog specify the storage location for the license key you want to download Section 8 2 4 describes the procedur...

Page 776: ...r notes generally accessible Registered company and user Company and user specific data is displayed Rehost details MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board Licenses to be used The outcome of this procedure is displayed Example HG 1500 V2 V3 6 features Licenses will be upgraded as a result of this transaction 6 features Licenses will be disabled as a result of this transaction This means that ...

Page 777: ...nse files and distribute the licenses to other individual MAC addresses 12 In the Locking ID input field enter the control board MAC address to which the li cense key is linked see step 6 Click the Search button to display a list of the license keys belonging to the MAC ad dress 13 Select the relevant license key and click the Display Details button Details on the selected license key are displaye...

Page 778: ...board Procedure Step Activity Remarks 1 HiPath License Management Invoke the Central License Server CLS via https www central license server com Select the language version for the License Management Center Log on by entering the user name and password 2 Call the Rehost Licenses function under Management of Used Licenses Different search criteria are displayed in order to call up the licenses to b...

Page 779: ...iPath 3000 control board has been deactivated for all six licenses Click the Execute button A new license key is generated 7 After successful execution the message License Key Generation Complete ap pears The generation information and license key data is displayed 8 Invoke the License Management Center homepage 9 Activate the View Used Licenses and Certificates and License Key function under Mana...

Page 780: ...eplaced the CDB must be trans ferred to HiPath 3000 A warning will appear that the MAC address is invalid All li censes become invalid if the CDB is installed The system goes into default and fea tures that are subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced functionality The new license key see step 12 must be used to achieve valid licensing Section 8 2 4 describes the procedure for distr...

Page 781: ...000 system In order to ensure unique licens ing the license file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board Procedure Figure 8 3 Licensing procedure of the optiClient Attendant V9 at HiPath 3000 V9 Step Activity Remarks 1 Read the HiPath 3000 V9 customer database 2 Read out the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board 3 Enter the LAC and MAC address at the CLS in order to ...

Page 782: ...ttendants can be installed However HiPath 3000 moni tors the number of licensedoptiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure Depending on the model up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time a 30 day grace period begins Dur ing this time all HiPath 3000 features that require licensing including optiClient At tendant can be op...

Page 783: ...File GPCF is created a flag is set in the system CDB and the Customer License Agent CLA to indicate that a GPCF file was created This en sures that the 30 day period cannot be extended and the GPCF file cannot be regenerated To guarantee the security and consistency of the product licenses generated changes to the system time on the PC of an installed Customer License Agent CLA must not exceed one...

Page 784: ...Licensing Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 8 34 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation licensing fm Protection Against License Manipulation ...

Page 785: ...ontents This chapter covers the following topics Topic HiPath 3000Expanding page 9 2 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3800 page 9 2 Connecting a Printer page 9 4 Inserting Powerbox PB3000 page 9 6 Connecting Special Equipment page 9 25 Upgrading HiPath 3000 page 9 30 Hardware Upgrade page 9 30 Upgrading from V8 to V9 page 9 32 Upgrade HiPath 3000 for Signaling Payload encryption SPE page 9 3...

Page 786: ... Caution To ensure that the system operates without blocking you must follow the rules in Section 4 1 5 concerning board configuration Table 9 1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards If Then Inserting new board in free slot Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial startup Section 4 1 5 6 System with default numbering plan The station numbers from the new boa...

Page 787: ...rd or you can delete it and reset the default state Copying is not possible for trunk boards Replacing with a dif ferent board type The system does not automatically activate the board After removing the old board you can delete it from the database us ing HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or Assistant T After you have inserted the new board the system activates it as if it had been inserted into a free ...

Page 788: ...nter Information on assigning V 24 interfaces from other systems is provided in the board descrip tions in Chapter 3 7 Caution Follow the safety and operating instructions provided by the printer manufacturer Figure 9 1 Sample Connection of a CDR Printer to HiPath 3000 CDR printer Connection cables S30267 Z23 A100 10m S30267 Z23 A500 50m HiPath 3000 Backplane X7 8 slot cabinets 25 pin con nector p...

Page 789: ...ice documentation 9 5 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000Expanding Output formats For information about the output formats compressed or uncompressed for call detail record ing central see HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description ...

Page 790: ...pped with 4 batteries each 12 V 7 Ah and or the LUNA2 power supply The PB3000 the batteries and the LUNA2 power supply are supplied in a separate package The batteries should be installed as described in Section 9 1 3 6 1 Only use batteries ap proved for HiPath 3000 The LUNA2 power supply should be installed as described in Section 9 1 3 6 2 7 Danger The Powerbox PB3000 must be operated with a clo...

Page 791: ...3000Expanding 9 1 3 1 PB3000 Control Display and Connecting Elements Front panel Figure 9 2 1 Switch for activating and deactivating the line voltage 2 Switch for activating and deactivating the LUNA2 power supply ON left switch position LED lights up green for more information on LUNA2 see Section 3 2 12 3 LED LUNA2 Figure 9 2 Front Panel of the PB3000 1 2 3 ...

Page 792: ...ned F1 and F2 Fuse 2 5 A T X1 and X2 Connection to HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 UPSC D UPSC DR F3 Fuse for battery 16 A T X3 Output for the battery to the external loads HiPath 3000 X7 Output for the battery XBatt Powerbox Controller PBC battery connection XBatt Input for X7 battery Powerbox Controller PBC connection 3 Switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage F...

Page 793: ...be ordered separately 4 x 12 V 7 Ah batteries 4 x V39113 W5123 E891 optional Power supply LUNA2 S30122 K7686 M1 optional The LUNA2 has to be set to mode 2a to work probably with a Power Box PB3000 How to set the LUNA2 mode please refer to Section 3 2 12 LUNA2 Connection cable for PB3000 with batteries and LUNA2 Depending on the system one of the following connection cables is used in addition to t...

Page 794: ...Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 9 10 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation exup fm HiPath 3000Expanding ...

Page 795: ...ervice documentation 9 11 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000Expanding HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 PB3000 is connected via connection cable C39195 A7985 B37 HiPath 3800 PB3000 is connected via connection cable C39195 Z7985 B11 ...

Page 796: ...ng on the system HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 PB3000 is connected via connection cable C39195 A7985 B24 Note To avoid system errors and failures connection cable C39195 A7985 B24 must not be plugged in at the X2 jack on PB3000 see figure below HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 PB3000 is connected via connection cable C39195 A7985 B37 Note To avoid system errors and failures connection cable C39195 A7985 B37 must...

Page 797: ...S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 9 13 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000Expanding HiPath 3800 PB3000 is connected via connection cable C39195 Z7985 B11 ...

Page 798: ...harging times when using the PB3000 with 48 V 7 Ah batteries and LUNA2 power supply at maximal continuous current less than 2A for all loads Example PB3000 HiPath 3300 3500 UPS bridging time 1 h 30 min Battery charging time 2 h Example PB3000 HiPath 3800 UPS bridging time 30 min Use the power cable to ground the Powerbox PB3000 Fixed separate grounding is not required Table 9 2 Technical Specifica...

Page 799: ...exup fm A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 9 15 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000Expanding Battery charging time 2 h ...

Page 800: ...7620 06 2012 9 16 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation exup fm HiPath 3000Expanding 9 1 3 6 Powerbox PB3000 with batteries and LUNA2 The following figure shows the position of the four batteries and the LUNA2 power supply inside the PB3000 Figure 9 4 PB3000 with batteries and LUNA2 ...

Page 801: ...the LUNA2 power supply and the power supply unit of the system Block diagram of PB3000 with batteries without LUNA2 Figure 9 5 PB3000 with Batteries Block Diagram 7 Caution When storing a PB3000 equipped with batteries or if it is inactive for a long period of time remove the battery fuse F3 Fuse for battery 16 A T at the rear of the PB3000 housing Powerbox PB3000 must not be transported be the ba...

Page 802: ...ram of PB3000 with batteries and LUNA2 Figure 9 6 PB3000 with Batteries and LUNA2 Block Diagram 7 Caution When storing a PB3000 equipped with batteries or if it is inactive for a long period of time remove the battery fuse F3 Fuse for battery 16 A T on the rear of the PB3000 housing Powerbox PB3000 must not be transported be the batteries installed The batteries must first be removed ...

Page 803: ...prohibited Old batteries with this symbol are utilizable economic units and must be re cycled Old batteries that are not recycled are to be disposed of as special refuse in accordance with all requirements Step Activity 1 Turn the switch for the line voltage on the front of the PB3000 housing and the switch for the battery voltage on the back of the PB3000 housing to the Off po sition see Section ...

Page 804: ...documentation exup fm HiPath 3000Expanding 6 Remove the mounting screw A on the battery retainer B 7 Remove the battery retainer and set aside 8 Insert the battery carefully and connect it To do this slide the eight cable connec tor lugs D carefully onto the two connection contacts on each of the four batter ies Step Activity A B D ...

Page 805: ...the plug in battery module into the left housing compartment up to the limit stop 12 Screw on the front panel of the PB3000 To do so tighten the four screws 13 Connect all of the power and connection cables of the PB3000 14 Insert the battery fuse on the rear of the PB3000 housing see Section 9 1 3 1 15 Turn the switch for the line voltage in the front panel of the PB3000 and the switch for the ba...

Page 806: ... the Off position see Section 9 1 3 1 2 Remove the fuse on the rear of the PB3000 housing see Section 9 1 3 1 3 Unplug all of the power and connection cables of the PB3000 4 Remove the front panel of the PB3000 to do so remove the four screws 5 Push LUNA2 into the right housing compartment up to the limit stop 6 Screw on the front panel of the PB3000 To do so tighten the four screws 7 Connect all ...

Page 807: ...h to fit securely behind the mounting bracket The wall mounting point wall and screw must be suitable to support 90kg Step Activity 1 Drill a hole in the selected wall insert a wall anchor in the hole and screw in the respective screw 2 Screw the angle brackets A and B for the PB3000 onto the base of the device Note In the process pay attention to the precise seat of the angle brackets in the cent...

Page 808: ... PB3000 with two screws on both sides left and right of the frame of the 19 inch cabinet Note Necessary height units for 19 inch cabinet assembly 4 HE one height unit HE corresponds to approx 1 7 43 mm 2 Attach both angle brackets B to the PB3000 with 2 screws on both sides left and right 3 Insert the PB3000 between the angel brackets in the 19 inch cabinet to the limit stop 4 Secure the two angle...

Page 809: ...e telephone are possible without the support of the opener and signal functions Figure 9 7 Connection Options for Entrance Telephones The new central control boards CBCC S30810 Q2935 A301 and CBRC S30810 Q2935 Z301 only support TFE S Adapter S30122 K7696 T313 Figure 9 8 Direct Connection of Entrance Telephones HiPath 3000 Connection via ET entrance telephone adapter and amplifier ET adapter Amplif...

Page 810: ...em DoorCom Analog behaves like an analog tele phone DTMF tone dialing detection and control It can be operated with DTMF signals DoorCom Analog can function only in combination with the following components DoorCom Analog DCA 612 0 Siedle Vario TLM 612 entrance telephone Switching remote control interface DCSF 600 For the voice connection of an internal user to the entrance telephone Without this ...

Page 811: ... E Device control features open doors select entrance telephone etc can be programmed on procedure keys The stored DTMF signal sequence is sent to the application DoorCom Analog Set up station Stations Parameters Extension Type Standard Flags Call waiting rejection on System parameters Flags DTMF automatic Remote station telephone Set up station Stations Parameters Flags Call waiting rejection off...

Page 812: ...equire level adaptation Connection to an analog station port over an ET adapter Note The ET adapter requires a 12V power supply DC or AC Connection to an analog trunk circuit Connecting speakers to an analog station port Figure 9 10 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Station Port 12V power supply 12V power supply HiPath 3000 SLA SLAS ET HiPath 3000 SLA SLAS Amplifier T R Active spea kers only ET T R...

Page 813: ...ur für den internen Gebrauch Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 HiPath 3000Expanding Connecting speakers to an analog trunk port Figure 9 11 Connecting Speakers to an Analog Trunk Port HiPath 3000 TML TLA HiPath 3000 TML TLA Amplifier T R Active speakers only T R REAL STRB Starting contact ...

Page 814: ...e Telekom AG only The CBCP board S30810 Q2935 B201 must be replaced by a CBCC board S30810 Q2935 A301 Multimedia card MMC For the operation of HiPath 3000 5000 V9 an MMC with minimum 128 MB is required It is not possible to upgrade HiPath 3550 to HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3350 to HiPath 3300 This would require replacing the complete system System Control board necessary for HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and h...

Page 815: ...isted in the following table are necessary for using the HG 1500 function ality with HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher Unnamed HG 1500 boards must be replaced System HG 1500 board required for HiPath 3000 5000 V5 0 and higher HiPath 3800 STMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HXGS3 S30810 Q2943 X S30810 Q2943 X1 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 HXGS3 S30810 K2943 Z1 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 HXGR3 S3...

Page 816: ...ections Individual EVM announcements in the case of upgrades In the case of an upgrade from HiPath 3000 V8 to V9 the individual announcements and mes sages are deleted 9 2 2 2 Upgrading a HiPath 3000 Standalone System Procedure 1 Upgrade all HG 1500 boards to V9 2 Convert the customer database CDB and reload it together with the V9 system software 3 Install new licenses The upgrade is complete HiP...

Page 817: ... standalone systems have been upgraded you can upgrade HiPath 5000 RSM on site To do this add all systems nodes belonging to the network to HiPath 5000 RSM 4 Put the network into service with HiPath 3000 5000 V9 commission the Feature server service 5 Install new licenses The upgrade is complete 9 2 2 4 Upgrading a HiPath 3000 System Networked with HiPath 2000 Procedure 1 Upgrade each system that ...

Page 818: ...b Convert the customer database CDB and reload it together with the V9 system soft ware 2 Gateway Call Flag Always use DSP for the HiPath 4000 route HiPath 3000 Manager E Settings Lines networking Special Set the flag if the H 323 protocol is used for networking old versions of HiPath 4000 Note As HiPath 4000 is not EFC enabled activating this flag sets up gateway connec tions to the HiPath 4000 s...

Page 819: ... Signaling Payload Encryption feature except to HiPath 3000 V6 0 systems which have an EFC enabled HG 1500 and EFC enabled IP terminals Upgrade of all HG 1500 gateways to V9 Upgrade of the HiPath 3000 5000 to V9 The VoIP Security feature must be deactivated before upgrading a HiPath 3000 5000 V9 to HiPath 3000 5000 V7 This is necessary due to the fact that this feature is not compatible with the S...

Page 820: ...d by TLS during transmission of user data Due to the proprietary encryption protocols used for IPDA and CTI connections Due to SRTP SRTCP Higher network traffic due to periodic downloads of CRL Certificate Revocation List or delta CRL by each Gateway Higher network traffic due to recently introduced protocols H 235 Annex D for DMC Slave connections MIKEY messages Additional data due to protocol ex...

Page 821: ...ccounts for an additional increase of 10 bytes This brings the overall increase to 80 bytes Voice codec Sample du ration Payload Ethernet data packet size RTP Ethernet bandwidth incl pream ble SRTP Ethernet bandwidth incl pream ble SRTP Increased Ethernet bandwidth ms bytes bytes Kbps Kbps G 711 20 160 240 92 96 4 3 40 320 400 78 80 2 6 60 480 560 73 3 74 7 1 9 G 723 1 30 24 104 25 1 27 7 10 4 G 7...

Page 822: ...f SPE This table can be used to calculate the additional system load resulting from the Signaling Payload Encryption SPE feature Feature Max number of voice channels per DSP Loss HG 1500 STMI2 HG 1500 HXGS3 HXGR3 Standard 16 8 0 QDC 16 8 6 SRTP 12 6 20 DMC 12 6 25 QDC SRTP 12 6 24 QDC DMC 12 6 28 SRTP DMC 10 5 37 QDC SRTP DMC 10 5 39 Feature Approximate data volume Explanations TLS session These a...

Page 823: ...ends on the theoretically unlimited number of CRL entries revoked certificates The entry is 40 bytes in size ASN 1 enoded therefore for example CRL with 250 entries 10 KB CRL with 1000 entries 40 KB CorNet TC TS 70 bytes call Key for DMC and display updates CorNet NQ 60 bytes call Security procedure and key for DMC H 225 RAS 10 bytes call Security H 235 Annex D 10 bytes packet Authentication code ...

Page 824: ...Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 9 40 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation exup fm Upgrading HiPath 3000 ...

Page 825: ...ces and Adapters page 10 32 OpenStage Accessories page 10 38 OpenStage PhoneAdapter Headsets optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S page 10 47 optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 410 S Telephones page 10 50 optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy S optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S optiPoint 410 standard optiPoint...

Page 826: ...00 page 10 81 optiPoint 500 Telephones page 10 82 optiPoint 500 entry optiPoint 500 economy not for U S optiPoint 500 basic optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 standard SL for U S only optiPoint 500 advance Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000 Connection Ports on the Bottom of the Telephone USB 1 1 Interface optiPoint 500 Add On Devices page 10 93 optiPoint key module optiPoint BLF Possible Co...

Page 827: ...page 10 116 optiPoint WL2 professional optiPoint WL2 professional S page 10 117 Attendant Console Versions page 10 123 OpenStage Attendant page 10 123 optiPoint Attendant page 10 124 optiClient Attendant V8 page 10 125 Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office page 10 129 Gigaset SL3 professional page 10 129 Gigaset S4 professional page 10 130 Gigaset M2 professional page 10 131 Logging Mobile ...

Page 828: ...nd the display guarantee convenient and interactive operation 3 way navigator in OpenStage 20 Programmable keys in OpenStage 30 The function is displayed to the left of the keys on a paper label Programmable touch sensor keys next to the display illuminated and a 5 way navigator in OpenStage 40 The function is displayed to the left of the keys on the display Programmable touch sensor keys next to ...

Page 829: ...version larger data packets such as video or audio data packets can be transferred to the workstation PC that is connected to the network via the OpenStage terminal This reduces spending on in house ca bling and the IP network and at the same time increases network performance The gigabit Ethernet switch can only be used to advantage if the entire corporate network sup ports gigabit technology CAT...

Page 830: ...ain features Figure 10 1 OpenStage 10 Feature Description Pre programmed func tion keys Three audio keys for increasing the volume Activating deactivating the loudspeaker decreasing the volume Dialing keypad For entering digits 0 to 9 pound and asterisk symbols letters punc tuation marks and special characters Programmable keys 3 keys Can be programmed as function DSS or trunk keys by service pers...

Page 831: ...03 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation 10 7 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Workpoint Clients OpenStage Product Family Additional features Open listening Wall mounting Feature Description ...

Page 832: ... Three audio keys for decreasing the volume and brightening the display contrast activating deactivating the loudspeaker increasing the volume and darkening the display contrast Mailbox key for checking voicemail Menu key for the communication system s Service menu Dialing keypad For entering digits 0 to 9 pound and asterisk symbols letters punc tuation marks and special characters Navigation keys...

Page 833: ...list of missed calls are displayed in chronological order starting with the old est call Programmable keys Eight keys Each key can be programmed either as a function key or as a DSS key Add on device OpenStage Key Module 15 18 programmable keys Each key can be programmed either as a function key or as a DSS key A maximum of one OpenStage Key Module 15 can be connect ed to the telephone Port UP0E A...

Page 834: ...riant OpenStage 20 E without full duplex speakerphone mode OpenStage 20 OpenStage 20 G gigabit variant Main features Figure 10 3 OpenStage 20 Feature Connection variant CorNet IP HFA TDM General fea tures Tilt LCD graphics display 24 x 2 character resolution monochrome multi functional 3 way navigator General fea tures 7 pre programmed function keys Disconnect call forwarding redial service applic...

Page 835: ...missed calls are displayed in chronological order starting with the old est call Open listening Suitable for wall mounting Interfaces Integrated Ethernet switch to connect a PC LAN port 10 100 Base T IP features CorNet IP HFA based on H 323 Security and Encryption for H Series Multimedia Terminals H 235 Annex D Voice codecs G 711 G 729 G 722 DHCP FTP HTTP HTTPS SNMP Port Based Network Access Contr...

Page 836: ...n keys first row End call disconnect Redial Switch call forwarding on off Switch headset on off Switch microphone on off Pre programmed func tion keys second row Three audio keys for decreasing the volume and brightening the display contrast activating deactivating the loudspeaker increasing the volume and darkening the display contrast Mailbox key for checking voicemail Menu key for the communica...

Page 837: ... actions scrolling back through the menu or opening the idle menu Programmable keys Eight keys Each key can be programmed either as a function key or as a DSS key Labeled with paper label Key modules 1 OpenStage Key Module 15 18 programmable keys Each key can be programmed either as a function key or as a DSS key A maximum of one OpenStage Key Module 15 can be connect ed to the telephone Or 1 Open...

Page 838: ...tage 40 Product image Versions The following telephones are available for the CorNet IP HFA connection variant OpenStage 40 OpenStage 40 G gigabit variant Main features Figure 10 5 OpenStage 40 Feature Connection variant CorNet IP HFA TDM General fea tures Tilt LCD graphics display with background lighting 40 x 6 character resolu tion monochrome multi functional 5 way navigator ...

Page 839: ...t call forwarding redial service application menu voicemail messages loudspeaker mute headset 6 programmable touch sensor keys Function speed dial and line keys Full duplex speakerphone mode Open listening Suitable for wall mounting Interfaces Integrated Ethernet switch to connect a PC USB slave LAN port 10 100 Base T Port for headset Port for key module and BLF IP features CorNet IP HFA based on ...

Page 840: ...rsions The following telephones are available for the CorNet IP HFA connection variant OpenStage 60 OpenStage 60 G gigabit variant Main features Figure 10 6 OpenStage 60 Feature Description Display TFT swivel background lighting 320 x 240 pixels QVGA 16 bit color depth suitable for graphics Pre programmed func tion keys left End call disconnect Switch call forwarding on off Switch voice dialing on...

Page 841: ...es Voice mail Menu key Service menu User menu Administration menu Applications tab Display Help function TouchSlider Set the current volume Ringtone Handset Loudspeaker TouchGuide Navigate in lists menus and input fields Dialing keypad For entering digits 0 to 9 pound and asterisk symbols letters punc tuation marks and special characters Programmable sensor keys Eight keys Each key can be programm...

Page 842: ...headset 8 pins Bluetooth Port for key module For TDM only USB B slave interface for first party CTI For CorNet IP HFA only LAN port 10 100 Base T For CorNet IP HFA only Integrated Ethernet switch for con necting to a PC Additional features Full duplex speakerphone mode Open listening Voice dialing Polyphonic and mp3 ring tones supported No wall mounting IP features for Cor Net IP HFA only CorNet I...

Page 843: ... image Versions The following telephones are available for the CorNet IP HFA connection variant OpenStage 80 OpenStage 80 G gigabit variant Main features Figure 10 7 OpenStage 80 CorNet IP HFA Feature Description Display TFT swivel background lighting TDM 320 x 240 pixels QVGA 16 bit color depth suitable for graphics CorNet IP HFA 640 x 480 pixels VGA 16 bit color depth suit able for graphics ...

Page 844: ...AP directory HiPath 3000 phonebook Display call lists Dialed numbers internal phone redial Missed calls Received calls Display messages Text messages Voice mail Menu key Service menu User menu Administration menu Applications tab Display Help function TouchSlider Set the current volume Ringtone Handset Loudspeaker TouchGuide Navigate in lists menus and input fields Dialing keypad For entering digi...

Page 845: ... can be con nected to the telephone Connections USB A master interface for first party CTI 121TR9 5 for headset 8 pins Bluetooth Port for key module For TDM only USB B slave interface for first party CTI For CorNet IP HFA only LAN port 10 100 Base T For CorNet IP HFA only Integrated Ethernet switch for con necting to a PC Additional features Full duplex speakerphone mode Open listening Voice diali...

Page 846: ...ther add on de vices connected light up the LEDs on add on device do not have to flash in synchronism with workpoint LEDs All pixels on the display also activate briefly These indications show that the telephone is starting up and performing a self test Download ing has finished and the telephone is ready for operation when you see the date and time on the display Use HiPath 3000 5000 to configure...

Page 847: ...e Product Family 10 1 2 9 Ports on the Underside of the Telephone for the CorNet IP Model This section shows the ports on the underside of OpenStage CorNet IP HFA telephones These ports are explained in Section 10 1 2 11 OpenStage Terminals Description of Ports OpenStage 15 for CorNet IP Figure 10 8 OpenStage 15 CorNet IP Underside of the Telephone ...

Page 848: ...ce documentation wclient fm OpenStage Product Family OpenStage 20 OpenStage 40 for CorNet IP Figure 10 9 OpenStage 20 OpenStage 40 CorNet IP Underside of the Telephone OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 for CorNet IP Figure 10 10 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 CorNet IP Underside of the Telephone not available in OpenStage 20 ...

Page 849: ...on the Underside of the Telephone for the TDM Model This section shows the ports on the underside of OpenStage TDM telephones These ports are explained in Section 10 1 2 11 OpenStage Terminals Description of Ports OpenStage 10 T OpenStage 20 T Figure 10 11 OpenStage 10 T OpenStage 20 T Underside of the Telephone OpenStage 15 T Figure 10 12 OpenStage 15 T Underside of the Telephone ...

Page 850: ...10 26 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation wclient fm OpenStage Product Family OpenStage 30 T OpenStage 40 T Figure 10 13 OpenStage 30 T OpenStage 40 T Underside of the Telephone OpenStage 60 T OpenStage 80 T Figure 10 14 OpenStage 60 T OpenStage 80 T Underside of the Telephone ...

Page 851: ...age 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 TDM connection variants Additional power supply not required Connection to HiPath 3000 Additional power supply required Connection to an ex ternal power supply unit Section 10 1 4 contains infor mation about the cases in which an external power sup ply unit is required Port on OpenStage PhoneAdapter OpenStage 10 T OpenStage 15 T OpenStage 20 T OpenStage 30 T OpenSt...

Page 852: ...tage 20 OpenStage 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 TDM connection variants CorNet IP connection variants Port for headset OpenStage 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 TDM connection variants Port for headset OpenStage 30 T OpenStage 40 T OpenStage 60 T OpenStage 80 T CorNet IP connection variants Handset port OpenStage 15 OpenStage 20 OpenStage 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 TDM connection variants Handset po...

Page 853: ...ge 15 T OpenStage 30 T and OpenStage 40 telephones Figure 10 15 OpenStage Key Module 15 The OpenStage Key Module 15 is an add on device that should be mounted on the side of the telephone it provides an additional 18 programmable function keys Each key can be pro grammed either as a function key or as a DSS key Keys are labeled with paper labels A maximum of one OpenStage Key Module 15 can be conn...

Page 854: ...function it is possible to use a total of 22 numbers of any key functions Keys are labeled automatically on the display 10 1 3 3 OpenStage BLF The OpenStage BLF can be connected to OpenStage 30 and OpenStage 40 telephones One OpenStage BLF can be connected It cannot be combined with the OpenStage Key Module Figure 10 17 OpenStage BLF The OpenStage BLF busy lamp field is an add on device that shoul...

Page 855: ...DM and CorNet IP connection variants Add on devices cannot be used on tele phones that are not listed here Table 10 2 OpenStage Terminals Add on Device Configurations Telephone First key module Second key module OpenStage 15 OpenStage Key Module 15 OpenStage 30 T OpenStage Key Module 15 OpenStage BLF OpenStage 40 OpenStage Key Module 15 OpenStage Key Module 40 OpenStage Key Module 40 OpenStage BLF...

Page 856: ...ditional pow er supply re quired Note OpenStage 20 No1 OpenStage 20 Gigabit variant No2 OpenStage 40 No2 1 x OpenStage Key Module 15 No2 1 x OpenStage Key Module 40 No2 2 x OpenStage Key Module 40 No2 1 x OpenStage BLF Yes for Open Stage BLF OpenStage BLF up to and in cluding hardware output S30817 S7406 A101 7 A103 2 The external power supply unit is connected to the BLF Caution The power supply ...

Page 857: ...he power supply unit used should only be used for this purpose Using the free jack of the power supply unit to power another terminal or de vice is not permitted and can lead to the destruction of the OpenStage BLF OpenStage BLF hardware re lease S30817 S7406 A101 8 A103 3 or higher The external power supply unit is connected to the terminal see Figure 10 18 OpenStage 60 No3 1 x OpenStage Key Modu...

Page 858: ...ey Module 80 No3 2 x OpenStage Key Module 80 Yes The external power supply unit is connected to the terminal see Figure 10 18 1 PoE class 1 PD maximum power 0 44 W through 3 84 W nominal classification signature current 10 5 mA 2 PoE class 2 PD maximum power 3 84 W through 6 49 W nominal classification signature current 18 5 mA 3 PoE class 3 PD maximum power 6 49 W through 12 95 W nominal classifi...

Page 859: ...o the Open Stage PhoneAdapter OpenStage 30 No 1 x OpenStage Key Module 15 Yes 1 x OpenStage BLF Yes for Open Stage BLF OpenStage BLF up to and in cluding hardware output S30817 S7406 A101 7 A103 2 The external power supply unit is connected to the BLF Caution The power supply unit used should only be used for this purpose Using the free jack of the power supply unit to power another terminal or de...

Page 860: ...BLF up to and in cluding hardware output S30817 S7406 A101 7 A103 2 The external power supply unit is connected to the BLF Caution The power supply unit used should only be used for this purpose Using the free jack of the power supply unit to power another terminal or de vice is not permitted and can lead to the destruction of the OpenStage BLF OpenStage BLF hardware re lease S30817 S7406 A101 8 A...

Page 861: ...dule 1 x OpenStage USB Extension Yes 1 x OpenStage PhoneAdapter Yes The external power supply unit is connected directly to the Open Stage PhoneAdapter OpenStage 80 Yes The external power supply unit is connected to the telephone see Figure 10 19 1 x OpenStage Key Module 80 Yes 2 x OpenStage Key Module 80 Yes 1 x OpenStage USB Extension Yes 2 x OpenStage KeyModule 1 x OpenStage USB Extension Yes 1...

Page 862: ...o an including hardware output S30817 S7406 A101 7 A103 2 The external power supply unit is connected directly to the OpenStage BLF The left jack of the power supply unit labeled Digital Figure 10 19 for the TDM connection variant must be connected to the BLF OpenStage BLF from hardware output S30817 S7406 A101 8 A103 3 The OpenStage BLF is powered by the associated terminal The power supply unit ...

Page 863: ...penStage terminals with the CorNet IP connection variant OpenStage terminals with TDM connection variant Figure 10 18 OpenStage CorNet IP Connection of the External Power Supply Unit Figure 10 19 OpenStage TDM Connection of the External Power Supply Unit to the OpenStage ter minal Connector socket to the OpenStage terminal Connector socket to the HiPath 3000 system ...

Page 864: ...ications 10 1 5 2 OpenStage PhoneAdapter Technical specifications AC adapter Euro C39280 Z4 C510 AC adapter UK C39280 Z4 C512 AC adapter 110 V USA C39280 Z4 C511 Line voltage 230 Vac 230 Vac 120 VAC Line frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Output voltage max 43 VDC min 30 VDC max 43 VDC min 30 VDC max 43 VDC min 30 VDC Output current 480 mA 480 mA 480 mA Figure 10 20 OpenStage PhoneAdapter Switch analog U...

Page 865: ...ly in the following combinations An OpenStage TDM phone UP0 E master Two OpenStage TDM phones UP0 E master UP0 E slave One OpenStage TDM telephone and an analog terminal UP0 E master a b T R interface properties The pin assignment of the modular jacks can be different on analog devices Compare the pin assignment below with the pin assignment of your analog terminal Pin assignment of the Western Mo...

Page 866: ...le 10 1 5 3 Headsets The integrated Bluetooth technology supports user friendly headsets The OpenStage 40 60 80 terminals are each equipped with a jack to connect corded 121 TR 9 5 and cordless headsets 121 TR 9 5 Note The headset ports for OpenStage terminals are coded RJ45 jacks The headset connec tors have RJ11 or RJ45 connectors If there are contact problems RJ45 jack RJ11 con nector swat the ...

Page 867: ...y from Manager E An entry in the customer database permits or denies automatic software up dates If updates are permitted you can choose either an immediate or scheduled update In the case of the former the telephones are reset and updated if they are ready to be loaded in the case of the latter they are reset and updated on a specific day This automatic procedure only updates telephones with an o...

Page 868: ...ge OS_HI_TDM_V1_R3_13_0 bin and the file pre pare img to the root directory on the USB stick 3 Remove the USB stick from your PC s USB port 4 Disconnect the telephone from the power supply 5 Plug the USB stick into the master USB port on the telephone using a standard USB con nection cable 6 Connect the telephone to the power supply If the telephone correctly detects the USB stick the following te...

Page 869: ...ct The telephone continues the boot procedure If the data entered is correct The update procedure starts the update progress can be followed on the display The update procedure is successfully completed when the following text appears Update script succeeded Copy logs to USB stick done Unmounting USB device and exit Please remove USB device to reboot The update procedure places a number of log fil...

Page 870: ...0 1 6 3 Accessing Hardware and Software Version Information The hardware version and the software version of the OpenStage telephones are saved in the customer database and can be accessed by Manager E 10 1 6 4 Accessing the Update Log File OpenStage TDM telephones and the Extender keep an update log file that can be called up with Manager E for maintenance purposes ...

Page 871: ...keys have panels with labeling strips on which the function or call number currently saved can be entered optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S families the function keys are self labeling keys Self label ing means that each key is assigned a display 1 line with 12 characters in which the func tion or call number currently saved is shown Key modules and adapters The add on device optiPoint self labeling k...

Page 872: ...ty s station CLIP suppresses the calling party s station number on the called party s station COLP displays the called party s station number on the calling party s station COLR suppresses the called party s station number on the calling party s station Consultation hold Hold Toggle Transfer transfer after messaging DISA Direct Inward System Access No features may be activated for the SIP telephon...

Page 873: ...phony stations cannot be integrated into call pickup groups hunt groups team top or MULAP groups Internet telephony stations cannot activate or use system features that can be operated with codes Music is played when an Internet telephony station is on hold Music is not played and a ring tone is not applied for the Internet telephony station when unscreened transfer is per formed between the Inter...

Page 874: ...in features Protocols H 323 HFA V3 V4 CorNet IP SIP HTTP DHCP SNMP FTP H 235 security QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 3rd party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 8 function keys with LEDs 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus...

Page 875: ...nment default for optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 23 optiPoint 410 entry 410 entry S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 410 entry Consultation hold Redial Message Callback Speed dialing Microphone on off Loudspeaker Disconnect optiPoint 410 entry S Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable P...

Page 876: ... and IEEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 3rd party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open liste...

Page 877: ... economy S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 24 optiPoint 410 economy 410 economy S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 410 economy Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 economy S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller list ...

Page 878: ...1 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompt...

Page 879: ...us S Refer to Abschnitt 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 25 optiPoint 410 economy plus 410 economy plus S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 410 economy plus Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 economy plus S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programma...

Page 880: ...N in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerph...

Page 881: ...tandard S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 26 optiPoint 410 standard 410 standard S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 410 standard Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 standard S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller li...

Page 882: ...ance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 19 function keys with LEDs Graphic display swivel with 4 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duple...

Page 883: ...ptiPoint 410 advance 410 advance S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 410 advance Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 410 advance S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller list ...

Page 884: ...nt 420 economy optiPoint 420 economy S Main features Protocols H 323 HFA V3 V4 CorNet IP SIP HTTP DHCP SNMP FTP H 235 security QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802 1 p Q Voice compression G 711 G 722 G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 12 function keys wit...

Page 885: ...20 economy S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 28 optiPoint 420 economy 420 economy S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 420 economy Service Programmable Redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 economy S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller list Pro...

Page 886: ... G 723 and G 729 A B Power over LAN in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user...

Page 887: ...my plus S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 29 optiPoint 420 economy plus economy plus S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 420 economy plus Service Programmable Redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 economy plus S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Ca...

Page 888: ...cordance with Cisco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 12 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex sp...

Page 889: ... standard S Refer to Section 10 2 3 for information on connection and startup Figure 10 30 optiPoint 420 standard 420 standard S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 420 standard Service Programmable Redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 standard S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller list ...

Page 890: ...sco and standard pre802 3af CTI for example via TAPI 1st Party 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for LAN connection 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC connection 1 integrated USB 1 1 interface 18 function keys with LEDs and self labeling keys Graphic display swivel with 4 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next...

Page 891: ... Figure 10 31 optiPoint 420 advance 420 advance S Standard Key Assignment optiPoint 420 advance Service Programmable Redial Programmable Mailbox Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect optiPoint 420 advance S Loudspeaker Programmable Redial Programmable Caller list Pro...

Page 892: ...using the DLI function see Section 10 3 For information on terminal administration refer to the optiPoint 410 420 Administrator Manual optiPoint 410 S optiPoint 420 S For information on how to connect and start up terminals refer to the optiPoint 410 S 420 S Administrator Manual The software can be upgraded over the Deployment and Licensing service Information on the procedure can be found in the ...

Page 893: ...ients optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S 10 2 3 1 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone Figure 10 32 optiPoint 410 420 410 S 420 S Connection Options optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S optiPoint 410 420 standard optiPoint 410 420 standard S optiPoint 410 420 advance optiPoint 410 420 advance S ...

Page 894: ...e 10 4 optiPoint 410 420 optiPoint 410 S 420 S Description of Ports No Port 1 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the LAN 2 Handset 3 Local power supply optional 1 1 No local power supply is required if power is provided via the Ethernet cable Power over LAN 4 Key module 5 Ethernet 10 100BaseT interface self configuring for the PC 6 Headset 121 TR 9 5 7 Adapter 1 8 Adapter 2 9 USB ...

Page 895: ...int 410 econ omy optiPoint 410 economy S optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S optiPoint 420 economy optiPoint 420 economy S optiPoint 420 economy plus and optiPoint 420 economy plus S 10 2 4 1 optiPoint self labeling key module The optiPoint self labeling key module is an add on device that should be mounted on the side of the telephone it provides an additional 13 keys LEDs and...

Page 896: ... documentation wclient fm optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S The bottom key of the first key module installed on the telephone optiPoint self labeling key module or optiPoint key module is automatically defined as Shift key default This is the case if no Shift key was already programmed ...

Page 897: ...atures Graphical user interface Local personal telephone directory Access to company wide telephone directory via LDAP WAP browser Voice controlled dialing Call list containing all incoming and outgoing calls Speed dialing list Online help Connection The optiPoint 410 display module must always be installed as the first add on device in other words connected directly to the telephone The connectio...

Page 898: ...plus or optiPoint 420 economy plus S optiPoint acoustic adapter Note Floating contacts are not supported when using the adapter on optiPoint 410 opti Point 410 S and optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S optiPoint recorder adapter Table 10 5 Add On Device Configurations for optiPoint 410 410 S and optiPoint 420 420 S optiPoint 410 optiPoint 410 S telephone optiPoint 420 optiPoint 420 S telephone First key...

Page 899: ...ter The following systems support the DLI function HiPath 3800 with the HiPath Xpressions Compact board IVMNL and the HG 1500 board STMI2 HiPath 3550 with the HiPath Xpressions Compact board IVMS8N or IVMP4 and the HG 1500 board HXGS3 HiPath 3500 with the HiPath Xpressions Compact board IVMS8NR or IVMP4N and the HG 1500 board HXGR3 HiPath Xpressions Compact V2 5 and later HG 1500 from V3 0 or late...

Page 900: ...essary to configure the default values for the IP workpoint for example if this is the first startup Note For IP workpoint configuration a template in XML format is defined for each IP work point type and stored in the HiPath Xpressions Compact file system There is exactly one template per supported IP workpoint type regardless of the software version The first time that an IP workpoint is started...

Page 901: ...d disk on the HiPath Xpressions Compact board A separate DLI WBM is available for this The DLI WBM is accessed via https IP address of the HiPath Xpressions Compact board dli 2 The HiPath Xpressions Compact s internal Deployment service checks whether the soft ware image is available in a valid format If this is not the case an appropriate error mes sage is generated for the user by the DLI WBM No...

Page 902: ...s reregister with the HiPath Xpressions Compact s internal Deployment service Based on the registration data the Deployment service recognizes whether the new software was successfully installed it then outputs the appropriate mes sage via the DLI WBM You can use Web based Management to display information on all registered IP workpoints and their software deployment status Software cannot be upgr...

Page 903: ... to connect it via the IP port Main features 19 function keys with LEDs Graphic LCD display swivel with 8 lines each with 24 characters touchscreen Back ground lighting with approximately 5 s ghosting 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker quality and disp...

Page 904: ...figuration Connection of optiPoint 600 office over the UP0 E interface Refer to Page 10 90 for more infor mation Figure 10 35 optiPoint 600 office Default Key Assignment optiPoint 600 office Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programm...

Page 905: ...nd optiPoint 500 economy the optiPoint 500 tele phones have a USB 1 1 interface This allows for PC supported telephoning and Internet ac cess over the USB interface of a PC The optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF add on devices increase the number of function keys available The different optiPoint 500 adapters allow flexible expansion of the telephone workstation Ad ditional devices such as per...

Page 906: ...anager E for infor mation on key programming see Section 10 6 Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus and pitch Suitable for wall mounting No modularity no connection option for adapters or key modules no display Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 entry Refer to Section 10 5 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 36 optiPoint 500 entry Standard Key Assignment Default C...

Page 907: ...ivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch and display contrast Suitable for wall mounting No modularity no connection option for adapters or key modules Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 economy Refer to Section 10 5 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 37 optiPoint...

Page 908: ... characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Open listening 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch and display contrast Interfaces and slots 1 USB 1 1 interface 1 option bay 1 interface for up to 2 add on devices Suitable for wall mounting Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 basic Refer to Section 10 5 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 38 o...

Page 909: ...s 12 function keys with LEDs 4 can be modified with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E 8 freely programmable for information on key programming see Section 10 6 Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker ...

Page 910: ...optiPoint 500 Standard key assignment default for optiPoint 500 standard Refer to Section 10 5 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 39 optiPoint 500 standard Standard Key Assignment Default Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect ...

Page 911: ...ey programming see Section 10 6 Alphanumeric LCD display swivel with 2 lines 24 characters each Background lighting that stays lit for approximately 5 s 3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts Yes Back and Next Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation 2 volume adjustment keys plus minus pitch speaker quality and display contrast Interfaces and slots 1 integrated U...

Page 912: ...t for optiPoint 500 advance Refer to Section 10 5 1 6 for connection requirements Figure 10 40 optiPoint 500 advance Standard Key Assignment Default Service Programmable Redial Programmable Microphone on off Programmable Loudspeaker Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Disconnect ...

Page 913: ...ts Connecting as a client telephone System HiPath 3800 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Hardware require ments free UP0 E port on SLMO2 8 free UP0 E port on CBCC CBRC SLU8 SLU8R SLMO24 free UP0 E port on CBCC CBRC SLU8 SLU8R The device can also be connected to an existing optiPoint 500 telephone except for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy as a client telephone using an ...

Page 914: ...J Y ST 2x2x0 6 0 6 mm Perform the terminal test in Section 12 4 11 to determine whether a local power sup ply is needed for additional power for example in host client configurations or for larger ranges 3 Label the keys You have the following options by hand in writing label sheets come with each telephone using a PC with the Key Labeling Tool requires MS Word which is contained on the Electronic...

Page 915: ... self test Download ing has finished and the telephone is ready for operation when you see the date and time on the display 10 5 1 8 Ports on the Bottom of the Telephone Figure 10 41 optiPoint 500 Connection Options USB interface MW8 RJ45 connection jack for optiPoint key mo dule optiPoint BLF MW8 RJ45 connection jack for HiPath 3000 MW4 RJ8 connection jacks Upper headset equip ment Lower handset ...

Page 916: ...nes have a USB 1 1 interface This forms the basis for PC supported telephoning TAPI Data transmission over CAPI for example direct Internet access fax capability e mail etc If the CAPI software is installed PCs have direct Internet access over the USB inter face without any additional adapter There is a charge for this software TAPI and CAPI can be used simultaneously for example to receive a larg...

Page 917: ...5000 The following sections contain information on the possible key module configurations Section 10 5 2 3 for terminals in the optiPoint 500 family Section 10 2 4 3 for terminals in the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 family 10 5 2 1 optiPoint key module The optiPoint key module is an add on device that should be mounted on the side of the tele phone it provides an additional 16 keys LEDs and lab...

Page 918: ... BLF port 10 5 2 3 Possible Configurations for the Key Modules The following table shows the possible configurations for key modules on telephones from the optiPoint 500 family not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy Figure 10 43 optiPoint BLF Table 10 6 Key module configurations on an optiPoint 500 telephone optiPoint 500 telephone 1st key module 2nd key module optiPoint 500 basic optiP...

Page 919: ...dsets The adapters which are connected on the bottom of the telephone are plug n play When a new telephone adapter configuration is plugged in it generates a reset a setup message no tifies the system of the new configuration The user usually installs the adapter The installation instructions are on the Electronic Oper ating Instructions CD Option bays 7 Caution Always disconnect the line cord bef...

Page 920: ...the system regard less of the optiPoint telephone s connection status as long as a B channel is available The adapter must always have a local power supply for operating the connected analog device T R interface properties Supply current 30 mA Busy signal when both B channels are busy Ring sequence 2 2 Supports only DTMF with Flash No ground signaling allowed Does not support VoiceMail server with...

Page 921: ...or videokit S0 telephones must have their own power supply for connection S0 interface properties Supports point to point and passive bus connections Wired for short passive bus configurations Cable lengths Maximum 100 m 328 feet with a cable impedance of 75 ohms Maximum 200 m 656 feet with a cable impedance of 150 ohms complies with CCITT recommendation I 430 The NT terminating resistors are inte...

Page 922: ...with its own power supply The system treats the client telephone as an independent telephone with a separate phone number and its own B channel The client telephone can send and receive calls regardless of the connection status of the host telephone The maximum range between the host and client telephones is approximately 100 m 328 feet for J Y ST 2x2x0 6 0 6 mm Figure 10 47 optiPoint phone adapte...

Page 923: ...int 500 Example of a Host Client Configuration Figure 10 48 Example a Host Client Configuration Local power supply optio MW wall outlets UP0 E to the system 2 wire up to 1000 m 3280 feet UP0 E 4 wire up to 100 m 328 optiPoint 500 telephone with optiPoint phone adapter Client Host optiPoint 500 telephone MW wall outlet Local power supply optio 4 2 ...

Page 924: ...oudspeaker are used sense lead optiPoint 500 basic does not support the connection of an external microphone to the op tiPoint acoustic adapter The speakerphone mode selection is independent of whether the internal or an external speakerphone is used External speakerphones have precedence over internal speaker phones with the exception of manual intercom and signaling procedures The internal micro...

Page 925: ...dspeaker The volume of the external loudspeaker can also be adjusted using the external amplifier Figure 10 50 Y Cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter Assignment of the MW4 connection sockets Internal resistance 0Ω 10 µF Level for PCM 20 dBm 4 8 dBm at volume level 8 0 775 V 0 dBm Sense lead to GND int loudspeaker deactivated only active for tone ringing Input level 50 dBm 12 dBm PCM signal Input r...

Page 926: ...ignals active telephone states handset lifted Loudspeaker activated or headset active These states can be displayed for example on external signaling equip ment LED relay etc The signaling equipment must have its own power supply The contact can be loaded with up to 5 W at 24 Vac or 60 VDC 3 4 Call con tact Signals the call receipt state This can be used for example to control a secondary bell The...

Page 927: ...d that the call is being recorded Figure 10 51 optiPoint recorder adapter Assignment of both connection jacks Recorders to be connected must meet the following electrical re quirements Input impedance 10 kΩ Frequency progression 300 to 3000 Hz 3 dB Beep tone level 26 dBm to 18 dBm at a 600 Ω load Max input level 650 mVeff from a 600 Ω source 1 MW6 port for recorder Pin Signal 1 Free 2 NF 3 NF 4 NF...

Page 928: ... used in the optiPoint 500 advance only a category 2 adapter can be operated in the second slot Category 2 optiPoint 500 adapters The following adapters can be used on the host and client telephones This is also true if a cat egory 1 optiPoint 500 adapter is already connected optiPoint acoustic adapter optiPoint recorder adapter Configuration restrictions Number of usable adapters and key modules ...

Page 929: ...an optiPoint 500 telephone or the maximum UP0 E interface range is reached by the optiPoint 500 telephone The telephone test described in Section 12 4 11 will establish whether or not additional power is required from a local power supply series connected2 2 The local power supply is series connected to the optiPoint 500 telephone the digital RJ6 jack on the local power supply must be connected to...

Page 930: ...lculation 20Tool xls HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 optiPoint 500 telephones Number per system 384 722 2 8xUP0 E at the central board 5xSLU8 1xSLMO24 483 3 8xUP0 E at the central board 5xSLU8R 244 4 8xUP0 E at the central board 2xSLU8 245 5 8xUP0 E at the central board 2xSLU8R Number per box the value in brackets applies to operation us ing a PSUI 192 optiPoint acoustic adapters N...

Page 931: ... SMR 06 and later From the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Settings menu System Parameters Flags one of the two following options can be set The Enhanced key functionality flag is not activated default setting This will produce the same behavior as in versions up to and including V6 0 SMR 05 The Extended Key Functionality flag is activated Once you have defined a key of your choice as the Shift key onl...

Page 932: ...stores all calls Malicious Call Recorder Stores calls in their entirety when you press any button during the call Third Party Monitoring not currently available with HiPath 3000 5000 optiLog 4me should be installed at the central station of the system Recording starts when you press the Monitor key on the telephone Furthermore you can use the recorder to record conference calls using an external m...

Page 933: ... using large configurations or if you need to extend the range 10 8 1 1 Local Power Supply for optiPoint 500 optiPoint 600 office You can connect a local power supply to the line cords of a host or client telephone using two RJ11 jacks and the connection cable supplied see Figure 10 53 Variants Local power supply Euro AUL 06D1284 C39280 Z4 C71 number entered on unit Local power supply UK AUL 06D12...

Page 934: ...al AC Adapter Connection Table 10 10 Pin Assignment for Local Power Supply AUL 06D1284 Euro Pin Assignment 1 Not used 2 3 a wire tip 4 b wire ring 5 6 Not used Figure 10 53 Example External AC Adapter Connection Power supply MW RJ jack jack Digital from the optiPoint 500 ad apter for example here optiPoint analog adapter Analog tele phone or optiPoint 500 telephone HiPath 3xx0 ...

Page 935: ...d to a telephone via the left board marked Digital Variants AC adapter Euro C39280 Z4 C510 AC adapter UK C39280 Z4 C512 AC adapter 110 V USA C39280 Z4 C511 Technical specifications Technical specifications AC adapter Euro C39280 Z4 C510 AC adapter UK C39280 Z4 C512 AC adapter 110 V USA C39280 Z4 C511 Line voltage 230 Vac 230 Vac 120 VAC Line frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Output voltage max 43 VDC mi...

Page 936: ...ories 10 8 2 Headsets A headset replaces the telephone handset which means that the user s hands are free when telephoning Cordless headsets 121 TR 9 5 may also be used Note A headset key can be configured for the optiPoint This allows the user to take calls and to switch between the handset and the headset Figure 10 54 Example Corded and Cordless Headsets ...

Page 937: ...ed and Cordless Headsets Direct Using an optiPoint acoustic adapter1 1 Accepting and ending calls using the headset keys is only supported if the connection is established using an optiPoint acoustic adapter optiPoint 500 basic X optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 standard SL for U S only X optiPoint 500 advance X X optiPoint 600 office X X optiPoint 410 economy plus optiPoint 410 economy plus S...

Page 938: ...meaning that functionality can be increased in increments The user interface has the same look and feel as the Windows Office 2007 inter face Features Softphone Call control HFA or SIP CTI Groupware and directory access Contact management Call journal Video in SIP version Desktop client for Windows based clients Differences between the HFA and SIP versions The HFA version can work with HiPath 4000...

Page 939: ... RAM is required Processor with a clock frequency of at least 1 GHz At least 200 MB free space on the hard disk CD ROM drive Ethernet network card with IEEE 802 1p q support for optimum Quality of Service QoS USB support for connecting a handset or headset Available languages German English Chinese simplified only in the corresponding operating system Video cameras A commercial USB camera is suita...

Page 940: ... supports the HiPath AP1120 variants H 323 and SIP The device is capable of dynamically recognizing the most common IP telephony codecs and fax protocols including T 38 Connections Ethernet connections 1 x RJ45 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access 1 x RJ45 10 100 BaseT Ethernet access power supply over MDI IEEE 802 3af Pow er over LAN Analog connections 2 x RJ11 analog telephone fax Power supply External ...

Page 941: ...it uses investment in convergent LANs and the expands the range of a company s IP telephony and multimedia communication systems Product image Figure 10 56 optiPoint WL2 professional Workpoints used HiPath 3000 5000 provides wireless LAN services via a WLAN access point connected to the DMZ interface The following WLAN workpoints are implemented optiPoint WL2 professional enables the use of all Hi...

Page 942: ...n via DHCP Enhanced configuration via the telephone website single telephone or using the HiPath Deployment Service Features Telephone Telephone with color graphic display 6 lines 128 x128 pixel resolution 4096 colors 3 1cm x 3 1cm Call animation and caller display CLIP caller ID for incoming calls Illuminated keypad Two softkeys for dynamic access to features Intuitive user prompting Illuminated ...

Page 943: ...d mute transfer three party conference MWI DND etc SIP features with server support Group pickup priority alerting distinctive ringing keyset shared call appearance bridge line appearance etc Local internal phonebook Comprehensive local internal phone address book CLIP is replaced by the internal phonebook entry in the telephone or on the HiPath system Audio 6 polyphonic ringtones with programmabl...

Page 944: ... G 729a with VAD Voice Activity Detection G 723 G 722 optional Advanced Echo Cancellation AEC QoS ToS DiffServ 802 1q 802 11e WME subset Accessories Desktop charger Desktop charger with the option of charging a second battery USB data cable Wide range of headsets available Various carriers available Power adapter suitable for the appropriate geographic region Additional features Web browser based ...

Page 945: ...x 73 x 35 mm Color Light Cashmere Silver Wireless Features 802 11g fallback to 802 11b Frequency range 2 4 2 497 GHz Number of dialable channels 13 ETSI or 11 North America Configurable transmit power approx 20 dBm EIRP Site survey tool integrated in the telephone Bit rates 54 48 36 24 18 12 11 9 6 5 5 2 1 Mbps SSID Security Features WEP 64 128 bit WPA Cisco infrastructure support via CCX Telephon...

Page 946: ...ptiPoint WL2 professional S FTP client VLAN support SNMP trap agent VoIP SIP RTP RTCP TLS DNS HTTP and HTTPS server PPTP for VPN support UPNP control point and telephone IP addressing fixed DHCP PPPoE PC software PC tool for exchanging phonebook data between Microsoft Outlook and the local internal phonebook on the WLAN telephone Ringtone download from PC to telephone ...

Page 947: ...ing non DID calls and calls which the call allocation algorithms are unable to route to us ers intercept calls The attendant routes these calls to the correct destination Telephones Configuration as an OpenStage Attendant is possible for the following telephones OpenStage 30 OpenStage 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 Key layout On OpenStage 30 40 60 80 telephones configured as attendant consoles the p...

Page 948: ...sers intercept calls The attendant routes these calls to the correct destination Configuration as optiPoint Attendant is possible for the following terminals optiPoint 500 econ omy basic standard advance optiPoint 410 economy economy plus standard advance opti Point 420 economy economy plus standard advance and optiPoint 600 office Standard key assignment default for optiPoint Attendant For more i...

Page 949: ...20 OpenStage TDM telephones OpenStage 40 60 80 HFA Connection via USB interface to optiPoint 500 OpenStage 40 T OpenStage 60 80 T via RNDIS driver RNDIS Remote Network Driver Interface Specification optiClient Attendant V8 features Ongoing waiting or parked calls are displayed with type name and phone number Acoustic message signaling with volume control Display of the switching state of source an...

Page 950: ...llation routine User interface currently available in German English Dutch Portuguese Italian French and Spanish Connection of a blind attendant console optional optiClient Attendant may operate as the central attendant console in HiPath networks Import of CSV files into the integrated internal phonebook Busy lamp fields offer the following features Up to 300 fields per busy lamp field Up to two b...

Page 951: ...rma tion For operation via USB optiPoint 500 with USB interface OpenStage telephones see notes in the Sales In formation USB cable part number S30267 Z360 A30 1 USB driver included in the CallBridge TU software and a free USB port at the PC Overview of Microsoft operating systems supported for each connection variant Licensing A license is required for optiClient Attendant V8 The product is licens...

Page 952: ...y is independent of the optiClient Attendant connection type USB or TCP IP For the network wide Busy Lamp Field function all decentralized systems send their station states e g free or busy to the central system to which the optiClient Attendants are connected Signaling takes place in the CorNet IP protocol CorNet NQ protocol tunneled in H 323 via annex M1 In an IP network up to 100 stations per n...

Page 953: ...ile telephone and the HiPath Cordless Office service manual 10 13 1 Gigaset SL3 professional Gigaset SL3 professional is a DECT standard mobile telephone and suitable for HPS HiPath Positioning System Product image Figure 10 59 Gigaset SL3 professional Technical Specifications Mobile telephone operation times Standby time without display illumination approx 200 hours Talk time approx 10 hours Char...

Page 954: ...le telephone and suitable for HPS Product image Figure 10 60 Gigaset S4 professional Technical Specifications Mobile telephone operation times Standby time without display illumination approx 165 hours Talk time approx 12 hours Charging time approx 7 5 hours Dimensions H W D in mm Mobile telephone 146 x 49 x 26 Charging unit 39 x 87 x 83 Weight of the mobile telephone incl battery approx 125 g Ope...

Page 955: ...ents requiring telephones to be break and shock proof and dust and spray resistant Product image Figure 10 61 Gigaset M2 professional Special features IP rating IP 65 casing protection Protected against splashes and low pressure jets of water Dustproof Shock proof and robust Silicon free surface Sturdy carry clip Immunity from electromagnetic radiation in accordance with EN 50 082 2 Acoustics opti...

Page 956: ...for HiPath Cordless Office Technical Specifications Operation times Standby time without display illumination approx 200 hours Talk time approx 10 hours Charging time approx 6 hours Dimensions H W D in mm Mobile telephone 167 56 35 Weight of the mobile telephone incl battery approx 176 g Operating temperature of the mobile telephone 10 C to 55 C 14 F to 131 F ...

Page 957: ...in window from a system telephone Assistant T by entering the code and password A maximum of 10 login windows can be open at a time Then type the station numbers of the mobile telephones you want to log on 10 13 4 1 Opening the HiPath 3000 Login Window The login window remains open for ten minutes per station The handset must log on during this period refer to Page 10 134 For initial installation ...

Page 958: ... Handset Display 1 Switch on the mobile telephone by holding down the hook key for at least 1 second You hear a confirmation tone The first time you log on the mes sage Register appears on the handset display The second time you log on Base 1 or a similar message flashes 2 Make the following entries within one minute Press the menu key 3 Select a station1 for example Base 2 and confirm 1 Base DECT...

Page 959: ...system view Cordless dialog in the Settings menu and the station view 10 13 4 4 Replacing Locking and Logging Off a Mobile Telephone If you need to replace a handset for servicing you must change the mobile telephone code PIN of the old handset before logging on the replacement telephone When you replace a mobile telephone the station must be assigned a new mobile telephone code PIN in the HiPath ...

Page 960: ...orts in the HiPath 3000 Boards for connecting analog telephones Connecting equipment using an optiPoint analog adapter System HiPath 3800 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Hardware require ments Free analog port on SLMA8 Free analog port on CBCC CBRC 4 8 16SLA 8SLAR SLA8N 16N 24N SLAD4 8 SLAD8R SLAD16 Free analog port on CBCC CBRC 4 8SLA 8SLAR SLAD4 8 SLAD8R SLAD16 It is also possibl...

Page 961: ...aling behavior of ISDN terminals corresponds to that of DP terminals The substitute codes 75 and 76 can be used for the characters and which cannot be used in the ISDN protocol Boards for connecting ISDN terminals Connecting with an optiPoint ISDN adapter It is possible to have a maximum of four Gigaset CX340isdn cordless systems for each S0 bus Because of the call switching functions at least two...

Page 962: ...Workpoint Clients Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 10 138 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation wclient fm ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000 ...

Page 963: ...Path Cordless Office For more detailed information please refer to the HiPath Cordless Office service manual Chapter contents This chapter covers the following topics Topic Introduction page 11 2 System Configuration page 11 3 Technical Data for Base Stations page 11 4 Power Related Capacity Limits page 11 6 Multi SLC and System Wide Networking page 11 9 Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Sy...

Page 964: ...ltaneously connected to the SLC16N board and the CBCC within one HiPath 3550 system Connecting cordless boards Base stations can be connected to the UP0 E interfaces of the following cordless boards SLC16N in HiPath 3550 SLCN in HiPath 3800 The base stations BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X and BS4 S30807 U5491 X may be used in mixed mode on the above cordless boards You can install up to...

Page 965: ...h 3550 HiPath 3500 CMS 1 1 1 2 1 2 8 No CMA 1 1 1 4 1 4 8 Yes CMA 7 7 1 4 1 4 32 Yes HiPath 3550 1 CMS 16 16 16 1 4 3 12 3 12 64 with 1 SLC16N Yes HiPath 3800 4 CMS 64 64 64 1 4 3 12 3 12 250 with 4 SLCN 1 1 Up to 128 handsets are possible at an SLCN Yes Explanations BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X is a base station that supports a maximum of 4 calls BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X is a base station that supports a max...

Page 966: ...ase Stations Parameter BS3 1 and BS3 S BS3 3 BS4 Outdoor cover Power supply voltage range 42 to 54 V 42 to 54 V 42 to 54 V Power consumption max 1 7 W max 3 2 W max 3 0 W Housing dimensions W x D x H in mm 181 x 139 x 69 202 x 172 x 43 200 x 176 x 49 296 x 256 x 90 Weight approx 0 3 kg approx 0 5 kg approx 0 5 kg approx 1 0 kg Temperature range for indoor use 5 to 50 o C for outdoor use 20 to 45 o...

Page 967: ...n factory premises The outdoor cover is suitable for mounting on walls of buildings roofs and masts The outdoor cover S30122 X7469 X is used for BS3 1 BS3 S BS3 3 and BS4 A heater is not required For information on the various outdoor cover mounting options refer to the HiPath Cordless Of fice Service Manual Figure 11 2 BS3 1 BS3 S and BS3 3 in the Outdoor Cover S30122 X7469 X Outdoor cover with B...

Page 968: ... configurations do not need an additional power supply Table 11 3 depending on the number of BS3 1 and BS4 base stations connected to the central CBCC CBRC control board Table 11 4 depending on the number of BS3 1 base stations connected to SLC16N and the number of BS4 base stations connected to SLC16N Table 11 5 depending on the number of BS3 3 base stations connected to SLC16N and the number of ...

Page 969: ...0 56 52 47 43 39 4 58 53 49 45 40 36 5 55 51 47 42 38 33 6 53 48 44 40 35 31 7 50 46 41 37 33 28 8 47 43 39 34 30 26 9 45 40 36 32 27 23 10 42 38 33 29 25 20 11 40 35 31 27 22 18 12 37 33 28 24 20 15 13 34 30 26 21 17 13 14 32 27 23 19 14 10 15 29 25 20 16 12 7 16 27 22 18 13 9 5 Table 11 5 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 3s Connected to SLC16N and BS...

Page 970: ...ious power supply options please refer to Page 3 146 8 37 33 28 24 20 15 When using an additional power supply such as Powerbox PB3000 HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 can be expanded up to the maximum possible capacity limit specified in Table 2 26 Table 11 5 HiPath 3550 Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the Number of BS3 3s Connected to SLC16N and BS4s Connected to SLC16N Number of BS3...

Page 971: ...ion to support full mobility see Figure 11 3 This function can be used not only within one system but also among systems among nodes because the CorNet NQ used for networking supports the UUS protocol note for the system wide extension connections you may have to take additional B channels into consideration for the permanent connection paths CorNet NQ see Section 11 6 That means full mobility acr...

Page 972: ...aming among the systems nodes call interruption when changing between systems nodes Figure 11 3 Example Cordless Extension Connection in Networked Systems BS SLC BS CorNet NQ Home SLC SLC No 1 Station no 124 Current location SLC SLC No 11 Station no 128 HiPath 3000 System 1 HiPath 3000 System 2 Extension connection BS SLC BS SLC No 2 Station number 141 BS SLC BS BS BS3 1 or BS3 3 A CorNet NQ conne...

Page 973: ...by the handset If the radio areas of systems with identical DECT IDs overlap mobile telephones inadvertently try to perform network wide handover which results in communication breakdown If networking is required for systems in which the individual radio fields overlap for example to increase capacity limits or through decentralized installation different DECT IDs must be configured in the individ...

Page 974: ...reas Disadvan tage network wide roaming not possible Scenario 3 Correct DECT Configuration when Networking HiPath 3000 Systems No incorrect handover despite identical DECT IDs as the radio areas do not overlap Network wide roaming possible Figure 11 5 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems Figure 11 6 Correct DECT configuration when networking HiPath 3000 systems PSTN Netwo...

Page 975: ...page 12 4 Remote administration page 12 6 Installation and administration of Plug PC for HiPath 3000 Remote Access Appliance page 12 7 Service and Maintenance Tasks page 12 17 Backing Up the Customer Database CDB Backup page 12 17 Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data page 12 22 Relocate Transfer Application Processor Software APS page 12 25 Determine current system software version page 12...

Page 976: ...anager and HiPath Inventory Manager page 12 59 HiPath 3000 Error mess Entries in the event log for HiPath 3000 page 12 61 HiPath 5000 Error mess Event Viewer Entries for HiPath 5000 page 12 88 Correcting Errors page 12 101 Automatic Error Correction page 12 101 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E page 12 101 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E page 12 102...

Page 977: ...tem adjustments administration by the service technician APS Transfer 0 ABC DEF MNO GHI PQRS TUV 123 456 789 0 ABC DEF MNO JKL GHI PQRS TUV WXYZ Customer Technician Technician Manager TC Access with user name and password Assistant T Access with user name and password HiPath 3000 5000 Manager C Access with customer ID and password HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Access with technician ID and password H...

Page 978: ...nager TC This gives customers the option to perform a defined range of system settings themselves These include for example configuring and changing speed dialing destinations and assign ing names for stations and lines To protect individual customer data such as speed dialing destinations or call detail informa tion it is not possible to enter the service menu unless you have user ID and password...

Page 979: ...n Copying and backing up customer data Loading system software APS transfer Displaying stored error messages with error history Service orders such as restarting boards etc Resetting activated features Creation and printing of Key labels for optiPoint 500 telephones Customer data printouts Main distribution frame layout User and password administration for after sales service Database conversion r...

Page 980: ...lished via callback HiPath 3000 5000 first of all denies a connection request from the service center HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E A callback is then set up to the service center s calling party number transferred via the PSTN connection s D channel SIRA Environment In a SIRA Secured Infrastructure for Remote Access environment HiPath 3000 can be mon itored and administered via a secure connection A...

Page 981: ...e remote technician to gain broadband access to the customer s HiPath 3000 system via Manager E the HG1500 and a possible Xpressions Com pact via WBM on the SSDP server It was designed to achieve a very fast and simple setup Figure 12 1 Plug PC for HiPath 3000 broadband service access 12 2 2 Description The Plug PC s package consists of the Plug PC itself a power cord power adapter LAN cord and an...

Page 982: ...rom the DHCP server It will show up in the DHCP server as a Debian device You can also use the sheevafind exe tool Once you start it will search for all Plug PC s in your local network Prerequisite The IP address is known Procedure 1 Start a browser and connect to the Plug PC s WBM by using HTTPS IP address of plug PC The first login screen appears which asks for a username and password The initia...

Page 983: ... but note that an ending like txt is not allowed You can change the name after you created the file 2 Copy the file to the sheeva s USB stick 3 Connect the USB stick to the Plug PC and boot up the Plug PC by inserting it into the power jack and connect to the Plug PC s WBM by using HTTPS IP address of plug PC Note that you must then enter the network settings of your plug PC and re enter the IP ad...

Page 984: ...o confirm The End User License Agreement EULA is displayed 4 Read and click OK to accept the End User License Agreement EULA Now you will get the message that the upgrade will take approx 2 minutes 5 Confirm again by clicking OK The update installation starts 6 After installation a message opens which informs that the update was successful Click OK to confirm it 12 2 5 Configuration of the Plug PC...

Page 985: ...t the Smart Services Delivery Platform SSDP is deactivated 2 Establish the connection to the SSDP server a In the Partner ID section enter the Partner ID b In the Actions section click Activate The service plugin is activated If the connec tion to the SSDP server is established the State and Connected status lights are green 3 Enter the proxy settings a Click the Proxy Parameters tab The following...

Page 986: ...is check box must be activated 3 Click Save The changes are saved In the Managed devices window the created device is displayed in the Overview of the managed devices table In this table the entered pa rameters are displayed In the menu on the left hand side the IP address of the device is displayed under the Managed devices menu item 12 2 6 3 Monitoring success Once this is all done you should be...

Page 987: ...e HiPath 3000 trace type 5 Click Save The changes are saved 6 Click Start As from now traces will be collected on the USB stick Your other devices are configured the same way 12 2 7 2 Executing the network trace Be aware that you may not capture everything on the network if the customer has a switched network In this case you either need a hub connected to the Plug PC the HG1500 and the HiPath 300...

Page 988: ... the network trace active yes or no is displayed Procedure 1 Click Administration Status The Status window opens It consists of the Filesystem X Tracer and Network capture section 12 2 9 Information window The Information window displays the current software version running on your plug PC Procedure 1 Click Administration Information An information window opens 12 2 10 Reset SSDP Service Plugin Th...

Page 989: ...he enterprise server and not on device side It is more comfortable and not so error prone to be done this way Therefore the action is at the regional data administrator or the responsible configuration center Procedure 1 This step is triggered by the call of the service technician or an e mail from him 2 Data administrator adds the customer and location data to the new device Very important is the...

Page 990: ...e shown They are described as Linux Host in the table 5 Once you found the Plug PC you want to connect to just click on the corresponding MAC address and a screen with detailed information about the Plug PC appears The search for HiPath 3000 HiPath HG 1500 and HiPath Xpressions Compact works the same way as described in this section Connecting to the Plug PC In order to connect to the Plug PC clic...

Page 991: ... MMC 12 3 1 1 1 Automatic Customer Data Backup HiPath 3000 A two stage concept guarantees automatic customer data backup A complete CDB backup version can be found on the MMC at any time Deltas for this backup are stored in an SRAM area with battery backup in the central control board If the SRAM area is full the customer data is automatically backed up This means that the entire CDB including SRA...

Page 992: ...ta status data The directory in which the two PDS files hicom pds and hicom pds bak are to be stored must be defined when the HiPath 5000 software is installed setup The two PDS files are cre ated when the HiPath 5000 is started for the first time The PDS files must not be modified as reading of the files using conventional tools and interpretation of the content is not possible without specialist...

Page 993: ...ocess starts it should be ended because the back up continues to run in the background You can also manually initiate a CDB restore including the call detail data from the MMC Procedure Manual CDB backup system restore using Assistant T Step Activity Manual customer data backup on the MMC 1 Assistant T Start system administration 2 Menu 28 Edit CDB 3 Menu 28 2 Back up CDB data 4 Menu 28 2 1 CDB on...

Page 994: ...ool 12 3 1 3 CDB Treatment When Replacing Central HiPath 3000 Hardware When replacing a central control board due to a hardware defect for example the following options are available for handling the CDB Procedure After replacing the board load the current CDB to the system A new license file is always required if a central control board that requires a license has to be replaced As a result of th...

Page 995: ...ystem from the power supply 3 Remove the MMC 4 Replace the central control board 5 Insert the MMC 6 Restart the system by plugging in the power plug 7 Reload 8 If an older CDB update is imported reload the CDB into the system with out the Delta mode The hardware and CDR switch remain inactive 9 Reset The customer system is now configured All you have to do now is log on the CMI mobile telephones a...

Page 996: ... 3500 and HiPath 3300 disconnect the system from the power supply before removing or inserting boards Only HiPath 3800 peripheral boards can be removed or inserted during operation Table 12 1 Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards If Then Inserting new board in free slot The board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial startup see Chapter 4 Installing HiPath 3000...

Page 997: ...t board type The system does not automatically activate the board After removing the old board you can delete it from the database using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E or Assistant T After you have inserted the new board the system activates it as if it had been inserted into a free slot However the CDB area used by the old board is left as a gap In the case of subscriber line modules you can use HiPa...

Page 998: ...ious model is retained Add on devices that are not plugged in retain their technical features With the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E you can de lete the add on devices that are not plugged in and remove the keys that are no longer avail able Step Activity 1 Disconnect system from power supply 2 Remove the board s 3 Restart the system by plugging in the power plug 4 Delete board slot using user interf...

Page 999: ... time as low as possible part of an APS is stored in a compressed format The APS is decompressed after it has been transferred from the MMC to the SDRAM area of the central control board 12 3 3 1 1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC Procedure APS replacement transfer is not possible with HiPath 5000 You must perform a complete software upgrade APS replacement is only possible ...

Page 1000: ...MMC After the transfer the checksum is analyzed The system subsequently reports whether or not an error was found If so you have to delete the transferred APS the APS transfer was successful You can then activate the APS immediately or at a later time Resetting the system initiates the changeover from the old APS to the new APS If problems occur during this process the old APS is reactivated Once ...

Page 1001: ...m resets and boots up Step Activity 1 Save the existing customer data for example as customer1 kds 2 Select Open CDB from the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E file menu and high light APS files fst Open the fst file using the new system software 3 Double click the Transfer icon Select the appropriate access and enter the PIN code 4 Highlight APS Transfer A new window appears in the top right of the scre...

Page 1002: ...ice and Maintenance Tasks After a successful changeover to the new APS an entry in the error memory is also made and the old APS on the MMC is deactivated This does not impede switching traffic The deactivated area is now available for a new APS transfer The positive or negative entry in the error memory is sent to the service center ...

Page 1003: ...ore extensive enhancements to the scope of ser vices An upgrade may also include modifications to hardware as well as error cor rections A software upgrade version hub changes the name of the version for ex ample from V1 0 to V2 0 A CDB conversion may be necessary HE642S 10 123 Production number software binder Feature package System up to and including V4 0 U HiPath3550 HiPath3500 HiPath 3350 HiP...

Page 1004: ... switch from the current software version to the new software version must take place The cur rent software is replaced by the software in the shadow area and thus deleted The changeover can either be started immediately once the software has been loaded or performed at a pre defined time Information about updating the system software and the HG 1500 software using HiPath Soft ware Manager can be ...

Page 1005: ...on number results in a change in the name of the version for example from V6 0 to V7 A CDB conversion may also be necessary 12 3 5 Upgrading HiPath 3000 For information on this procedure please see Section 9 2 Upgrading HiPath 3000 Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG introduced the new Re lease Management software in October 2006 Connected with this software are the following uniform vers...

Page 1006: ...ng the HiPath 3000 systems in the network and the installed HG 1500 boards HiPath Applications Information regarding the following software components MS Windows components MS Internet Explorer DNS server DHCP server Media Streaming TAPI CCMC CCMS CMD CSP CSPL Administration HiPath 5000 Server GetAccount HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Common Software Operating System Information regarding the current ...

Page 1007: ... or of all dis played HiPath 3000 systems Database backup With this menu item all databases Feature Server SQL Server are displayed in an over view It is possible to back up the data of one or of all database s Refer to the help provided with the HiPath Software Manager for information on backup with this tool Setting options It is possible to specify individually when a backup is to take place an...

Page 1008: ...type of backup are preset for the HiPath Software Manager during setup Restoring data The HiPath Software Manager allows damaged databases to be restored with the database backup The other system components are restored using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E for HiPath 3000 and HiPath 3000 Manager I for HG 1500 up to and including V2 0 or Web based man agement WBM for HG 1500 V3 0 or later ...

Page 1009: ...at the branch systems and central system are con nected with each other via an IP network System clients IP workpoint clients such as Open Stage CorNet IP HFA or OpenScape Personal Edition are supported For further information on the Small Remote Site concept refer to the HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Feature Description HiPath 3000 Element Manager The link between HiPath User Management and the HiPath 3000...

Page 1010: ...rther steps The IP workpoint clients in the Small Remote Sites branches should use different call numbers in normal mode registered with HiPath 4000 and in emergency mode regis tered with HiPath 3000 In this case the call numbers are assigned via HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E when config uring the IP workpoint clients system clients An IP workpoint client configured in this way can then be assigned a...

Page 1011: ...entation 12 4 2 Recording HiPath 3000 Board Status 12 4 2 1 Central Control Boards Run LED A RUN LED that displays the system s operating capacity is located on the central control board Table 12 2 RUN LED LED Status Meaning RUN LED Meaning Off No power On Reset switch pressed briefly Off Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun On S...

Page 1012: ...e of these announcement and music modules is displayed as Option 5 The ALUM4 module cannot be displayed 12 4 2 2 Power Supplies Table 12 3 Power Supply Status Displays Board Status display HiPath 3800 LUNA2 The LED displays the operating status on or off Powerbox PB3000 The LED displays the operating status on or off HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 PSUP The LED displays the 5 V out...

Page 1013: ... the reference clock is displayed No reference clock Reference clock for clock generator is created When viewing the board status using the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E all peripheral boards integrated into the system are presented in a table The status display is updated every 3 sec onds With Assistant T you can only view the status of one board at a time You can also update the status display by p...

Page 1014: ...e locked When attempting to lock out the last active trunk you are subsequently notified that remote ser vice through the service center is no longer possible 12 4 3 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status HiPath 3000 records the current status of each individual trunk in a table If the status changes the new status along with the time stamp is entered You can use HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E to view the...

Page 1015: ...cted station Language Menu language of selected station Connection status Inactive The telephone is idle Busy The telephone is off the hook but not yet di aled Waiting The telephone call is in the queue Connected The telephone is connected to a second telephone with a trunk or a hunt group member Holding The telephone is on hold Error The connection cannot be established due to an error for exampl...

Page 1016: ...s refer to the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Help V 24 Monitoring The number of sent received bytes within a selected time period can be recorded and then displayed saved using a text editor default MS WordPad The failure and restart of a V 24 interface generates an entry in the event log and releases a remote error signal V 24 failure Check printer error message V 24 restart Withdrawal of error mess...

Page 1017: ...a readable format English only You can also read out the trace data using remote service The ISDN Message Decoder is a 32 bit application which converts ISDN layer 3 messages and information elements into a readable format Since you cannot find out from the trace file whether it deals with an information element from a Euro ISDN or a QSig configuration you have to select the protocol You may selec...

Page 1018: ...ude data in the CorNet NQ container for example signaling messages station number information Encrypted payload from workpoint client to workpoint client and from gateway to workpoint client CorNet TS is encrypted The connection setup via CorNet TC is already partially encrypted The CorNet TS data records contained in this setup are completely encrypted This means that voice data in cluding DTMF t...

Page 1019: ... them clearly in a table rpcap Remote Packet Capture The rpcap protocol permits programs such as Wireshark to run on the destination system as a server recording data packets and transmitting them to a client The client processes analyzes and archives the data packets 12 4 8 2 Performing Monitoring To monitor the HG 1500 data packets the rpcap service in the HG 1500 WBM and the IP trace tool Wires...

Page 1020: ... of the administrator PC are excluded 5 Set additional settings as appropriate see www wireshark org 6 Click Start to begin recording data packets The data stream that comes from HG 1500 is displayed 3 Stopping monitoring To stop monitoring you must proceed in the following sequence in order to prevent HG 1500 from crashing 1 Stop Wireshark via Capture Stop 2 Stop the HG 1500 rpcap daemon 1 In the...

Page 1021: ...o trace files are available winnt system32 carlogfile txt provides details on which HG 1500 boards have logged on to the network and when winnt system32 rgtracefile txt provides details on when the individual HG 1500 boards were assigned a station num ber Presence Manager Two trace files are available winnt system32 dssdiagnosefile txt winnt system32 dsslogfile txt HiPath Manager PCM Administratio...

Page 1022: ...ager PCM program group was created when installing the HiPath Manager PCM server Administration and the trace monitor were integrated here To start the Trace Monitor select Start Programs HiPath HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor for HiPath Applications The Trace Monitor can be closed with Close in the File menu using the key combinations or via the System menu of the Trace Monitor Figure 12 3 Trace...

Page 1023: ...d Maintenance 12 4 9 3 The Screen Layout of the Trace Monitor When you start the Trace Monitor an application window with the following layout appears Figure 12 4 The Screen Layout of the Trace Monitor Trace window sy stem menu Title bar Menu bar Workspace open trace win dows Trace Monitor sy stem menu Minimize Maximize Exit Status bar ...

Page 1024: ...red Text Toggles between color option active and black and white display option not active for trace messages Add Date Timestamp Inserts a timestamp in each new trace message when the option is active Show Window for new Appli cation If this option is active one of the applications that writes trace messages is immediately displayed in a separate trace window when it is activated If the option is ...

Page 1025: ...s closed Print trace window content You also have an option that allows you to output the current status of a trace window to the configured Trace Monitor printer for documentation purposes For this select the Print Mes sages entry via the System menu or alternatively the Context menu right click in the Trace window of the relevant Trace window The current contents of the trace window are then sen...

Page 1026: ...d using the status bar For this select the Arrange Icons entry in the menu window 12 4 9 5 Exporting Trace Windows Each trace window has a capacity of 1 000 for the Server PC under Windows 95 98 or 5 000 entries for the Server PC under Windows NT or Windows 2000 When this capacity is reached the oldest entry is deleted from the trace window for each new entry To document a current situation from a...

Page 1027: ...ll user directory C Documents and Settings Windows User My Documents Application ID Trace File Name The following naming conventions apply to swap files Application ID Time trc The time is stored in YYYYMMDDhhmm format Example of a file name for a swapped out trace file Windows User Meier Application GetAccount Exported on 06 09 2004 at 16 57 C Documents and Settings Meier My Documents WACLIENT WA...

Page 1028: ...tiPoint 410 S and optiPoint 420 S telephones This test checks the display your number is displayed LEDs and ring tones The tests ends automatically after a period of time The test allows you to perform a visual and acoustic check of the components to ensure that they are functioning properly Test procedure on the system telephone The phone number date and time are normally shown in the display If ...

Page 1029: ...ed The events pro vide a quick and above all time specific overview of all relevant actions status information warning error etc The tool itself handles the event entries You can specify the length of the event file the validity of events in days the reaction when the maximum size has been reached and the display filter for example You can save the resulting event file log file under any name Star...

Page 1030: ...to display only the entries for the HiPath 5000 server You can further restrict the output under Category and Event ID Evaluating events Double click an entry in an Event Viewer area to obtain more precise information on an event Use the two arrow buttons to spring from one event to the next The HiPath 5000 Server entries in Table 12 8 are currently supported Saving the event file log file If prob...

Page 1031: ... A graphic map of the network displays the topology and the current status of the network com ponents For detailed information refer to the product specific documentation for HiPath Fault Manage ment SNMP functions Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP represents a convenient platform within the TCP IP protocol family for management tasks in the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 software SNMP is used ...

Page 1032: ...aximum number of trace entries per trace file TraceLevel 4 TraceLevel This value 1 8 defines the degree of detail 1 Low important events only 4 Stan dard including external interfaces 8 All 12 4 14 2 Analysis Using Customer License Agent CLA The CLA offers two analysis options Log files The Customer License Agent CLA manages a configuration log and error log Both logs are viewed using the CLM This...

Page 1033: ... MS Windows 2000 this directory normally has the name C WINNT temp while under MS Windows 2003 it is called C WINDOWS temp Each time a Web application is started by the Common Web Service TomCat Web server a separate subdirectory is created This subdirectory contains the trace files in XML format The subdirectory name follows the convention date_ DATE _time_ TIME In order to enable service support...

Page 1034: ...e saved in the temporary directory of the system see above swmreport xml contains the information generated during an update of the system in formation by the HiPath Software Manager invdataos xml contains the data for the operating system for the last update invdatasnmp xml contains the data for the HiPath 3000 5000 network from the last update invdataapps xml contains the data for the applicatio...

Page 1035: ...ample Fan Failure caused by failure of the fan with HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 Revisor Alarm caused by overflow of the log part of the MMC for example Too Many Key Modules caused by attaching more than the maximum possible num ber of optiPoint key modules specified in Table 10 9 Error Class B Service related errors Class B errors can be read out via the HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Event Log which c...

Page 1036: ...c knowledgement message via SN MP None 01 017 SNMP authenti cation fail Unauthorized ac cess attempt Check firewall settings in HiPath 3000 5000 Manag er E Network Firewall 01 018 SNMP 80 high watermark of log file Changes logged internally in the system 80 of write capacity used Read out data using Hi Path 3000 5000 Manager E Transfer Security Protocol 01 019 Sensor Alarm Temperature in Hi Path 3...

Page 1037: ... an unautho rized application Check firewall settings in HiPath 3000 5000 Manag er E Network Firewall 01 025 manual switch back from HiPath Manager Error Class 02 License Management Messages 02 002 START Grace Period HiPath License Management Start of grace peri od None The remaining li cense validity period is shown on the display 02 003 START Reg Linc File HiPath License Management Start of regu...

Page 1038: ... error on Line interruption Check the line and termi nal 09 030 short circuit er ror on Short circuit on the board specified Check the line terminal and port 09 031 under voltage error on Under voltage Check the power and line at the terminal s power supply unit 09 032 thermal over load error on The specified board is overheat ed Check the fan and air sup ply in the 19 housing Note the ambient tem...

Page 1039: ...9 042 no signal error on TMS2M STMD Alarm display An S2M error has oc curred No physical con nection available Check the S2M line and board If necessary reload the board or perform a hard re start If the error persists set up an ISDN trace 09 043 no signal error off TMS2M STMD Alarm display The S2M error has been corrected None 09 044 receive remote alarm error on TMS2M Alarm display An S2M error ...

Page 1040: ...hroni zation error on TMS2M A synchronization error has occurred Check the S2M line If necessary reload the board or perform a hard re start If the error persists set up an ISDN trace The problem may be caused by asynchro nous internal and external clock rates Data loss possi ble connection may be terminat ed 09 051 loss of synchroni zation error off TMS2M The synchroniza tion error has been corre...

Page 1041: ...rminals Set up a default trace High traffic load Distribute load to sev eral boards Board is faulty Re place board 09 066 Out of buffers for card error off Insufficient pool capacity on the specified SLMO board has been corrected None Error Class 11 General Messages 11 058 Too many L1 er rors Too many layer 1 errors Check the lines terminal and port A short circuit may have occurred Error Class 12...

Page 1042: ...n Interrupt Zero Divi sion Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 006 Invalid opcode Invalid Opcode Ex ception Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 007 TRAP V Instruc tions TRAPcc TRAP V Instructions Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 008 Privilege Violation Privilege Violation Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 009 Trace Trace ...

Page 1043: ...p Save a snapshot 12 018 machine check in terrupt HiPath 3800 Off set 0x0200 Ma chine Check Inter rupt Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 019 data storage inter rupt HiPath 3800 Off set 0x0300 Data Storage Interrupt Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 020 instr storage in terrupt HiPath 3800 Off set 0x0400 In struction Storage Interrupt Create a trace Create a ...

Page 1044: ...race Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 12 028 debug interrupt HiPath 3800 Off set 0x2000 Debug Interrupt Create a trace Create a stack dump Save a snapshot Error Class 15 Messages Concerning APS Transfer and Saving on Flash 15 000 Req to switch over APSXF Request for APS transfer None 15 001 APS switched over KDS ok APS transfer was successful None 15 002 APS switched over def KDS APS transfer w...

Page 1045: ...r or perform a speed upgrade If the error persists re place the MMC module An error oc curred while starting up the new APS The system has switched back to the old APS 15 006 APS Transfer disconnected APS transfer inter rupted Check the transmission link and interface Restart APS transfer 15 007 Country text transferred Country specific texts successfully transferred None 15 008 Error by deleting ...

Page 1046: ...n service fm Guided Maintenance 15 011 Speed Upgrade Speed upgrade was successful None Software was updated Previ ous CDB is still used 15 012 APSXF aborted APS transfer was manually stopped None Table 12 7 HiPath 3000 Class B Error Messages No HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Event Log Entry Meaning Required Measures Note ...

Page 1047: ...OSMOS timer er ror software timer administration Set up a trace using infor mation from BLS Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 16 006 Error in Cosmos Receive COSMOS receive error software message receipt Set up a trace using infor mation from BLS Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 16 007 COSMOS ID xx opcode 0xnnnn ercode 0xnnnn COSMOS error during restart Set up a trace using infor mation from B...

Page 1048: ...og file to the MMC module Check the MMC module and replace if necessary 16 017 CTXT take over failed Country specific texts cannot be ap plied Retransfer country specif ic texts and change the language again 16 020 CSTA length out of range CSTA interface Required length exceeds the per mitted range In correct internal pa rameters Use the CSTA browser application emulation to check the CSTA interfa...

Page 1049: ...license from the CLS and reli cense the system The remaining li cense validity period is shown on the display 18 016 HLM Feat ID xxx expiration started HiPath License Management The specified feature is still valid for up to 30 days If the customer still re quires this feature a new license file must be or dered and loaded to the system The remaining li cense validity period is shown on the displa...

Page 1050: ...deleted in each of these cases 18 019 HLM Invalid li cense data HiPath License Management The license file is in valid or has been manipulated Check licensing Load the original license file from the CLS and reli cense the system 18 020 HLM Lic failure period started HiPath License Management The system is no longer connected to Hi Path 5000 RSM Check and reestablish the connection to HiPath 5000 R...

Page 1051: ... the CLS and relicense the system Error Class 19 Network Services Messages 19 002 SNTP Server not responding No connection to the SNTP server Check the application and the connection Error Class 20 Call Processing Messages 20 002 RS232 DSR not Ready The RS232 V 24 interface is out of order Check the interface the line and the application 20 011 RS232 DSR ready The RS232 V 24 interface is now opera...

Page 1052: ... cre ated Perform a hard restart normally occurs automati cally This is caused by insufficient system memory capacity 20 034 CDR Data write failed Error while writing CDR data to the advanced call data memory MMC module If neces sary read out call data via TFTP The internal admin istration structure is also corrected if this is re quired 20 035 CDR Adm write failed Error while writing the administ...

Page 1053: ...ced call data memory was found during sys tem startup None 20 039 CDR Data over flow The advanced call data memory is full Read out call data 20 040 CDR Mem allo cated The advanced call data memory was successfully creat ed None 20 041 CDR Mem re leased The advanced call data memory was temporarily re leased None This message is issued after the call data memo ry has been completely read out It mu...

Page 1054: ...cribes the 64 MB MMC This does not apply to HiPath 2000 20 043 CDR MMC MMC full Memory on the MMC module or in the HiPath 2000 file system is insuf ficient for creating the advanced call data memory Error Class 21 Device Handler Messages 21 000 no dial tone de tected No dial tone de tected Use headset to check dial tone Replace port or terminal if necessary 21 001 dial tone detect ed Dial tone det...

Page 1055: ... has been corrected None 21 013 no ack from temp sensor No response from temperature sen sor 21 014 overload at code receiver Not enough DTMF receivers Use a larger system 21 015 overload at code transmit Not enough DTMF transmitters Use a larger system 21 019 Shorten Msg not successful Internal error An overlong ISDN message could not be shortened by deleting Facility IEs Set up a trace using inf...

Page 1056: ...does not support the board type Replace the board with a valid board type or remove it from the system The board may be too old or too new for the sys tem 26 001 card out of ser vice The specified board is out of or der None 26 002 More than al lowed amount of cards The maximum number permitted for a certain board type is exceeded Reduce the number of boards of this board type Note the maximum con...

Page 1057: ... via COSMOS in sufficient resourc es Set up a trace using infor mation from BLS Create a stack dump Save a snapshot 28 004 SLC Trace fin ished SLC LW trace transferred to trace memory Trace memory can now be read out 28 006 tttttttt hh mm ss DD MM YY Time stamp set in event log B memo ry None A time stamp current time and date is en tered when the event log B memory is cop ied This facili tates an...

Page 1058: ...unc tioned If this error persists check the board and the slot 29 025 card ist present LW has reset it self Loadware of speci fied board restart ed If this error persists check the board and the slot 29 035 ELIC deadlock no Interrupt from ELIC ELIC clock supply malfunction Check clock supply Check central control board Possible caus es Faulty clock supply Environmen tal influenc es Faulty con trol...

Page 1059: ...ionlink down 32 008 TIMEOUT during server msg 32 010 IVM Exception unexpected er ror IVM An unexpect ed error has oc curred Set up an IVM trace 32 011 IVM SW error IVM A software er ror has occurred Set up an IVM trace Upgrade IVM if necessary 32 013 IVM HD assign ment of memory space 80 IVM 80 of hard disk used Search IVM statistics for mailboxes with too many undeleted messages 32 014 IVM HD ful...

Page 1060: ... tion number length If the attempt is intentional create an IVM trace to de termine the subscriber who made the attempt 32 030 VMM Cmd resp timeout EVM Command response timeout Reload the board If the error persists re place the board 32 032 memory level of 80 EVM 80 of memory used Check EVM mailboxes for too many undeleted mes sages 32 033 Presence evt from EVM EVM Presence Event from EVM 32 041 ...

Page 1061: ...No Pill File select ed EVM No Pill File Selected Check available languag es on the EVM Load a language if neces sary 32 058 Philips API ER ROR EVM Philips API ERROR 32 059 I2C failure detect ed EVM I2C failure detected Error Class 40 Messages Concerning MMC Module Access 40 000 MMC not plugged or defec tive MMC module can not be accessed during startup MMC module is not connected Con nect the MMC ...

Page 1062: ...ver Table 12 8 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 Server Event De fault trap Error text Meaning User reaction Cate gory Source 1000 X Not de fined Unidentified logical TFTP er ror in HiPath 3000 5000 adm HiPath AllServ e 1010 X Socket error General socket error Save event file for er ror analy sis Shut down and re start server If error is still present restart the PC adm HiPath AllServ e 101...

Page 1063: ... event file for er ror analy sis Connection error HiPath 3000 5000 HIP problems Check if ping is working If ping is working wait 5 mins and re start server If ping is not work ing properly check if the Ping unsuc cessful error mes sage appears in the Event Viewer adm HiPath AllServ e 1017 X Error while sending to IP Adr Logical error when sending data to HiPath 3000 5000 Save event file for er ror...

Page 1064: ... unsuc cessful error mes sage appears in the Event Viewer adm HiPath AllServ e 1020 Receive success ful CDB page frame success ful read Information adm HiPath AllServ e 1021 Send success ful CDB page frame success ful write Event Properties con tains the corre sponding page frame ID Information fct adm HiPath AllServ e 1022 Connect success ful Positive ack from FCT con nection with Hi Path 3000 50...

Page 1065: ...00 nodes by the server Information vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1025 CDB transfer success ful write All frame pages successfully written from the server to all Hi Path 3000 5000 nodes Information vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1027 CallAd dressTab le and NodeIpT able transfer success ful Successful transfer of call address table and node IP ta ble to the sys tem by the serv er Information car HiPath AllServ e 102...

Page 1066: ...fer to IP Adr failed write Writing data to HiPath 3000 5000 with speci fied IP address failed Save event file for er ror analy sis Check HiPath 3000 5000 Check HG 1500 Check LAN Initiate HiPath 3000 5000 ping if necessary Load HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E data to the server again This initiates data transfer from the server to HiPath 3000 5000 vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1033 Data sync tile Modification t...

Page 1067: ...zz If 0xzzzzzzz 0x80070057 this is just inter nal information for Develop ment otherwise error Save event file for er ror analy sis If an error message appears RgTrace File txt and Carlog File must be saved reg HiPath AllServ e 1038 User in terface active on IP Adr The user inter face is active during a sync Trials are not canceled and are cyclically re peated until successful Information sync HiP...

Page 1068: ...iPath AllServ e 1041 No re sources in sys tem 1 API cannot open FCT as there is another API session ac tive e g user interface fct HiPath AllServ e 1042 Regs message IP Adr vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1043 Car up date node IP table en try IP Adr Database gen erates the node IP table per CDB for the car server Information vsrv HiPath AllServ e 1045 X Feature Server Service Started Version HVxxxB yy nnn T...

Page 1069: ...formation car HiPath AllServ e 1047 Registra tion re quest from IP Adr TheREGserver received a reg istrationrequest from HG 1500 Information reg HiPath AllServ e 10000 Wrong request ID Wrong UDP packet se quence asyn chronism Check LAN fct HiPath AllServ e 10001 Un known packet Unknown Hi Path 3000 5000 IP packet Information fct HiPath AllServ e 10002 X Socket receive TCP socket er ror Save event ...

Page 1070: ...tgoing call data record GetAc count 515 X Error 0x x in Func xd3 SaveKo mmend Descrip tion s e Er ror char e Descrip tion Error when sav ing an incoming data record GetAc count 515 X Error 0x x in Func Save New Price Descrip tion s e Er ror char e Descrip tion Error when sav ing a recalculat ed call data record GetAc count Table 12 8 Event Viewer Entries for the HiPath 5000 Server Event De fault t...

Page 1071: ... Stop ser vice GetAc count Error when reading start parameters from the HK Current user registry GetAc count 515 X Error when starting immedi ate print out Stop service GetAc count Error when starting immedi ate printout thread GetAc count 515 X Error 0x x in Func In sertSo fort Druck Descrip tion s e Er ror char e Descrip tion Error when sav ing a record for immediate print out GetAc count Table ...

Page 1072: ...etAc count 515 X Tapi Func s ID d Error s sz Tapi Func lLi neID szEr rorMess Error when call ing a TAPI func tion for a partic ular line GetAc count 515 X Tapi Func s Error s sz Tapi Func sz ErrorMes s Error when call ing a TAPI func tion GetAc count 515 X Box not found in data base cnt Box 0 SwitchID d nVN odeID d Node data has not yet been read GetAc count Table 12 8 Event Viewer Entries for the...

Page 1073: ...rror when sending the start CDR ser vice command GetAc count 514 X CDR Ser vice in PBX d by TSP already started TSP has al ready started the CDR ser vice GetAc count 515 X Error starting CDR ser vice on PBX d dwParam 2 0x x Undefined error when starting the CDR ser vice GetAc count 515 X Error sending com mand stop CDR Ser vice Error when sending the command to stop the CDR service GetAc count Tab...

Page 1074: ... X Error stopping CDR Ser vice Er rorCode 0x x dwParam 2 Undefined error when stopping the CDR ser vice GetAc count 513 X TAPI Reinit TAPI was reini tialized GetAc count 515 X Start ser vice er ror Data base connect error Error when opening the da tabase connec tion PCM 515 X Start ser vice er ror Misc data base er ror Error when reading out the values saved in the database PCM Table 12 8 Event Vi...

Page 1075: ...ually 12 5 2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Manually activating a restart reset reload Pressing the reset button on the central control board of HiPath 3000 initiates a Reset hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB if the button is pressed for less than 5 seconds The RUN LED lights up when the Reset button is pressed initiates a Reload if the button is pr...

Page 1076: ...e system with the current CDB Initiating Reload Card This the single board loading Loadware to reload Locking out and releasing boards and ports HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E enables you to lock out an entire subscriber line module or line circuit module and individual ports The lockout prevents renewed seizure after the current con nection has finished Release or lock out settings are retained after...

Page 1077: ...gnaling of error messages Remote service facilitates the administration and maintenance of various communication sys tems from a central location The connection to HiPath 3000 can be set up via the integrated digital modem B channel the integrated analog modem IMODN or the HG 1500 Special software programs such as pcANYWHERE facilitate connections to HiPath 5000 If the customer agrees Remote Acces...

Page 1078: ...subscriber lines Data transmission is supported according to Protocol X 75 The digital modem is treated as a pseudo port It receives a number in the system that can be reached internally and through direct internal dialing You can cancel the DID number manually to prevent external access Baud rate settings For information about setting the baud rate for different connection types between HiPath 30...

Page 1079: ...r correction Any one of these options establishes a connection using the integrated digital modem B chan nel or the integrated analog modem IMODN Callback HiPath 3000 can manage up to six different callback indices callback passwords and their rel evant callback numbers in which case the first callback connection is also the destination of the automatic error signaling For each callback connection...

Page 1080: ...15 minutes though you can end it manually at any time Procedure Activate the feature Remote access immediately after installation Automatic error signaling Class B errors can be automatically transferred to a service center For more information on this see Section 12 6 5 12 6 3 2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 This feature facilitates remote system administration by transmitting DTMF si...

Page 1081: ...ent the error reports 7 Caution In case of a power outage the not battery buffered SDRAM content of the MMC is completely lost Any individual settings made for the time parameter error signaling interval are also reset to the default value 15 minutes When the system is restarted the automatic recovery action reload CDB backup starts and the customer individual settings are reloaded Because this pr...

Page 1082: ...e of these options 12 6 7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP You can establish a connection between the system Plus product and the service center using either the integrated digital modem B channel or the integrated analog modem IMODN Data is exchanged in both cases using Point to Point Protocols PPP For further information see Features via LAN in the HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description ...

Page 1083: ...12 109 Nur für den internen Gebrauch Service Remote Service 12 6 7 3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP Plus products and the HiPath 3000 can transmit error messages SNMP traps to the service center For further information see SNMP Functionality in the HiPath 3000 5000 Feature Description ...

Page 1084: ...group is assigned a fixed user name and password You need a valid user name and password to access a user group Only the data authorized for the relevant user group can be read and administrated The following table provides a breakdown of the two user groups and their rights for each of the setup wizards Table 12 9 WBM User Groups with Associated Rights Wizard Customer Administrator Initial Instal...

Page 1085: ...ions and call pick up for incoming calls X X Call groups for configuring and modifying call groups incoming calls are signaled to all members of a call group X X Key programming for configuring and modifying key programming on the workpoints X X Internal phonebook for configuring and modifying en tries in the central phonebook X X DHCP for modifying to the DHCP server X Firewall for configuring an...

Page 1086: ...or querying the current status of network interfaces X X Dial up networking PSTN for querying information about existing dial up connections PSTN partners X X Stations for querying the data of all configured stations X X Events for querying the last 50 events trace messag es X X Expert Mode for configuring and modifying advanced features such as the networking of several HiPath 3000 5000 systems X...

Page 1087: ... users must be identified by a user name and authorized by a password This applies to all local and remote administration and maintenance procedures using HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Assistant T HiPath 3000 5000 Manager C Manager TC and AMHOST After the first system startup and during country initialization you can select between the fol lowing security options variable password default Fixed passw...

Page 1088: ... users and their passwords can be configured in the user administration If a user forgets a password it has to be deleted and re configured by a different authorized user If all authorized users forget their passwords the system must be regenerated Fixed password concept When using a fixed password only fixed user groups with unchangeable default user names and default passwords are used Also new ...

Page 1089: ...initialization in a system with a variable password the previously created user names and passwords remain intact as long as you do not subsequently change the pass word type If a CDB is read from a system in which the default user names and passwords were changed this CDB cannot be loaded into a HiPath 3000 system that was changed to a fixed password type Before reading this CDB you have to set u...

Page 1090: ...elated log files Reader rights to system data error memory for example not including confidential cus tomer information X X2 2 As long as no user is assigned to the Audit user group 3 Access rights to all system data not including development access rights as long as no us ers are assigned to other user groups X 4 Access rights to confidential customer infor mation Executing customer actions print...

Page 1091: ... Manager C office office Development 1 Assessing and archiving backup related log files Reader rights to system data error memory for exam ple not including confidential customer information X X 2 Access rights to all system data not including develop ment access rights X X 3 Access rights to confidential customer information Executing customer actions printing out certain lists for example X X X ...

Page 1092: ...gital modem B channel or the integrated analog modem However the user is required to establish a 5 digit access code beforehand HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E remote callback connection Log on by entering your user name and password The system can be accessed using the integrated digital modem B channel or the inte grated analog modem However you have to set up a callback index beforehand HiPath Softw...

Page 1093: ...ening the customer database offline you are requested to enter your user name and password The data that you enter is compared to the data in the user table In this case the user group verified during this process also determines the access rights When loading an offline customer database into HiPath 3000 the user table that goes with it should not be loaded into the system Otherwise the system sp...

Page 1094: ...mmand entry 12 7 2 1 1 Format Identification and Command Entry The following format information is logged Assistant T 1 All activities are logged regardless of system access The respective code with the most important parameters is recorded as the command entry station number for example Manager TC 2 Same as Assistant T 1 Session Information 3 The system access is logged regardless of whether it i...

Page 1095: ...seudo Assistant T format 7 The HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E records the offline changes of a CDB as a simulated Assistant T command For data areas subject to change by HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E pseudo areas are generated When loading an offline CDB into the system the following simulated commands are logged as command entries C1 Pseudo area System parameter C1 1 System fags CMI C1 2 System intercep...

Page 1096: ...nter HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E online 8 Archives from the log file and the user administration are logged Possible command en tries are D1 1 Archive D2 1 New user D2 2 Delete user D3 1 Change password Logging External Accesses Solutions Applications Plus products used with AMHOST can only make limited changes Because these changes automatically run simultaneously Check In and Check Out for hotel ...

Page 1097: ... until you have logged on as a user with Revisor rights Archive If you request an archive storage the system checks whether or not there is already an ar chive file file extension arc If it is a file with log data from a previous archive the file must match the current customer In case of a positive result the system log entries are retrieved and attached to the existing data in the archive file A...

Page 1098: ...mes and rewritten them to the system The Customer pnkm user in A Administration user group has changed two additional station names The Revisor has retrieved the most recent log entries and printed them out 1050 00 11 25 15 57 10 rev R 6 D1 1 Archive 1051 00 11 25 15 58 22 rev R 3 A0 2 Logout procedure 1052 00 11 26 09 20 15 serv S 3 A0 1 Login procedure 1053 00 11 26 09 21 35 serv S 4 A1 1 Databa...

Page 1099: ...work Chapter contents This chapter covers the following topics Topic Network protocols page 13 2 Standards Supported page 13 4 QoS Quality of Service page 13 5 HiPath s Network Analysis Service page 13 6 LIM LIMS board for LAN connection page 13 7 HG 1500 Board page 13 8 IP Trunking page 13 53 IP Payload Switching page 13 60 Applications over IP page 13 62 Administration Fault Management page 13 6...

Page 1100: ...bodies and standardization drives The main standards are as follows H 323 H 450 x SIP Session Initiation Protocol for Internet conferencing and telephony MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol Whereas H 323 and H 450 are real ITU T standards SIP is an industry de facto standard from the IETF Internet Engineering Task Force MGCP emerged from the SGCP Simple Gateway Control Protocol and the IPDC Intern...

Page 1101: ...col SIP Q SIP Q V1 SIP QSig is a network protocol enhanced by the QSig signaling protocol QSig is in turn enhanced by CorNet NQ In SIP Q V1 QSig incl CorNet NQ is tunneled via SIP This enables more features to be implemented between the communication systems QSig is a signaling protocol based on ISDN for networking communication systems from differ ent manufacturers In addition to SIP Q V1 SIP Q V...

Page 1102: ...hernet with or without VLAN PPP Frame Relay Protocols with without compression RTP UDP IP Security VPN tunnel Redundancy For example T 38 Packaging the number of samples that are transported per package Notes G 711 ITU standard for voice codecs 64 Kbps ISDN voice quality G 722 High quality voice co dec 48 56 or 64 Kbps Better voice quality than G 711 G 723 1 ITU standard for voice codecs 5 3 or 6 ...

Page 1103: ... available No feedback due to insufficient monitoring Architecture not suitable for specialized VoIP control functions Topic Cross Reference Goals of QoS Abschnitt 13 3 1 auf Seite 13 5 QoS in the Router Abschnitt 13 3 2 auf Seite 13 5 Problems IP does not guarantee any bandwidths QoS is not part of H 323 Consequences Time problems due to large e mail attachments and web surfing Network congestion...

Page 1104: ...r Customer benefits and cost effectiveness Preparation of the network for future applications VoIP Determination of current traffic volume and percentage utilization baselining Decision making assistance for the introduction of VoIP solutions Technical specifications Network analysis performance specification Examination of the suitability of customer networks for Siemens Enterprise Communica tion...

Page 1105: ...all central control boards of HiPath 3000 with the exception of the CBSAP HiPath 3800 the CBCC HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 from S30810 Q2935 A401 or later and the CBRC HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 from S30810 Q2935 Z401 or later The board provides an Ethernet 10BaseT 10 megabit LAN connector via an 8 pin RJ45 jack The LAN Interface Module for SAPP LIMS is an optional plug in card for the CBSAP central cont...

Page 1106: ...stems nodes must be consid ered as gatekeeper to gatekeeper communication Registration between HG 1500 modules of networked systems is not performed The CorNet NQ protocol tunneled in H 323 via Annex M1 is used The breakdown of HG 1500 resources into signaling and payload resources is a basic feature HiPath 3000 5000 Central Board ISDN Board HG 1500 Client LAN ISDN telecommunicati ons network HiPa...

Page 1107: ...gateway when configured appropriately by HiPath 3000 Manager E In the case of systems with more than one HG 1500 board payload resources are monitored by the node central resource manager This is a self configuring service Signaling resources are centrally provided by the first HG 1500 board This signaling gateway also accesses other media gateway resources codecs B channels and signaling data for...

Page 1108: ...h 4000 V5 and later systems only SIP Q V2 protocol is used for IP networking between these systems and only CorNet NQ is used for TDM networking CorNet IP protocol is no long er supported DMC should be disabled in a homogeneous HiPath 3000 5000 network If a network with Hi Path 4000 systems version 2 0 or later exists in which DMC is configured the DMC feature should be enabled in the HiPath 3000 ...

Page 1109: ...th 3800 the HXGS3 board in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 the HXGR3 board in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 The power supply comes from the system System requirements for HiPath 3000 5000 At least one Euro ISDN basic connection connection to the network or another HiPath system At least one free slot in the basic system System Environment Shared switched LAN 10 1000 Base T Client server and peer to peer...

Page 1110: ...s H 323 This is a standard for packet oriented multimedia communication systems and was developed by the ITU International Telecommunication Union HG 1500 uses H 323 V4 0 but can also communicate with earlier versions of the H 323 protocol backward compatibility is guaran teed Fast Connect fast start is supported The Fast Connect feature lets HG 1500 set up a multi media channel without waiting fo...

Page 1111: ...s a connection oriented mode for data transmis sion TCP guarantees a sequenced error free flow controlled transmission of data packets However this can delay data transfer and reduce throughput H 323 uses the end to end ser vices of TCP for the H 245 control channel data channels and the call control channel UDP The UDP User Datagram Protocol provides a connectionless transmission mode that prom i...

Page 1112: ...rotocol for data transfer to IP or MAC addresses without a connection ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Control protocol that supports IP protocol with error messages UDP User Datagram Protocol Transport protocol for data transfer without a connection TCP Transmission Control Protocol Transport protocol for connection oriented data transfer DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Protocol fo...

Page 1113: ...fing LAND identical source and destination IPs so called Christmas trees all TCP flags set etc H 225 0 Annex G Signaling protocol for edge gatekeepers in different domains Q 931 Signaling protocol for call setup and clear down between two endpoints RAS Control Defines signaling between client and gate keeper for detection and registration H 235 Standard Signaling protocol for authentication and en...

Page 1114: ...ch office to a company network for example as well as over a private IP network to link departments in a single location for example In IP networking IP connections transparently replace conventional dedicated lines or PSTN dial up lines between the telephone systems involved Traffic between these systems can thus be managed cost effectively via IP connections In house connections can use existing...

Page 1115: ...ion is logged on to Once the attendant queue reaches a predefined length calls can be automatically forward ed to an overflow destination Cross node busy signaling is available when using optiClient Attendant Virtual ports Virtual ports are used for the signaling of statuses and calls on all systems They are not linked to physical terminal interfaces The corresponding boards must not be inserted V...

Page 1116: ...an be configured individually If so configured Fallback to SCN function can be used to forward a call automatically to an SCN connection if the IP connection fails When an external call is forwarded to another node transit break in the caller s number is converted automatically to the international format The seizures codes used to date are replaced by port numbers This type of configuration is be...

Page 1117: ... 19 Nur für den internen Gebrauch HiPath 3000 5000 in the LAN Network HG 1500 Board In HiPath 3000 V8 and HiPath 4000 V5 and later systems only SIP Q V2 protocol is used for IP networking between these systems and only CorNet NQ is used for TDM networking CorNet IP protocol is no longer supported ...

Page 1118: ...but in HiPath 3000 Manager E The following combinations of VoIP connections via the HG 1500 are possible IP to IP for example subscriber C to subscriber D or subscriber D to subscriber F IP to local SCN for example subscriber D to subscriber B Local SCN to IP for example subscriber B to subscriber C IP to PSTN for example subscriber C to subscriber E PSTN to IP for example subscriber E to subscrib...

Page 1119: ...with two different tools HiPath 3000 Manager E Extending the existing HiPath 3000 customer database to include information for IP networking HG 1500 WBM Performing HG 1500 board settings 13 6 4 1 General Parameters for Voice over IP Before configuring system clients you must configure the valid parameters for both variants in HiPath 3000 Manager E Echo You can define here how to compensate for the...

Page 1120: ...nce with industry standards G 711 A law G 711 µ law G 723 G 729A and G 729AB The codecs can be arranged according to their priority The gateway automatically attempts to use a codec with the highest possible priority for each connection The HG 1500 supports the following codecs G 711 A law and µ law voice coding an ITU International Telecommunication Union standard for voice coding at 56 or 64 Kbp...

Page 1121: ... The HG 1500 supports echo suppression in accordance with G 168 to ensure acceptable voice quality in the WAN Echo suppression is effective for round trip delays of up to 48 msec Dynamic jitter buffer The dynamic jitter buffer eliminates the distortion caused by fluctuations in the arrival of voice and video packets Individual packet delays can be a result of network overload or internal pro cessi...

Page 1122: ...r transmissions If all involved devices support VLAN in accordance with IEEE802 1q all VoIP traffic can be placed in a separate VLAN For administration ac cess in this case LAN switches must provide individual computers with access to multiple VLAN segments Not more than 20 of the available bandwidth should be used Not more than 10 of the total data traffic should be broadcast packets The error ra...

Page 1123: ...er 3 switches and routers or with Layer 2 switches that recognize multicasting Not more than 40 network load without VoIP traffic Less than 40 broadcast packets per second if possible Environmental requirements for fax modem over G 711 Fax modem over G 711 can be enabled if the IP network satisfies the following requirements If the above values are not observed in the IP network the fax or modem t...

Page 1124: ...se proxy connection The advantage of E 711 is that unlike T 38 high speed faxes in other words faxes with a transmission rate 14400 bps can also use this higher transmission rate on a good net work while high speed faxes must be slowed down to a speed of 14400 bps when T 38 is used T 38 T 38 is an ITU standard that describes how two fax machines communicate over IP This standard refers to a real t...

Page 1125: ... infor mation Security mechanisms FEC procedure Forward Error Correction In this procedure every mandatory message is given a number of previously com pressed packets The number of FEC packets sent with the message is indicated in a supplementary field that can change at any time To enable the remote station better to identify the packet sequence each mandatory message is given a sequence number R...

Page 1126: ...ot support compressed transmission G 723 The transport and security protocols that can be used depend on the modems in operation and not on the HG 1500 V 90 Standard The V 90 Standard 56K is supported in the modem over G 711 procedure Please note however that an approximate speed of 56 Kbps is only reached in the downstream direction Bit Rate Adaptation V 110 The HG 1500 supports V 110 bit rate ad...

Page 1127: ... client connected to the HG 1500 over IP can use an Internet connec tion via this modem Multiple clients can utilize the Internet connection simultaneously thanks to NAT support see Section 13 6 8 2 Network Address Translation NAT Clients that are connected to the HG 1500 via a PSTN dial in connection RAS functionality can also utilize the Internet connection If appropriately configured these user...

Page 1128: ...interface typically an xDSL modem Connections from the LAN to the SCN are set up on the basis of the IP address addressed by the LAN The IP address is converted to a station number this requires appropriate configura tion of the routing and dial tables A prerequisite is that the remote station has a static IP ad dress After the connection has been set up the HG 1500 can accept a dynamic IP address...

Page 1129: ...ilable to prevent unauthorized usage Checking Caller Numbers Connections from the PSTN can be checked against a list of known users using the caller num ber Users whose connections do not transmit a caller number for example analog telephones can call an MSN that is set up especially for them Callback All users can be configured so that they can be called back Thus PPP connections are only possibl...

Page 1130: ...ly A static multilink uses the same number of B channels for the duration of the connection A dy namic multilink adds or removes channels depending on current channel load These param eters can be configured 13 6 8 5 Short hold After a preconfigured time period with no data transfer over a PPP connection the HG 1500 can clear down the connection automatically 13 6 8 6 IP Control Protocol IPCP The ...

Page 1131: ... gateway This data can be read out by the IP Accounting Client an application on a PC by means of a TCP connection and then pro cessed for billing for example The IP accounting client is a supplementary product instructions for its use are described in the accompanying documentation The IP Accounting Client must be connected to the gateway via a permanent IP connection To ensure data protection a ...

Page 1132: ...et to form a closed virtual network Communication in a VPN is tunneled through the Internet encapsulated and is protected from tapping and access by third parties such as Internet users and providers that are not a part of the VPN A VPN enables an intranet to be extended beyond the LAN for example to home workstations or branch offices without requiring a dedicated line Figure 13 4 VPN Sample Conf...

Page 1133: ...tware installed on the teleworker PC must be compatible with the VPN functions of HG 1500 A VPN Virtual Private Network is a network where communication is protected as far as hu manly possible against tapping clandestine modification and the misrepresentation of fake tun nel endpoints The required protocols are available in the HG 1500 Before a VPN can be created however the gateway itself and es...

Page 1134: ...is done all user settings are lost and all user data transmissions are interrupted until the gateway is recon figured At this point the gateway is in activation of SSL mode In this mode it can only be config ured using CLI at the V 24 interface WBM Telnet HiPath 3000 Manager E and SNMP are disabled 3 The gateway must be set up for SSL mode First the CLI command create SSL cer tificate must be used...

Page 1135: ... and the key s period of validity This ensures the security of a VPN connection session VPN connections with the HG 1500 always require three SAs one for initial mutual verification of identity and exchange of keys and one for each direction of the connection once it is set up The SAs are negotiated using the IKE Internet Key Exchange in accordance with RFC2409 The required keys are exchanged with...

Page 1136: ...pports certificates according to X 509 HG 1500 supports DSA and RSA as Public Key algorithms HG 1500 as Certification Authority CA As long as no other CA is available the HG 1500 can to a certain degree act as a CA It can generate pairs of public and private keys issue and sign relevant certificates and save keys and their corresponding certificates to files There is however no option to automatic...

Page 1137: ...ns are met by all the stations involved Bandwidth Management Bandwidth management controls the bandwidth for Voice over IP between two nodes with HG 1500 which are routed via ISDN not usually required for LAN connections Five simultaneous calls can be made via one B channel if the audio codec is set to G 723 However the standard packetizing setting must be increased from 1 to 3 An additional B cha...

Page 1138: ...G 1500 performs channel bundling with HXGS3 HXGR3 and one PDM1 extension module up to 16 B channels are possible HiPath 3300 3350 offers a maximum of eight B channels at the CO IP is supported as the transport protocol In the case of HG 1500 with two LAN interfaces routing is also possible between the two LAN interfaces Features PPP connections LAN LAN connection and teleworking PPP multilink conn...

Page 1139: ... and HG 1500 B via the trunk all HG 1500 A and B devices connected to the LAN can avail of the connection In this case the charges are allocated to the station number of the HG 1500 A board port which established the connection As is standard with today s routers call charges can only be allocated to the router station num ber and not to specific LAN devices or applications Figure 13 5 Routing wit...

Page 1140: ...performed via the station number entered in Setup or in the case of analog stations via the DID number entered under ISDN peer 13 6 14 Internet Access One or more client PCs can directly access the Internet using a Web browser The connection from the LAN is set up via ISDN or DSL In general access is possible from all PCs Please note that this is not allowed for all tariffs of every provider Inter...

Page 1141: ...tions with a speed of 768 Kbps downstream and 128 Kbps upstream The use of this data interface does not seize any T Net or ISDN channels Function In contrast to T ISDN the NTBA is not connected directly to the main station but rather down stream of a splitter BBAE This device can be seen as a DSL speed distributor between the ISDN connection and data transmission The splitter has a TAE jack to whi...

Page 1142: ...IP networks within companies Consequently addresses from the same IP network can frequently be used in many compa nies The IP address mapping feature was developed to enable users to reach these addresses via a unique routing entry despite the multiplicity of entries When routing to specific partners defined during configuration HG 1500 exchanges the private IP addresses used in its own LAN for ot...

Page 1143: ...a HG 1500 from the internal LAN to the ISDN and vice versa A firewall is not practical for telematic functions Rules for these functions for example trunk access and their call numbers can be saved in HiPath 3000 The following information is intended specifically for the router HG 1500 Station number verification incoming only Verification of the station number of the calling station station authe...

Page 1144: ...stered LAN components Firewall Permit Firewall In the case of a permit firewall only configured components can access board services when the firewall is activated All board services are automatically denied to unregistered LAN com ponents The board features different protection mechanisms for implementing this security Stateful packet filtering for communication with the LAN Stateful packet filte...

Page 1145: ...Test fails This is especially important for data connections to ensure that the applications involved can react appropriately and do not stall 13 6 15 4 Monitoring IP Data Packages with rpcap and Wireshark Ethereal Tracing via the HIP interface The HIP interface interface between HiPath 3000 and HG 1500 cannot be traced directly However external connections to the HIP interface via the LAN interfa...

Page 1146: ...orted management enables gateway integration in network management sys tems Systems like this can manage devices from other manufacturers HG 1500 supports SNMP versions 1 and 2 Information such as statistics can be read and some important data can be modified using SNMP Traps are also supported HTTP applications via a command interface HG 1500 configuration data can be read out and modified and co...

Page 1147: ...must have a user access for MGA All accesses must have the same name and password This access must have root access privileges The slave gateways must be entered on the master gateway The list of slave gateways can also be imported by another master gateway if necessary Using MGA The administrator first configures the master gateway as required He then uses a command to transfer this configuration...

Page 1148: ... Settings AF EF Code points are defined and based on these codepoints two different procedures are used for pro cessing the payload of different marked data flows The Expedited Forwarded EF procedure based on RFC 2598 guarantees a constant band width for data in this class If this defined value is reached all packets that exceed this band width are rejected A separate class is defined for EF on HG...

Page 1149: ...e over IP Call Signaling for connection setup in H 323 Data Payload for example for IP networking with fax or modem Network Control for example SNMP traps The remaining data traffic is marked disabled that is 00 The following table shows the relationship between the various codepoints of DiffServ IP pre cedence and the User Priority field in the Ethernet header Table 13 4 Codepoint Implementation ...

Page 1150: ...d in the last column is set when IEEE 802 1p is active QoS can be activated for the second LAN interface as well as for the ISDN partner For this interface the interface is extended by an additional transmission rate limitation The function of the quality evaluation corresponds to the ISDN peer procedure The average transmission rate is set in configuration data AF 42 100100 90 x 011 60 011 AF 43 ...

Page 1151: ...is a significant saving on costs by using a single infrastructure for data and voice This advantage can be even further expanded by using the voice compression procedure Compression enables existing lines to be used much more ef fectively For example up to three calls can be conducted simultaneously on a single ISDN channel if an optimized compression algorithm is used A considerable reduction in ...

Page 1152: ... voicemail over the IP network Fax Group 3 and analog Modem as well as Data Transmission with X 75 over IP Implementation of the integrated router HG 1500 means that analog fax and modem connec tions as well as data connections of the type X 75 can be transmitted between IP networked communications platforms without the need for additional hardware The system recognizes the connection type require...

Page 1153: ...nsole can be configured within the IP network The net work wide busy signal option is possible here Automatic Routing Automatic routing to a backup or alternative network can be executed for new connections A voice network ISDN for example can also operate as a backup network This ensures that the high availability of the HiPath 3000 5000 will not be affected when IP networks are being used by voi...

Page 1154: ...e created to ensure that the IP address of the correct target node is implemented A network with either open or closed numbering should be configured for this purpose When using closed numbering each station number in the network can have up to seven digits whereas in open numbering the node number station number together must not exceed sev en digits Standard Compliance Connection protocol Voice ...

Page 1155: ...shown on display Callback on busy free Advice of charges output at subscriber line AOC D Call forwarding no answer Call forwarding rerouting for optimization of B channel use Message waiting indicator for callbacks and voicemail mes sages Call waiting Network wide class of service max 4 classes of service Additional system servic es Network wide shared numbering plan Display of name and number sup...

Page 1156: ...night answer for example Central attendant console optiClient Attendant with busy sig nal the states free internal external busy and faulty are sig naled for stations in IP networked communications platforms Central attendant console functions forward assign recall hold Use of only one B chan nel over CorNet N subset The following features cannot be used over a dedicated line if a B channel has al...

Page 1157: ... LMHOSTS Sample entry 192 168 10 10 HG1500 192 168 10 20 PC1 Do not forget to press Return after the last entry Once the LMHOSTS HOSTS file has been created a ping command with the name for example Ping HG 1500 should be transmitted to the partner Since browsing is not transferred in the case of routers broadcast messages the other PC can only be found by right clicking the Network Neighborhood an...

Page 1158: ...asing to use B channels we have managed to preserve HG 1500 resources and facilitate a higher volume of network internal call traffic A B channel is still required on the HG 1500 for connections to the following stations and lines UP0 E stations Analog stations ISDN stations trunk and tie lines MSI S0 S2M Example a consultation call to an optiPoint 500 telephone is set up during an existing connec...

Page 1159: ...brauch HiPath 3000 5000 in the LAN Network IP Payload Switching Prerequisites The following components are necessary for using payload switching IP telephones and clients OpenStage CorNet IP HFA SIP optiPoint 410 420 CorNet IP HFA SIP OpenScape Personal Edition HG 1500 boards with Digital Signal Processor DSP voice and data ...

Page 1160: ...old value determining the call data buffer capacity around 80 percent of the call data buffer full the TFTP client HiPath 3000 5000 sends call data to the TFTP server external application If the system cannot set up a connec tion to the TFTP server it addresses an alternative server If this server is also unavailable it outputs an SNMP trap or error message Unable to output data The system tries t...

Page 1161: ... The external application TFTP client requests output of the call data records To do this the application must set up a connection and indicate the service GET gez txt after which it re ceives all accumulated call data records It releases the connection after the transfer The application s request for call data can be controlled automatically or using an SNMP trap see Section 13 10 2 HiPath 3000 5...

Page 1162: ...e TCP IP server implemented in HiPath 3000 5000 as well as the IP address Data packets sent from an application to HiPath 3000 5000 that is packets containing the HiPath IP ad dress TCP port 7001 and protocol type TCP are accepted for further processing HiPath 3000 V7 and later systems support CSTA monitoring of connections to ITSPs This en ables call center applications for example to be used eve...

Page 1163: ...tion from one or more PCs using SNMP The following functionalities can be implement ed Administration and fault management of a system SNMP APS update TFP CDB backup on TFTP server Network management Figure 13 9 HiPath 3000 5000 Administration over LAN e g PC with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E SNMP HiPath 3000 5000 Central Board LIM Client LAN e g PC with Network Management e g PC with Network Manage...

Page 1164: ...ternal management applications such as HP Open View and IBM Tivoli to access data in HiPath 3000 5000 using SNMP messages such as GET SET TRAP implementing remote maintenance tasks online port status enabling and disabling ports determining free ports HiPath Fault Management transmit service related Class B errors visualizing the operating status of HiPath 3000 5000 systems 13 10 2 2 Overview of S...

Page 1165: ...y data structure time stamp error class error description These components use the IP protocol according to OSI layer 3 and the UDP protocol accord ing to layer 4 The SNMP protocol stack uses port numbers The system supports the SNMP protocol version 1 0 SNMP Messages The following commands control SNMP messages for communication between the SNMP management agent HiPath 3000 5000 and external appl...

Page 1166: ...gnostic traps Security traps License traps Traps for internal errors The following tables list the individual traps for each of these classes A distinction is made un der Type between hardware traps HW and software traps SW Table 13 6 Generic SNMP Traps MIB 2 Trap COLD START WARM START INTERFACE UP INTERFACE DOWN AUTHENTICATION ERROR incorrect SNMP community name Table 13 7 General Traps HG 1500 S...

Page 1167: ...C error Table 13 9 Threshold Statistic Resource Diagnostic Traps HG 1500 Specific Type SW HW Trap Message Description HW MSG_IP_LINK_FAILURE IP Link 1 up down HW MSG_IP_LINK2_FAILURE IP Link 2 up down HW MSG_OAM_HIGH_TEMPERATURE_EXCEPTION Temperature limit reached too hot SW MSG_GW_OBJ_MEMORY_EXHAUSTED Out of memory SW MSG_GW_OBJ_ALLOC_FAILED Out of memory signaled by external source SW MSG_GW_OBJ...

Page 1168: ... information only Table 13 10 Security Traps HG 1500 Specific Type SW HW Trap Message Description SW MSG_HACKER_ON_SNMP_PORT_TRAP Unauthorized access to SNMP port Table 13 11 License Traps HG 1500 Specific Type SW HW Trap Message Description SW MSG_LIC_DATA_ACCEPTED License data accepted SW MSG_LIC_DATA_CORRUPTED License data incomplete SW MSG_LIC_DATA_NOT_ACCEPTED License data not accepted Table ...

Page 1169: ...unctions The SNMP functions include With MIB browser and standard MIB based on RFC1213 querying and modifying standard MIB 2 parameters With MIB browser and private MIB querying and modifying HG 1500 s private MIB parameters With HiPath 3000 Manager E defining communities of standard parameters classes of service defining trap communities and stations to which the traps are sent defining the trap ...

Page 1170: ... be deactivated warm start cold start authentication failure 2 Enterprise traps can be configured data init WARNING forced data reinitialization memory low WARNING memory resources below the threshold duplicate mac MINOR duplicated MAC address ip firewall WARNING IP firewall violation mac firewall WARNING MAC firewall violation isdn access WARNING ISDN access verification SNMP information can also...

Page 1171: ...iPath 3000 5000 via the LAN Interface You can administer HiPath 3000 5000 via a computer connected to the LAN Model specific data Topic HiPath 3800 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3300 Feature available in x x x Hardware requirements HG 1500 Software requirements V5 0 V1 2 V1 2 HiPath 3000 5000 PC with HiPath 3000 5000 Manager E Central Board LIM Client LAN A HG 1500 board can be used i...

Page 1172: ...HiPath 3000 5000 in the LAN Network Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 13 74 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation h3h5_in_the_lan fm Administration Fault Management ...

Page 1173: ...viously used code a code appears in the second line of the display You can use this code to go directly to the desired menu segment A 2 Accessing system administration Users can access system administration by entering a user name ID and password authen tication Depending on the active password concept refer to Section 12 7 1 3 for more details the procedure is as follows Page 12 113 contains an e...

Page 1174: ...d dialing system 13 Account codes 14 Set up station 15 CO call privileges 16 Incoming calls 17 Networking 18 Traffic restriction 19 Displays 20 ISDN parameters 21 Analog CO interface 22 System settings 23 Code 24 Door relay 25 Announcement Music 26 Relays 27 Sensors HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 only 28 Edit CDB 29 System details 30 Remote service 31 Call distribution 32 Paging 3...

Page 1175: ...ong 11 3 2 Station number format suppress digits 0 no 1 yes 11 3 3 Incoming calls 0 no 1 yes 11 3 4 Call duration 0 no 1 yes 11 3 5 Output MSN 0 no 1 yes 11 3 6 Call charge display 1 Amount 2 Pulses 11 3 7 Outgoing without connection 0 no 1 yes 11 4 Call charge factor Enter 0 to 10000 11 5 ISDN factor Enter 0 to 10000 11 6 Currency alphanumeric entry of max 3 characters not for U S 11 7 Call log 0...

Page 1176: ...11 2 PhoneMail 5 digits 14 11 3 Loudspeaker 14 11 4 Answer Machine 14 11 5 External MOH 14 11 6 P O T MW LED 14 11 7 PhoneMail 6 digits 14 11 8 Door station with pulsed loop 14 11 9 Memo 14 11 10 Modem 14 12 Station names alphanumeric up to 16 character1 14 13 Override 0 denied 1 allowed 14 14 Associated Dialing 0 denied 1 allowed 14 15 DISA 0 denied 1 allowed 14 16 Call waiting rejection 0 off 1 ...

Page 1177: ... Data compression 0 no 1 yes 14 26 Select language 11 German 12 US English 13 French 14 Spanish 15 English 16 Italian 17 Dutch 18 Portuguese 19 Finnish 20 Czech 21 Danish 22 Swedish 23 Norwegian 24 Turkish 25 Telekom German 26 Polish 27 Hungarian 28 Russian 29 Greek 30 Slovenian 31 Serbo Croatian 32 Estonian 33 Latvian 34 Lithuanian 35 Chinese 36 Slovakian 37 Catalonian 38 German 2 39 English 2 40...

Page 1178: ... 0 not authorized 1 authorized 14 36 Forwarding CFSS 14 37 Speaker calling 14 38 Bar speaker calling 15 CO call privileges 15 1 Direct trunk access day specify reference station Enter new data 0 No trunk access except by system speed dialing 1 Incoming only 2 7 Allowed list Allowed list 1 6 8 13 Denied list Denied list 1 6 14 Full access 15 2 Direct trunk access night specify reference station Ent...

Page 1179: ... by system speed dialing 1 Incoming only 2 7 Allowed lists 1 6 AL 1 to AL 6 8 13 Denied lists 1 6 DL 1 to DL 6 14 Full access full 15 7 Toll restriction 0 Digit by digit 1 En bloc sending 15 8 Switched trunk authorization 15 9 Toll restriction private 16 Incoming calls 16 10 Internal station numbers 16 10 1 Station 16 10 1 1 Boards 16 10 1 2 Change station number 16 10 1 3 Find station number 16 1...

Page 1180: ...Hunt group call 16 15 1 Called station no select group and assign destination 16 15 2 Ring type select group and type 1 Circular hunt group 2 Linear hunt group 3 Group call 4 Group call no answer 5 Basic MULAP 6 Executive MULAP 7 Group call call waiting 16 15 3 Group name select group and enter name alphanumeric 1 16 15 4 Select host master executive group and station only stations that are not th...

Page 1181: ...s in satellites and in the central office 16 18 2 Internal calls select station group up to and including V1 2 70 V3 0 or later 1 376 for HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 1 70 for all other systems 16 18 3 External calls day select station group up to and including V1 2 1 70 V3 0 or later 1 376 for HiPath 3550 HiPath 3500 1 70 for all other systems 16 18 4 External calls night select station group up to an...

Page 1182: ...routing optimized B channel utilization 17 17 1 Route optimize active 0 No 1 If route is known 2 Always 17 17 2 Change route 0 denied 1 allowed 17 18 Central intercept 17 19 Call data routing 17 19 1 Destination system 17 20 Digit repetition select trunk group 0 off 1 on 17 21 Path optimization 0 no 1 yes 17 22 QSig Voice mail 17 22 1 Callback access number 17 22 2 Callback access name 17 23 QSig ...

Page 1183: ...8 3 1 3 Speed dialing number assignment 18 3 1 3 1 Minimum speed dialing group Select group 0 to 999 18 3 1 3 2 Maximum speed dialing group Select group 0 to 999 18 3 2 Connection groups 18 3 2 1 Matrix Select Group 0 no 1 yes 19 Displays 19 11 Text messages select message no 0 to 9 and enter a text containing up to 24 characters alphanumeric 1 19 12 Advisory messages select message no 0 to 9 and ...

Page 1184: ...S 1 20 2 6 International prefix U S 011 20 3 Reference clock 20 3 1 Allowed nos list select position slot and port 20 3 2 Denied nos list select position slot and port 20 4 EU parameters not for U S 20 4 1 S0 port configuration select slot port and determine connection type not for U S 1 Automatic 2 Euro CO PP 3 Euro CO PMP 4 Euro bus 5 CorNet 1 6 CorNet 2 7 ECMA QSIG 8 ISO QSIG 20 4 2 S2M port co...

Page 1185: ...5 1 3 CAID admin stn select CAID 20 5 1 4 PDID admin stn select PDID 20 5 1 5 FIN for message waiting 20 5 1 6 CACH EKTS select slot port 0 off 1 on 20 5 2 PRI parameters 20 5 2 11 Protocol type 11 AT T Custom 12 AT T NI2 13 AT T NI2 OSA 14 AT T 4ESS 15 Siemens Custom 16 Siemens Custom OSA 17 Siemens NI2 18 Siemens NI2 OSA 19 MCI DEX600 20 MCI DMS250 21 BELL DMS100 22 BELL DMS100 TNS 23 Nortel DMS...

Page 1186: ...iPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation pcodes fm Accessing system administration 20 5 2 12 Frame line encod select slot 0 ESF B8ZS Normal 1 SF ZCS Inverted 20 5 2 13 Inwats parameter 20 5 2 13 1 Direction 20 5 2 13 2 DNIS 20 5 2 13 3 Entrance telephone ring destination Table A 3 Expert Mode Codes Code Function ...

Page 1187: ... 17 MEG800 TFM 18 MCI 800 19 ULTRA 800 20 WICN INWATS 21 MEG 22 MCI PRISIM WATS 23 SPR ULTRA WATS 24 WICN OUTWATS 25 ACCU SDS 26 LDS WC TSAA 27 INTER 800 28 MULTIQUEST 29 MCI 900 30 SDS56 31 SDS64C 32 SDS64R 33 DMS100 PV 34 DMS100 INWATS 35 DMS100 OUTWATS 36 DMS100 FX 37 5ESS INWATS 38 WATS MSB 39 DMS100 TIE 40 NI2 INWATS 41 NI2 OUTWATS 42 NI2 FX 43 NI2 TIE 44 NI2 HOTEL 45 NI2 SCOCS 46 CALL BY CAL...

Page 1188: ...18 ULTRA 800 19 WICN INWATS 20 MEG 21 MCI PRISIM WATS 22 SPR ULTRA WATS 23 WICN OUTWATS 24 ACCU SDS 25 LDS WC TSAA 26 INTER 800 27 MULTIQUEST 28 MCI 900 29 SDS56 30 SDS64C 31 SDS64R 32 DMS100 PV 33 DMS100 INWATS 34 DMS100 OUTWATS 35 DMS100 FX 36 5ESS INWATS 37 WATS MSB 38 DMS100 TIE 39 NI2 INWATS 40 NI2 OUTWATS 41 NI2 FX 42 NI2 TIE 43 NI2 HOTEL 44 NI2 SCOCS 20 5 2 16 CBC access code 20 5 3 S0 bus ...

Page 1189: ... select trunk group 0 No pause 1 1 s 2 3 s 3 6 s 4 9 s 21 3 Trunk call pause select trunk group 1 6 s 2 13 s 21 4 Line Length select slot and trunk 0 Short 1 Long 21 5 Charge data module select slot trunk 0 off 1 on 21 6 Silent reversal 0 no 1 yes 21 7 Port status 0 on 1 Off SW 2 Off HW 3 Off HW SW 21 8 Allocated without extension 22 System settings 22 11 Music on Hold MOH 0 Off 1 No ring tone 2 R...

Page 1190: ...g 0 deactivate 1 activate 22 15 Caller list mode 1 Only external 2 External and Internal 3 External ring call 22 16 Applications 22 16 1 Call distribution 0 no 1 yes 22 17 Tones 22 17 1 Conference Warning tone 0 off 1 on 22 17 2 Call pickup Warning tone 0 off 1 on 22 18 Transfer key Retrieve 1 Press once 2 Press twice 22 19 Class of service 22 19 1 Night answer Pos 1 5 enter station 22 19 2 Centra...

Page 1191: ...2 36 Switch line DSS 0 no 1 yes Status 1 U S Status 0 Rest of World ROW 22 37 Advisory call 0 off 1 on 22 38 Trace stop facility 22 38 1 Stop trace 22 38 1 01 Assistant 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 09 HW 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 12 Processor 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 15 APSXF 0 inactive 1 active 22 38 1 16 General 0 inactive 1 active error 19 cannot be set to inactive 22 38 1 20 CP 0 inactive ...

Page 1192: ...ing 22 40 1 Active inactive 22 40 2 Voice mail node number 22 40 3 Node number 22 41 UCD permanently available 0 inactive 1 active 23 Code 23 1 Substitute code code 75 23 2 Substitute code code 76 23 3 Trunk access code select slot and trunk and enter new code 23 4 Route code Select route followed by position 1 10 for code and enter new code Route 1 8 HiPath 3350HiPath 3300 Route 1 16 HiPath 3550 ...

Page 1193: ... 2 Via server select announcement device 1 16 25 2 Type of ann select ann device 1 Ann type 2 Music on hold 3 Internal music 25 3 Announcement prior to answer select slot and trunk 25 4 External MOH Only enter analog line module stations 26 Relays 26 1 Type select relay 1 to 4 and assign function 11 Manual on and off 12 Off after timeout 13 Door opener 14 Speaker amplifier starting contact for amp...

Page 1194: ... 1 to 255 27 6 Call pause select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 0 to 255 27 7 Number of rings select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 1 to 255 27 8 Block time select sensor 1 through 4 and enter 0 to 255 27 9 Sensor text select sensor 1 to 4 enter text containing up 16 characters alphanumeric 1 28 Edit CDB 28 1 Print CDB data 28 2 Save CDB data 28 2 1 CDB to MMC 28 2 2 CDB from MMC 29 System details 29 ...

Page 1195: ...x DID 4 ANI 5 Announcement Beyer 29 3 2 Software version for each option 1 to 16 for verification purposes only 29 3 3 Reset options 29 4 Boards 29 4 1 Board type select slot 11 TMS2 12 TMST1 digital 13 TIEL 14 TMDID 15 TML8W 16 TMOM 17 TMGL8 18 TLA2 19 TLA4 20 TLA8 21 TS2N 22 TMGL2 23 TMGL4 24 TMQ2 25 TMQ4 26 TST1 digital 27 STMD 28 STLS2 29 STLS4 30 SLA16 31 SLMO8 32 SLMO24 33 SLMC8 CMI V1 34 4S...

Page 1196: ...I V2 2M 42 SLMO8K 43 SLMO24K 44 SLA8N 45 SLA16N 46 SLA24N 47 TMAMF 48 CR8 49 SLU4 Octopus E 10 50 SLU2 Octopus E 10 52 HXGS HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 53 IVMS8 54 IVML8 55 IVML24 56 SLAS16 57 TMCAS 58 SLUC8 UP0 E interfaces on CBCC CBRC CBCP 59 SLUC4 UP0 E interfaces on SBSCO 60 SLUC2 UP0 E interfaces on SBSCS 61 SLAS4N 62 SLAS8N 63 IVMP8 64 65 HXGS3 66 SLC16N 67 STMD2 68 STLS...

Page 1197: ... TMEW2 72 DIUN2 73 SLMA8 74 SLMA3 75 SLMA2 76 SLMO8_HP4K 77 STMD3 78 SLCN 79 STMI2 80 IVMN8 81 IVMNL 82 TM2LP 83 TMDID_HP4K 84 TMC16 85 DIU2U 86 EVM2 87 TS2N 88 STMD3 feeding 29 4 2 xx Reset board for board no see 29 4 1 29 4 3 0 9 Board status 29 4 4 Disable enable board 29 5 Country initialization 29 5 1 Variable password 29 5 1 00 to 99 See Select country code 29 5 2 Fixed password Table A 3 Ex...

Page 1198: ...ted Kingdom 16 Italy 17 Spain 18 Portugal 19 Switzerland 20 Austria 21 International 22 Ireland 23 Belgium 24 Brazil 25 South Africa 26 China 28 India 29 Czech Republic 30 Denmark 31 Australia 32 Argentina 33 Philippines 35 Brazil 2 36 Singapore 37 Hungary 38 Malaysia 40 Indonesia 41 Russia 42 Thailand 46 Poland 47 Greece 49 Sweden 50 Norway 51 Turkey 52 U S 53 Pakistan 54 Hong Kong 55 New Zealand...

Page 1199: ...on without code 2 Logon DID with code 3 Callback 30 4 Reset password 30 5 Integrated modem 30 5 1 Station number remote service max 6 digits 30 5 2 DID number remote service 30 5 3 CAID admin for U S only 30 6 Digital modem 30 6 1 Station number remote service max 6 digits 30 6 2 DID number remote service 30 6 3 CAID admin for U S only 30 7 Callback connection 30 7 1 Destination select position 1 ...

Page 1200: ...ect group 0 off 1 on 31 2 5 Max waiting calls select group 31 3 Wrap up time 0 no wrap up time 1 20 wrap up x 30s 31 4 Call priority external select slot trunk 31 5 Call priority internal 32 Paging 32 1 PSE port slot and trunk 32 3 Protocol 1 ESPA 4 4 5 2 ESPA 4 4 3 32 4 Operating mode 32 4 1 Mode urgent 32 4 2 Mode normal 32 4 3 Mode text 32 5 Display 32 5 1 Call number 32 5 1 1 Number of digits ...

Page 1201: ...y 34 4 CAID admin for U S only 35 Least Cost Routing LCR 35 1 LCR on or off 0 off 1 on 35 2 Digit transmission 0 Digit by digit 1 En bloc sending 35 3 Dial rule 35 3 1 Name select line 35 3 2 Format select line 35 3 3 Type select line 0 undefined 1 Main network supplier 2 1 level 3 2 level 4 CN 5 DICS 6 PRI 35 4 Authorization code select index 1 16 35 5 Schedule 35 5 1 Time limit select day index ...

Page 1202: ...ial plan 35 8 1 Dialed digits select line 35 8 2 Assign route table select line 35 8 3 Account codes 0 no 1 yes 35 8 4 Toll restriction private 0 no 1 yes 35 8 5 Toll restriction 0 no 1 yes 35 8 6 Emergency number 36 HiPath Cordless Office 36 1 Log on CMI unit select device 1 inactive 36 2 CMI code select device 36 3 CMI number select device changes not possible 36 4 Reset cordless code 36 5 DECT ...

Page 1203: ... 58 Select language 59 Group names 61 Hotline 61 1 Hotline destinations 61 2 Hotline station 61 2 1 Hotline mode 0 Off 1 Hotline 2 Code blue 61 2 2 Hotline assignment 61 3 Hotline timeout 62 Codes remote service 63 Codes Cordless The bolded messages only appear on workpoints that support alphanumeric character en try 1 1 Alphanumeric characters can only be entered at the following workpoints optiP...

Page 1204: ...System Programming Codes Expert Mode Codes Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 A 32 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation pcodes fm Accessing system administration ...

Page 1205: ... 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoint clients OpenScape Personal Edition Code Procedure Code ...

Page 1206: ... BS Call forward ing on internal or external 1 Type Stn no 751 or Call for warding local S0 WpC function ality 1 V U T RH U Fea ture key AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Later selection of the forwarding type 1 All calls 2 Ex calls only 3 Int calls only Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Lo...

Page 1207: ...Type Stn no 75501 501 V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Only for MULAP members Call forward ing off for each MULAP 501 MULAP 76501 501 V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Only for MULAP members UCD uniform call distribu tion logon 401 ID 401 V U T U2 Fea ture key AN DIG ENT CMI IPSC X RK BS Only for UCD group members Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supporte...

Page 1208: ...ons Call accep tance V Mouse click Drag Drop ALL X RH BR WA BS RG Can only be activat ed using key Advisory mes sage on 69 V U T RH U1 Local feature menu DIG CMI IPSC X RK BS Advisory mes sage off 69 V T RH U1 Local feature menu DIG CMI IPSC X RK BS Associated di aling 67 Stn Stn no 7567 67 U H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Only for authorized stations Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Featur...

Page 1209: ...code 93 Old code 2 x New code 7593 93 H Local feature menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Reset servic es features for own workpoint client 0 760 0 H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC x RK BS See feature descrip tion Reset activated features Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note...

Page 1210: ...U1 AN DIG ENT IPSC X WA RG RK BS Within a HiPath 5000 network only Features cannot be activated from ana log DP or S0 WpC Discreet call ing on 945 Stn no 75945 945 U DIG S0 IPSC X WA RG BS RK GS Only for authorized stations No AN as a destina tion terminal Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B...

Page 1211: ...mergency Trunk Access 43 Trunk code 7543 43 U H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Only for attendant View call charges see charge dis play Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work p...

Page 1212: ...lan AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Group calls can be programmed on DSS key Group call join 85 7585 85 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All group calls join 85 Group call leave 85 7685 85 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All group calls leave 85 Hold key V Mouse click Key DIG ENT Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure fo...

Page 1213: ... ceived messages 1 delete all sent messages 2 de lete all received messages 3 call sender Fax waiting message an swering ma chine Only TDM work point clients with corre sponding key V H DIG ENT Feature deleted by pressing the key Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note ...

Page 1214: ...SC X RK BS 000 999 Mobile phones also have an additional local procedure Using station speed dial number 7 ISD no 757 7 V U H Private ETD feature AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IP SC IPSI RK BS ISD 0 9 Trunk queu ing automatic V AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RH BR RG RK GS Automatically after timeout if enabled in the CDR Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported...

Page 1215: ... ble us ing central data base IPSC Only for mobile phone numbers Not for the first two station ports Night answer on 44 or Stn no 75 44 V U T RH U1 AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Standard night ser vice with Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients...

Page 1216: ... 60 ACCT 7560 60 U H man datory ACCT possi ble AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X WA RG RK BS ACCT can also be entered without ser vice code following ext line seizure Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog work po...

Page 1217: ... local S0 WpC function ality 86 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Call number suppression off temp 86 CLIP local S0 WpC function ality 86 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point c...

Page 1218: ... menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All hunt groups join 85 Hunt group leave 85 7685 85 V T RH U1 Fea ture menu AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X RK BS All hunt groups leave 85 Service menu X T DIG IPSC BS Service key as for stopping and start ing procedure Remote ser vice call 994 In dex Suffix dial ing 75944 994 U1 AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Opera...

Page 1219: ...ce enable service sys tem 991 DIG IPSC WA RG RK BS Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog work point clients1 S0 work point cli ents TDM workpoint clients with display CMI feature mobile phones IP workpoi...

Page 1220: ... V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Deactivate timed remind er 46 time 7646 46 U V T H AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC X Freeze trace 509 509 V AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog work point ...

Page 1221: ...in pickup group 57 7557 57 V RH BR GS U AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC WA RG RK BS Apply DTMF Flash TDM WpC with out display Consultation hold key GS AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IPSC Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents see abbrevi ations in Table B 2 Locking of feature Note TDM work point clients without dis play CMI mobile phones analog ...

Page 1222: ...call exclusivehold off 0 or CMI DTMF Flash TDM WpC with out display Consultation hold key Retrieve 0 BR WA RG GS BS U1 Mouse click key AN DIG ENT S0 CMI IP SC IPSI 1 The codes are valid for DTMF telephones Substitution codes 75 and 76 must be entered instead of and for DP tele phones Table B 1 Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Feature Operating procedure for Supported workpoint cli ents s...

Page 1223: ...0 T 80 T optiPoint 500 economy not for USA basic stan dard advance optiPoint 600 office in UP0 E mode DIG analog workpoint clients DP and DTMF terminals AN S0 workpoint clients ISDN terminals S0 IP workpoint clients System clients OpenScape Personal Edition OpenStage 15 OpenStage 20 E 20 20 G OpenStage 40 40 G OpenStage 60 60 G OpenStage 80 80 G optiPoint 410 entry without display econo my economy...

Page 1224: ...Codes for Activating Deactivating Features Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 B 20 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation fcodes fm ...

Page 1225: ... Higher The following tables contains information about the components of HiPath 3000 5000 V7 or lat er required to set up a firewall Firewalls protect the customer internal intranet from external at tacks The following tables contain extracts from Product Specific Data Sheet for HiPath Network Analysis HiPath 5000 V7 Product Specific Data Sheet for HiPath Network Analysis HG 1500 V7 The tables ar...

Page 1226: ... system for DBFS access FCT Interface to DBFS server FCT API TCP 7100 1 65535 Def FCT Adm Default can be modified within this range REG Client Registration of HG1500 at DBFS client REG TCP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA SYNC Interface to DBFS server SYNC TCP 7024 1 65535 Def SYNC Adm Default can be modified within this range Centralised Ressource Management Mangement of networkwide Ressources...

Page 1227: ...ess CLM Secured Web based Interface of Customer License Manager server HTTPS TCP 8818 1025 65535 Def HTTPS port of License Manager Adm Default can be modified within this range during Setup or later CLM DBFS Feature Server for centralized administration CAR Server DBFS CAR componennt for centralized administration server CAR TCP 12063 1 65535 Def CAR Server Adm Default can be modified within this ...

Page 1228: ... be modified within this range H 323 Call Signaling active VoIP Verbindungssteuerung client H 323 H 225 Q 931 TCP 12250 12950 1 65535 Def H 323 Adm Default can be modified within this range H 323 Call Signaling passive Voice over IP Verbindungssteuerung server H 323 H 225 Q 931 TCP 1720 1 65535 Def H 225 Q 931 Adm Default can be modified within this range MS SQL Server MS SQL_Server TCP MS SQL Ser...

Page 1229: ...ot M Prot T Prot D Ports A Ports Remarks SIP Call Signalling active TCP Call Signalling for SIP endpoints and SIP based trunking client SIP TCP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA SIP Call Signalling passive Call Signalling for SIP endpoints and SIP based trunking server SIP TCP_UDP 5060 1 65535 Def SIP Adm Default can be modified within this range ...

Page 1230: ... starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range RTP Payload Transport passive VoIP payloadtransport server RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 245 Max 30 connections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range LDAP Connectivity client sided client sided connectivity to a LDAP Service LDAP A...

Page 1231: ...rtnumber is negotiated via H 225 RTP Payload Transport HG1500 active VoIP Payloadtransport client RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 245 Max 30 connections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range RTP Payload Transport HG1500 passive VoIP payloadtransport server RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is ne...

Page 1232: ...P SET GET Functionality server SNMP UDP 161 Def SNMP Set Get SNMP Trap oP410 SNMP Trap function client SNMP UDP 161 162 Def SNMP Trap oP410 SNTP oP410 Simple Network Time Protocol server SNTP UDP 123 Def SNTP SNTP heartbeat oP410 Simple Network Time Protocol server SNTP UDP 580 QoS Data Collection Unit QCU phones Send QoS reports QCU client 12010 Client application which sends QDC data to the QCU ...

Page 1233: ...e inside the phone client SIP UDP 5060 Def SIP SIP TLS OP410 SIP over TLS client SIP TCP TLS 5061 1 65535 Def SIP Adm Configuration the port value to zero will result in the default port value being used User Applications oP410 SIP bundle of user functions JAVA optiPoints JAVA applications in phones client HTTP TCP 9200 0 65535 Def Java default port in optiPoint phones LDAP Access optiPoint phones...

Page 1234: ...he phone the port range then is 5004 5013 But in H4k scenarios only the upper three couples starting from the top are used 5012 5013 5010 5011 and 5008 5009 Adm even port number only H 323 Payload Transport oP4x0 at H4k passive Voice over IP server RTP_RTCP UDP 5008 5013 0 65534 Def Attention The phone is prepared to handle up to 5 port couples in total If the base port is set to 5004 inside the p...

Page 1235: ...P 12010 0 65535 Def QCU receiving Port User Applications oP410 HFA bundle of user functions of HFA phone oP410 CTI Service TCP CTI Service in oP410 client Cornet TS TCP 5105 Def CTI Service oP410 JAVA optiPoints JAVA applications in phones client HTTP TCP 9200 0 65535 Def Java default port in optiPoint phones LDAP Access optiPoint phones Directory access via LDAP client LDAP TCP 389 0 65535 Def LD...

Page 1236: ...etary TCP 4060 Def CorNet TC LDAP WL2 LDAP access for phones LDAP Access WL2 Directory access via LDAP client LDAP TCP 389 0 65535 Def LDAP OAM WL2 Administration of optiPoint HFA devices DHCP Client WL2 Server of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol client DHCP UDP 68 Def DHCP Client Port DHCP Server WL2 Server of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server DHCP UDP 67 Def DHCP Server Port DLS Work...

Page 1237: ...535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA SNMP Traps HG1500 Receiving of SNMP Traps server SNMP UDP 162 Def SNMP Traps SNTP Client H2 3 5k BizIP Simple Network Time Protocol client SNTP UDP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA TFTP Client H2 3 5k APS Transfer KDS Sicherung mit TFTP client TFTP UDP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA TFTP Server H2 3 5k BizIP TFTP Server for CDR server TFTP UDP 69 Def TFTP SW_Ma...

Page 1238: ...ting server ACP TCP 13042 Def Accounting Decomposed Media Gateway Signalling for decomposed media gateway in HiPath3000 IPNC MediaGatewaycontrol server MCP TCP 12051 1 65535 Def IPNC Adm Default can be modified within this range MPH MediaPayloadHandler server MCP TCP 12052 1 65535 Def MPH Adm Default can be modified within this range DSL Diagnose Server DSL Statusanzeige DSL Diagnose Server DSL St...

Page 1239: ...endpoints server H 323 H 225 RAS UDP 1719 1 65535 Def H 225 RAS Adm Default can be modified within this range H 245 Media Signaling active H 245 channel signalling for H 323 endpoints client H 323 H 245 TCP 12250 12950 1 65535 Def H 323 Adm Default can be modified within this range H 245 Media Signaling passive H 245 channel signalling for H 323 endpoints server H 323 H 245 TCP 12250 12950 1 65535...

Page 1240: ...live checks configurable server CAR Alive TCP 12062 1 65535 Def CAR Adm Default can be modified within this range CAR_Alive w Ping Ping based check alive mechanism peer ICMP Echo ICMP Def Unspecified Default Port range values RM client Resource manager for networkwide use of MOH and Conference client RM API TCP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA RM server Resource manager for networkwide use of M...

Page 1241: ... 65535 Def SIP Adm Default can be modified within this range STUN client STUN client used for SIP Provider access client STUN UDP 1 65535 Def STUN client Port depends on the client for which STUN request is sent SIP subscriber RTP Payload Transport active VoIP Payloadtransport client RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 245 Max 30 connections RTP starts at adr RT...

Page 1242: ...transport server IPSEC ESP 0 Def NoPort assigned for this protocol VPN ISAKMP client Internet Security Association and Key Management Protcol for IPSEC client ISAKMP UDP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA VPN ISAKMP server Internet Security Association and Key Management Protcol for IPSEC server ISAKMP UDP 500 Def ISAKMP VPN NAT T client NAT treversal IPSEC protocol for encrypted payload transpor...

Page 1243: ...x 30 connections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range RTP Payload Transport passive VoIP payloadtransport server RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 245 Max 30 connections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range LDAP Connectivity client sided client sided connectivity to a...

Page 1244: ...umber is negotiated via H 225 RTP Payload Transport active VoIP Payloadtransport client RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 245 Max 30 connections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 Adm Default can be modified within this range RTP Payload Transport passive VoIP payloadtransport server RTP_RTCP UDP 29100 29159 1 65535 Def RTP portnumber is negotiated via H 24...

Page 1245: ...rver HTTP TCP 443 0 65535 Def HTTPS HTTP_Server Phones Web Interface server TFTP TCP 8085 0 65535 Def HTTP optiPoints HG1500 IP Config Phones IP Configuration Services server proprietary UDP 5100 SNMP SET GET Phones SNMP SET GET Functionality server SNMP UDP 161 Def SNMP Set Get SNMP Trap oP410 SNMP Trap function client SNMP UDP 161 162 Def SNMP Trap oP410 SNTP oP410 Simple Network Time Protocol s...

Page 1246: ...P TCP TLS 5061 Def SIP SIP signaling TCP oP410 SIP signalling in the case of using TCP configurable inside the phone client SIP TCP 5060 Def SIP SIP signaling UDP oP410 SIP signalling in the case of using UDP configurable inside the phone client SIP UDP 5060 Def SIP SIP TLS OP410 SIP over TLS client SIP TCP TLS 5061 1 65535 Def SIP Adm Configuration the port value to zero will result in the defaul...

Page 1247: ...5008 5013 0 65534 Def Attention The phone is prepared to handle up to 5 port couples in total If the base port is set to 5004 inside the phone the port range then is 5004 5013 But in H4k scenarios only the upper three couples starting from the top are used 5012 5013 5010 5011 and 5008 5009 Adm even port number only H 323 Payload Transport oP4x0 at H4k passive Voice over IP Uebertragung der Sprachp...

Page 1248: ... QCU client 12010 Client application which sends QDC data to the QCU client SNMP UDP 12010 0 65535 Def QCU receiving Port User Applications oP410 HFA bundle of user functions of HFA phone oP410 CTI Service TCP CTI Service in oP410 client Cornet TS TCP 5105 Def CTI Service oP410 JAVA optiPoints JAVA applications in phones client HTTP TCP 9200 0 65535 Def Java default port in optiPoint phones LDAP A...

Page 1249: ...nnections RTP starts at adr RTCP at adr 1 RTP 1 HFA WL2 Hicom Feature Access CorNet TC Logon WL2 CorNet TC Logon Port client proprietary TCP 4060 Def CorNet TC LDAP WL2 LDAP access for phones LDAP Access WL2 Directory access via LDAP client LDAP TCP 389 0 65535 Def LDAP OAM WL2 Administration of optiPoint HFA devices DHCP Client WL2 Server of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol client DHCP UDP 68 ...

Page 1250: ...ns Enterprise Communications GmbH Co KG Application Function Type A Prot M Prot T Prot D Ports A Ports Remarks QoS Data Collection Unit QCU phones Send QoS reports QCU client 12010 Client application which sends QDC data to the QCU client SNMP UDP 12010 0 65535 Def QCU receiving Port ...

Page 1251: ...used for multi gateway administration feature MGAF client HTTPS TCP SSL 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA HTTPS Server HG1500 Secure Web Server server HTTPS TCP SSL 443 Def HTTPS QCU Report Client Client application which sends QDC reports to QCU Server client SNMP UDP 1024 65535 Def Ephemeral Ports IANA SNMP SET GET H2 3 5k HG1500 SNMP Set Get server SNMP UDP 161 Def SNMP Set Get SNMP Traps H2 ...

Page 1252: ......

Page 1253: ...ower supply may be needed The following values are for orientation only and can vary depending on the traffic flow Topic HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement page D 2 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement page D 4 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement page D 6 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement page D 8 HiPath 3300 Board Power Requirement page D 10 Workpoint Client Add On Device and Adapter Power Requ...

Page 1254: ... output a maximum of 110 W is available at the 48 V output Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 S30177 U773 X with S30122 K7686 M1 110 You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the connected workpoint clients of a system cabinet exceeds the maximum possible LUNA2 output Section D 7 contains a sample calculation Table D 2 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement Board or Component ...

Page 1255: ...00 Board Power Requirement SLMO8 S30810 Q2168 X100 0 4 0 4 S TMD3 S30810 Q2217 X10 4 0 S TMI2 S30810 Q2316 X100 16 3 TM2LP S30810 Q2159 Xxxx 1 8 TMC16 S30810 Q2485 X 1 3 T MCAS 2 S30810 Q2946 X 4 5 TMDID S30810 Q2452 X 2 3 6 6 TMEW2 S30810 Q2292 X100 1 3 3 1 Table D 2 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V ...

Page 1256: ...oint clients connected exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC D with or without Powerbox PB3000 Section D 7 contains a sample calculation Table D 4 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBCC including sub boards S30810 Q2935 A301 7 0 0 5 GEE12 S30817 Q951 Axxx 0 5 GEE16 S3081...

Page 1257: ...817 Q926 Axxx 0 4 TMAMF S30810 Q2587 A400 1 83 16 93 TMCAS S30810 Q2938 X Information not available TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X 4 73 0 13 TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X 3 8 TST1 S30810 Q2919 X 0 8 TS2N S30810 Q2913 X300 0 9 V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 0 3 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 0 7 0 7 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 1 3 1 3 16SLA S30810 Q2923 X 2 5 2 5 1 Detailed configuration rules are provided in section 3 3 12 SLAD16 2 For ...

Page 1258: ...2 K7686 M1 110 You must check whether the total power requirement of the boards used and the workpoint clients connected exceeds the maximum possible output of the PSUP or the UPSC D with or without Powerbox PB3000 Section D 7 contains a sample cal culation Table D 6 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 ...

Page 1259: ...30817 Q923 Axxx 0 2 TLA8 S30817 Q926 Axxx 0 4 TMGL4 S30810 Q2918 X 4 72 0 12 TMQ4 S30810 Q2917 X 3 8 V24 1 S30807 Q6916 X100 0 3 4SLA S30810 Q2923 X200 0 7 0 7 8SLA S30810 Q2923 X100 1 3 1 3 16SLA S30810 Q2923 X 2 5 2 5 1 For each active off hook station the net resource requirement increases by approximately 1 6W dependent on the tele phone s line length and DC resistance 2 Identified at a traffi...

Page 1260: ...ement of the boards used and the workpoint clients connected exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC DR with or without Powerbox PB3000 Section D 7 contains a sample calculation Table D 8 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBRC including subboards S30810 Q2935 Z301 7 0 0 5 ...

Page 1261: ... internen Gebrauch Identifying System Power Requirements HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement TS2R S30810 K2913 Z300 0 9 8SLAR S30810 K2925 Z 1 3 1 3 1 Identified at a traffic flow of 0 8 Erlang Table D 8 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V ...

Page 1262: ...ether the total power requirement of the boards used and the workpoint clients connected exceeds the maximum possible output of the UPSC DR with or without Powerbox PB3000 A sample calculation is shown in Section D 7 Table D 10 Board Power RequirementHiPath 3300 Board or Component Part Number Net Power Requirement in W 5 V 48 V BS3 1 S30807 H5482 X 2 0 BS3 3 S30807 H5485 X 3 0 CBRC including subbo...

Page 1263: ...nnection variant OpenStage 20 0 01 OpenStage 40 OpenStage 60 OpenStage 80 OpenStage TDM connec tion variant OpenStage 10 0 85 W OpenStage 20 OpenStage 40 1 1 W OpenStage 60 0 02 OpenStage 80 OpenStage Key Module 0 02 OpenStage BLF 0 02 OpenStage PhoneAdapter 0 02 optiPoint 410 optiPoint 420 optiPoint 410 entry optiPoint 410 entry S 0 01 optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 410 economy S optiPoint 410 s...

Page 1264: ...500 economy not for U S 0 7 optiPoint 500 basic 0 7 optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 stan dard SL for U S only 0 7 optiPoint 500 advance 0 72 optiPoint key module 0 05 optiPoint BLF 0 02 optiPoint analog adapter 0 003 optiPoint ISDN adapter 0 7 optiPoint phone adapter 0 18 optiPoint acoustic adapter 0 25 optiPoint recorder adapter 0 3 Table D 11 Workpoint Client Add On Device and Adapter Power...

Page 1265: ... Requirements optiPoint 600 office 0 01 Analog telephone 40 mA for short trunk in active status 0 3 1 Power over Ethernet or power supply via a local plug in unit 2 Power is provided by a local power supply 3 A local power supply provides power to the connected analog telephone Table D 11 Workpoint Client Add On Device and Adapter Power Requirements Workpoint Client Net Power Requirement in W from...

Page 1266: ...t exceeds the maximum possible output of the power supply unit at the 5 V output or at the 48 V output If this is the case you have the following options HiPath 3800 The number of LUNA2 power supply units can be increased HiPath 3550 with UPSC D The maximum nominal output of the 48 V output can be increased from 53 W to 110 W by using the external power supply Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 HiPath 335...

Page 1267: ...SC DR The maximum nominal output of the 48 V output can be increased from 53 W to 110 W by using the external power supply Powerbox PB3000 with LUNA2 Sample calculation for a HiPath 3550 1 Determine secondary power requirement at the 5 V output The maximum nominal output of UPSC D at the 5 V output amounts to 40 W and is enough to cover the specified power requirement power requirements of the boa...

Page 1268: ...ied power requirement power requirements of the boards components used 0 50 W 1 x CBCC 2 80 W 1 x HXGS3 including ventilator kit 0 00 W 1 x TS2N 0 00 W 3 x SLU8 1 30 W 1 x 8SLA 0 00 W 1 x SLC16N 24 00 W 12 x BS3 1 power requirement of connected workpoint clients key modules and adapters 4 32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance 8 40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic 2 40 W 8 x optiPoint 500 entry 0 00 W 2 x Hicom...

Page 1269: ... Determine overall secondary power requirement 2 Identifying primary power requirement power requirements of the boards components used power requirement of connected workpoint clients analog and digital telephones key modules and adapters overall secondary power requirement overall secondary power requirement requirements of power supply units LUNA2 9 W PSUP UPSC D UPSC DR 12 W respectively requi...

Page 1270: ...nents used 7 50 W 1 x CBCC 12 80 W 1 x HXGS3 including ventilator kit 0 90 W 1 x TS2N 2 40 W 3 x SLU8 2 60 W 1 x 8SLA 5 00 W 1 x SLC16N 24 00 W 12 x BS3 1 power requirement of connected workpoint clients key modules and adapters 4 32 W 6 x optiPoint 500 advance 8 40 W 12 x optiPoint 500 basic 2 40 W 8 x optiPoint 500 entry 0 00 W 2 x Hicom Attendant BLF 0 00 W 2 x optiPoint BLF 0 40 W 8 x optiPoin...

Page 1271: ...he file snmpd cnf The file can be found in the installation directory of the FM Re porting Client E 2 Trap Destination Procedure for sending a trap 1 Testing of the snmpNotifyEntry entries 2 A trap is sent for all with snmpNotifyTag snmpTargetAddrTagList a Only one snmpNotifyEntry should exist b The snmpNotifyTag of this entry should be used in all snmpTargetAddrEntries 3 In addition there must be...

Page 1272: ...pTargetAddrName Any unambiguous identifier for the entry String with 1 32 characters snmpTargetAddrTDomain Transport type for the entry String snmpUDPDomain or snmpIPXDomain snmpTargetAddrTAddress Destination address for traps The format depends on the entry snmpTargetAddrTDomain For snmpUDPDomain IP address port for example 192 132 123 98 162 whereby 0 may also be entered as a port In this case t...

Page 1273: ...me snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel snmpTargetParamsStorageType snmpTargetParamsName Any unambiguous identifier for the entry String with 1 32 characters The value is always v1Params snmpTargetParamsMPModel Message processing model 0 SNMPv1 1 SNMPv2c 2 SNMPv2u SNMPv2 3 SNMPv3 1 for v1Params snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel Security Model snmpv1 snmpv2c snmpv2s snmpv1 for v1Params snmpTargetParamsSecurit...

Page 1274: ...ommunityIndex Any unambiguous identifier for the entry String with 1 32 characters snmpCommunityName The incoming snmpv1 community read or write community snmpCommunitySecurityName This identifier represents the entry within the entire configuration file for example in the snmpTargetParamsSecurityName Always public read community and trap destinations or private write community snmpCommunityContex...

Page 1275: ...Anyone nonVolatile vacmSecurityToGroupEntry snmpv1 private SetAnyone nonVolatile vacmSecurityToGroupEntry snmpv2c public Anyone nonVolatile vacmViewTreeFamilyEntry All internet included nonVolatile vacmViewTreeFamilyEntry CfgProt internet included nonVolatile vacmViewTreeFamilyEntry CfgProt vacmSecurityToGroupTable excluded nonVolatile vacmViewTreeFamilyEntry CfgProt vacmAccessTable excluded nonVo...

Page 1276: ...Notes for Editing the File snmpd cnf Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003 H3590 S100 7 7620 06 2012 E 6 HiPath 3000 5000 V9 Service documentation snmpd fm Consequences for the File snmpd cnf ...

Page 1277: ...13 Countries with Special Country Code No Country Version Country Code In Use 1 Argentina ARG ARG 2 Australia AUS AUS 3 Belgium BEL BEL 4 Brazil BRA BRA 5 China CHN CHN 6 Denmark DAN DAN 7 Germany BRD BRD 8 Finland FIN FIN 9 France FKR FKR 10 Greece GRI GRI 11 Great Britain GBR GBR 12 Hong Kong HGK HGK 13 India IND IND 14 Indonesia IDS IDS 15 Ireland IRL IRL 16 Italy ITL ITL 17 Canada KAN USA 18 K...

Page 1278: ...Poland POL POL 28 Portugal POR POR 29 Russia RUS RUS 30 Sweden SWD SWD 31 Switzerland SWZ SWZ 32 Singapore SIN SIN 33 Slovakia SRE CRE 34 Spain SPA SPA 35 South Africa RSA RSA 36 Taiwan TAI TAI 37 Thailand THA THA 38 Czech Republic CRE CRE 39 Turkey TRK TRK 40 Ukraine UKR RUS 41 Hungary UNG UNG 42 USA USA USA 43 Belarus WEI RUS Table 13 13 Countries with Special Country Code No Country Version Cou...

Page 1279: ...un der Country Version in HiPath 3000 Manager Table 13 14 IM Countries No Country Version Country Code 1 Egypt EG 2 Algeria DZ 3 Azerbaijan AZ 4 Bangladesh BD 5 Bolivia BO 6 Bosnia Herzegovina BA 7 Botswana BW 8 Bulgaria BG 9 Chile CL 10 Costa Rica CR 11 Ecuador EC 12 El Salvador SV 13 Ivory Coast CI 14 Estonia EE 15 Guatemala GT 16 Honduras HN 17 Iceland IS 18 Israel IL 19 Jordan JO 20 Kazakhstan...

Page 1280: ...ico MX 33 Namibia NA 34 Nicaragua NI 35 Nigeria NG 36 Oman OM 37 Panama PA 38 Paraguay PY 39 Peru PE 40 Romania RO 41 Zambia ZM 42 Saudi Arabia SA 43 Senegal SN 44 Serbia Montenegro YU 45 Zimbabwe ZW 46 Slovenia SI 47 Sri Lanka LK 48 Tadzhikistan TJ 49 Tanzania TZ 50 Tunisia TN 51 Turkmenistan TM 52 Uruguay UY 53 Uzbekistan UZ 54 Venezuela VE 55 United Arab Emirates AE 56 Vietnam VN Table 13 14 IM...

Page 1281: ...r Identification Rack APS System Program System B BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts BSG Key module C CABLU Cabling Unit CAS Channel Associated Signaling CBCC Central Board with Coldfire Com CBCP Central Board with Coldfire Point CBCPR Central Board with Coldfire Pro CBRC Central Board Rack Com CBSAP Central Board Synergy Access Platform CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers CDB Customer Database...

Page 1282: ... Point CUPR Connection Unit Point Rack D TW Twin Wire DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications RDT Remote Data Transfer DiffServ Differentiated Services DIU2U Digital Interface Unit 2 Universal DIUN2 Digital Interface Unit ISDN DMC Direct Media Connection DSP Digital Signal Processor E EC1 First expansion cabinet EC2 Second expansion cabinet EBP Slot board ECG Euro ISDN CAS Gateway ECGM E...

Page 1283: ...iPath Xpress Gateway Medium HXGR HiPath Xpress Gateway Rack HXGS HiPath Xpress Gateway Small I IMODN Integrated Modem Card New IP Internet Protocol IVML Integrated Voice Mail Large IVMNL Integrated Voice Mail New Large IVMP Integrated Voice Mail Point IVMPR Integrated Voice Mail Point Rack IVMS Integrated Voice Mail Small IVMSR Integrated Voice Mail Small Rack K CDB Customer database L LDAP Lightw...

Page 1284: ...ple Subscriber Number MW Mini Western N NT Network Termination O OPAL Option Adapter Long OPALR Option Adapter Long Rack OPS Off Premises Station P PDM1 PMC DSP modules PDS Permanent Data Service PFT Power Failure Transfer PSE Paging system PSUP Power Supply Unit Point Q QoS Quality of Service R REAL Relay and Trunk Failure Transfer REALS Relay and ALUM power failure transfer for SAPP RJ Registere...

Page 1285: ...dule Cost Optimized UP0 E SLU Subscriber Line UP0 E SLUR Subscriber Line UP0 E Rack SMR Service Maintenance Release SNG Local power supply SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SP Service Provider SRTP Secure Realtime Transport Protocol STLS Subscriber Trunk Line S0 STLSR Subscriber And Trunk Line S0 Rack STLSX Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX STLSXR Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC SX Ra...

Page 1286: ... Start TMGL4R Trunk Module Ground Start Loop Start Rack TML8W Trunk Module Loop Start World TMOM Trunk Module Outgoing Multipurpose TMS2 Trunk Module S2M TMST1 Trunk Modules S1 T1 TS2 Trunk Module S2M TS2R Trunk Module S2M Rack U UAE Universal socket UPSC D Uninterruptible Power Supply Com DECT UPSC DR Uninterruptible Power Supply Com DECT Rack UPSM Uninterruptible Power Supply Modular UPSMres Uni...

Page 1287: ...358 Analog modem 12 104 Analog tie trunk circuits TMEW2 3 327 ANI4 for selected countries only 3 360 contact assignments 3 362 installation instructions 3 363 interfaces 3 360 LED statuses 3 360 ANI4R for selected countries only contact assignment 3 365 interfaces 3 364 ANl4R for selected countries only 3 364 figure 3 364 Announcement and music modules 3 366 APS stamp 12 29 APS transfer 12 25 12 2...

Page 1288: ...iPath 3350 3 25 numbering plan for HiPath 3550 3 24 S0 interface assignment 3 22 V 24 interface assignment 3 23 X1 to X4 contact assignments 3 22 CBRC 3 26 figure 3 29 3 30 LAN connector assignment via LIM 3 32 LED status meaning 3 28 numbering plan for HiPath 3300 3 34 numbering plan for HiPath 3500 3 33 S0 interface assignment 3 31 V 24 interface assignment 3 32 X1 and X3 contact assignments 3 3...

Page 1289: ...rmining system information 12 32 Determining system software 12 31 Determining the software image 12 31 DHCP server 10 76 Digital modem 12 104 Direct Media Connection DMC 2 51 Direct Station Select 13 18 DISA internal 13 17 Disposal of electrical electronic devices 1 15 DIU2U for U S only 3 81 front panel 3 82 LED statuses 3 83 LEDs 3 82 DIUN2 3 84 assigning the system cable 3 87 front panel 3 84 ...

Page 1290: ...rding A 3 Call distribution A 27 CO call privileges A 6 codes A 20 configure station A 4 DISA A 29 displays A 11 door relays A 20 edit CDB data A 22 incoming calls A 7 ISDN parameters A 12 Least Cost Routing LCR A 29 networking A 10 radio paging equipment A 28 relays A 21 remote service A 27 sensors A 22 speed dialing system A 3 system details A 22 system settings A 17 traffic restriction A 10 Ext...

Page 1291: ...9 30 HiPath 3000 5000 capacity limits 2 43 HiPath 3300 as a gateway 7 8 Central components 2 20 design and dimensions 2 10 installation 4 85 numbering plan 3 34 Peripheral components 2 38 startup 5 11 system environment 2 15 HiPath 3350 CAS cable shield contacts 3 255 Central components 2 18 design and dimensions 2 8 installation 4 85 numbering plan 3 25 Peripheral components 2 31 startup 5 11 sys...

Page 1292: ...ventory Manager 12 32 analysis 12 59 HiPath License Management 6 37 8 2 HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor 12 47 HiPath Software Manager analysis 12 59 APS transfer 12 30 backing up customer data 12 20 backing up system components 12 33 determining system information 12 32 HiPath User Management 12 35 HiPath Xpressions Compact boards 3 101 3 105 3 109 3 114 3 120 HOPE for U S only 3 376 components 3...

Page 1293: ...ets stacked 4 9 two cabinet system side by side 4 12 unpacking the components 4 6 strip open end cable for patch panel 4 79 stripping an open end cable for the MDFU E 4 70 visual inspection 4 83 Installing subboards 4 81 Integrated modem IMODN 3 50 12 104 Internet access 13 42 Internet Gateway 13 29 Internet telephony 2 49 10 48 Internet telephony phone numbers 2 85 Internet Telephony Service Prov...

Page 1294: ... 8 11 Feature Server 8 16 features subject to mandatory licensing 8 4 grace period 8 11 HiPath License Management 6 37 8 2 License Failure Period 8 11 link to MAC address 8 17 OpenScape Office 8 6 optiClient Attendant 8 31 procedure with HiPath 3000 Manager E 8 11 protection against manipulation 8 33 replacing hardware 8 28 scenarios 8 17 upgrading 8 22 Lightning Protection 1 18 2 3 5 2 5 12 7 2 7...

Page 1295: ... 10 10 OpenStage 30 10 12 OpenStage 40 10 14 OpenStage 60 10 16 OpenStage 80 10 19 OpenStage BLF 10 30 OpenStage Key Module 15 10 29 OpenStage Key Module 40 60 80 10 30 OpenStage PhoneAdapter 10 40 software updating 10 43 OpenStage Attendant 10 123 Operating conditions 2 92 optiClient Attendant 10 125 Licensing 8 31 optiLog 4me 10 108 Options 3 7 optiPoint 410 10 47 accessories 10 109 Add on devic...

Page 1296: ... 500 standard SL for U S only 10 85 optiPoint acoustic adapter 10 100 optiPoint analog adapter 10 96 optiPoint BLF 10 93 optiPoint ISDN adapter 10 97 optiPoint key module 10 93 optiPoint phone adapter 10 98 optiPoint recorder adapter 10 103 USB 1 1 interface 10 92 optiPoint 600 office 10 79 accessories 10 109 optiPoint Attendant 10 124 optiPoint WL2 professional 10 117 Outdoor cover 11 5 Outlet St...

Page 1297: ...3 383 trunk failure transfer 3 383 Redundancy messages 13 27 Redundancy procedure 13 27 Reinitialization 5 5 5 14 Reload 5 6 5 15 Remote access immediately after installation 12 106 Remote administration 12 105 Remote connection controlled release 12 108 Remote control 13 45 Remote service 12 103 Reset board 3 116 RGMOD 3 64 Installing 3 66 Setting 3 64 Ring frequencies for analog subscriber line ...

Page 1298: ...A24 3 168 SLMA SLMA8 3 168 cable and connector assignment 3 169 front panel 3 168 LED statuses 3 169 LEDs 3 168 shielding panel 3 169 SLMA2 3 178 cable and connector assignment 3 180 front panel 3 178 LED statuses 3 180 LEDs 3 178 SLMAE8 SLMAE 3 157 cable and connector assignment 3 159 front panel 3 158 LED statuses 3 159 LEDs 3 158 shielding panel 3 159 touch guard 3 158 SLMAV8 SLMAV24 3 189 Cabl...

Page 1299: ...ble and connector assignment 3 234 front panel 3 233 LED statuses 3 234 LEDs 3 233 STMI2 3 239 connections 3 240 figure 3 240 front panel 3 241 LAN interfaces 3 243 techn data resources 2 45 V 24 interface 3 242 variants 3 239 STRB 3 390 contact assignments 3 393 interfaces 3 391 STRBR 3 390 contact assignments 3 394 interfaces 3 391 Supplying power to base stations 3 146 Surge protector HiPath 38...

Page 1300: ...es 3 278 Jumper 3 279 TM2LP 3 262 cable and connector assignment 3 263 front panel 3 262 LED statuses 3 263 LEDs 3 262 TMAMF 3 270 cable and connector assignment 3 273 DSP diagnosis trace 3 271 figure 3 270 LED statuses 3 272 TMANI TMANI IM TMANI BRA 3 280 TMANI8 cable and connector assignment 3 282 front panel 3 281 jumper 3 282 LED states 3 282 LEDs 3 281 TMC16 3 288 cable and connector assignme...

Page 1301: ...Spain Portugal 3 347 S2M trunk connection 3 346 TS2N not for U S interface assignments 3 345 interfaces 3 344 NT cable set for Spain Portugal 3 347 S2M trunk connection 3 346 TS2R not for U S 3 343 interface assignments 3 345 interfaces 3 344 NT cable set for Spain Portugal 3 347 NT connection 3 346 S2M trunk connection 3 346 TST1 for U S only 3 340 contact assignment 3 342 figure 3 341 Tunnel 13 ...

Page 1302: ...not for U S 3 396 figure 3 396 VAD 13 23 Version hub 12 29 Virtual ports 13 17 Virtual Private Networks see VPN Voice Activity Detection 13 23 Voice coding 13 22 Voice over IP 13 20 encoding 13 21 environment requirements 13 24 VPN 13 34 VPN tunnel see tunnel W Wall mounting PB3000 9 23 Web based Management WBM 3 95 3 239 6 4 13 48 Windows Server 2000 6 38 2003 6 39 2008 6 40 Wireshark Ethereal 13...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for HiPath 3000 Series

Fagor 101 Operating Manual preview
101
Brand: Fagor Pages: 103
Jensen JBS-350 Wall Mount Instructions preview
JBS-350
Brand: Jensen Pages: 2
Watts OneFlow OFTWH-R Installation And Operation Manual preview
OneFlow OFTWH-R
Brand: Watts Pages: 8
Aastra IntelliGate 2025 User Manual preview
IntelliGate 2025
Brand: Aastra Pages: 71
ENTRYPASS EP.MINI Wiring Manual preview
EP.MINI
Brand: ENTRYPASS Pages: 27
Coby COBY CX-CD375 Specification Sheet preview
COBY CX-CD375
Brand: Coby Pages: 1
Meteo Control WEB’LOG RESIDENTIAL Quick Start Manual preview
WEB’LOG RESIDENTIAL
Brand: Meteo Control Pages: 4
Stahl 8146/5 Series Operating Instructions Manual preview
8146/5 Series
Brand: Stahl Pages: 24
Cistermiser sensazone SZ/ASK Installation Manual preview
sensazone SZ/ASK
Brand: Cistermiser Pages: 16
Discount Car Stereo A2DIY-CDR30 Quick Start Installation Manual preview
A2DIY-CDR30
Brand: Discount Car Stereo Pages: 8
LAIA Laiatech Laia t-Pod BT Manual preview
Laiatech Laia t-Pod BT
Brand: LAIA Pages: 13
Yamaha PJP-300V Additional Information preview
PJP-300V
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 2
Yamaha ADECIA RM-CR Quick Start Manual preview
ADECIA RM-CR
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 2
Yamaha FLX UC 1500 Quick Start Manual preview
FLX UC 1500
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 4
Yamaha 10-FLXUC500 Installation And Operation Manual preview
10-FLXUC500
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 21
Yamaha RMWAP8 Manual preview
RMWAP8
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 33
Yamaha SWR2311P-10G Owner'S Manual preview
SWR2311P-10G
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 44
Yamaha 10-FLXUC1000 Installation And Operation Manual preview
10-FLXUC1000
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 46

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands